US20120036049A1 - System and method for software integration and factory deployment - Google Patents

System and method for software integration and factory deployment Download PDF

Info

Publication number
US20120036049A1
US20120036049A1 US13/160,715 US201113160715A US2012036049A1 US 20120036049 A1 US20120036049 A1 US 20120036049A1 US 201113160715 A US201113160715 A US 201113160715A US 2012036049 A1 US2012036049 A1 US 2012036049A1
Authority
US
United States
Prior art keywords
software
bom
series
parts
epic
Prior art date
Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
Abandoned
Application number
US13/160,715
Inventor
Eric Gerzymisch
Vijayanand Muralidhar Kallianpur
Sean Patrick Kennedy
Masafumi Kuboyama
Brian Lee
Yoshiro Muraoka
Victor Glenn Reha
Current Assignee (The listed assignees may be inaccurate. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation or warranty as to the accuracy of the list.)
Individual
Original Assignee
Individual
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by Individual filed Critical Individual
Priority to US13/160,715 priority Critical patent/US20120036049A1/en
Publication of US20120036049A1 publication Critical patent/US20120036049A1/en
Abandoned legal-status Critical Current

Links

Images

Classifications

    • GPHYSICS
    • G06COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
    • G06FELECTRIC DIGITAL DATA PROCESSING
    • G06F8/00Arrangements for software engineering
    • G06F8/60Software deployment
    • G06F8/61Installation
    • GPHYSICS
    • G06COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
    • G06QINFORMATION AND COMMUNICATION TECHNOLOGY [ICT] SPECIALLY ADAPTED FOR ADMINISTRATIVE, COMMERCIAL, FINANCIAL, MANAGERIAL OR SUPERVISORY PURPOSES; SYSTEMS OR METHODS SPECIALLY ADAPTED FOR ADMINISTRATIVE, COMMERCIAL, FINANCIAL, MANAGERIAL OR SUPERVISORY PURPOSES, NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • G06Q10/00Administration; Management
    • G06Q10/08Logistics, e.g. warehousing, loading or distribution; Inventory or stock management
    • G06Q10/087Inventory or stock management, e.g. order filling, procurement or balancing against orders
    • GPHYSICS
    • G06COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
    • G06QINFORMATION AND COMMUNICATION TECHNOLOGY [ICT] SPECIALLY ADAPTED FOR ADMINISTRATIVE, COMMERCIAL, FINANCIAL, MANAGERIAL OR SUPERVISORY PURPOSES; SYSTEMS OR METHODS SPECIALLY ADAPTED FOR ADMINISTRATIVE, COMMERCIAL, FINANCIAL, MANAGERIAL OR SUPERVISORY PURPOSES, NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • G06Q10/00Administration; Management
    • G06Q10/08Logistics, e.g. warehousing, loading or distribution; Inventory or stock management
    • G06Q10/087Inventory or stock management, e.g. order filling, procurement or balancing against orders
    • G06Q10/0875Itemisation or classification of parts, supplies or services, e.g. bill of materials
    • GPHYSICS
    • G06COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
    • G06QINFORMATION AND COMMUNICATION TECHNOLOGY [ICT] SPECIALLY ADAPTED FOR ADMINISTRATIVE, COMMERCIAL, FINANCIAL, MANAGERIAL OR SUPERVISORY PURPOSES; SYSTEMS OR METHODS SPECIALLY ADAPTED FOR ADMINISTRATIVE, COMMERCIAL, FINANCIAL, MANAGERIAL OR SUPERVISORY PURPOSES, NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • G06Q20/00Payment architectures, schemes or protocols
    • G06Q20/08Payment architectures
    • G06Q20/20Point-of-sale [POS] network systems
    • G06Q20/203Inventory monitoring
    • GPHYSICS
    • G06COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
    • G06QINFORMATION AND COMMUNICATION TECHNOLOGY [ICT] SPECIALLY ADAPTED FOR ADMINISTRATIVE, COMMERCIAL, FINANCIAL, MANAGERIAL OR SUPERVISORY PURPOSES; SYSTEMS OR METHODS SPECIALLY ADAPTED FOR ADMINISTRATIVE, COMMERCIAL, FINANCIAL, MANAGERIAL OR SUPERVISORY PURPOSES, NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • G06Q30/00Commerce
    • G06Q30/06Buying, selling or leasing transactions
    • G06Q30/0601Electronic shopping [e-shopping]
    • G06Q30/0621Item configuration or customization
    • GPHYSICS
    • G06COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
    • G06QINFORMATION AND COMMUNICATION TECHNOLOGY [ICT] SPECIALLY ADAPTED FOR ADMINISTRATIVE, COMMERCIAL, FINANCIAL, MANAGERIAL OR SUPERVISORY PURPOSES; SYSTEMS OR METHODS SPECIALLY ADAPTED FOR ADMINISTRATIVE, COMMERCIAL, FINANCIAL, MANAGERIAL OR SUPERVISORY PURPOSES, NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • G06Q30/00Commerce
    • G06Q30/06Buying, selling or leasing transactions
    • G06Q30/0601Electronic shopping [e-shopping]
    • G06Q30/0623Item investigation
    • GPHYSICS
    • G06COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
    • G06QINFORMATION AND COMMUNICATION TECHNOLOGY [ICT] SPECIALLY ADAPTED FOR ADMINISTRATIVE, COMMERCIAL, FINANCIAL, MANAGERIAL OR SUPERVISORY PURPOSES; SYSTEMS OR METHODS SPECIALLY ADAPTED FOR ADMINISTRATIVE, COMMERCIAL, FINANCIAL, MANAGERIAL OR SUPERVISORY PURPOSES, NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • G06Q30/00Commerce
    • G06Q30/06Buying, selling or leasing transactions
    • G06Q30/0601Electronic shopping [e-shopping]
    • G06Q30/0631Item recommendations

Definitions

  • the present invention relates generally to systems and methods for software integration and factory deployment of the software.
  • BOM bill of materials
  • CTO/BTO configure to order/build to order
  • SKU stock keeping unit
  • each software part can potentially have dozens of version releases to accommodate all of these variables.
  • one version of a “click to DVD” software may be used only on French Windows MCE SR series SKUs that are sold only in Quebec, but another version may be designed to work on any model using Windows XP Home Edition Spanish Version regardless of region.
  • each platform may contain multiple VAIO models with variations on CPU, RAM, HDD capacity, wireless (WLAN, WWAN, and Bluetooth), graphics chipset, etc.
  • VAIO virtualized integrated circuit
  • RAM random access memory
  • HDD high-access memory
  • wireless wireless
  • WWAN wireless wide area network
  • Bluetooth wireless
  • graphics chipset graphics chipset
  • each model of VAIO for each region/language/country/OS variation contains well over one hundred pieces of software, each of which may be a unique version for only that model, or may be used for multiple models of VAIO, giving an idea of the exponential scope of the relationship between software and computer models the database must be designed to support.
  • the relationships between software parts and the platforms they are used on have become extremely complex, and with this critical recognition in mind, the invention herein is provided.
  • each piece of software may contain defects, or when combined in an image with other software may cause defects to be generated.
  • processes and tools are provided herein for quickly assessing the quality of a project by relating the defects to part releases, which are in turn related to projects. For example, if a major flaw is found in a particular release version of a part, this defect is related to the appropriate part release or releases so that the defect is instantly related to all the projects that use the particular part release. Given the complexity of the software BOMs, without the present invention this task would be difficult and time consuming to do manually.
  • preferred implementations of the present invention correlate the relationships between software parts, the platforms they are used on, and the quality of those parts.
  • a method for managing computer production in an enterprise includes receiving a block of software offerings, with each block being associated with at least one product series.
  • a product series component structure is received that defines parts for a respective product series. Parts that are required for a product series are added to the block associated with the series, with parts being assigned to each software class and related software specification pair in a block based on the part or parts required for the pair to thereby define a design structure.
  • the method includes establishing a software bill of materials (BOM) based on the design structure using a template and/or a snapshot.
  • BOM software bill of materials
  • the method includes defining software offerings.
  • a software offering includes at least one software class and at least one associated software specification.
  • Software offerings are associated with respective product series to establish a configuration, with configurations cumulatively defining a configuration range that contains product offerings of the enterprise for all regions in which the enterprise does business.
  • the method may include grouping classes into blocks.
  • a block is associated with at least one product series.
  • the non limiting method may also include defining which classes are dependent on each other, and defining which blocks are base blocks. Defects can be associated with related classes and corrective actions associated with respective defects.
  • the method can includes associating a respective installation file with each software offering.
  • Each installation file may include a data file format version number, a version number of an installation data snapshot, an installation order for modules, data required for confirming successful installation, cyclic redundancy check (CRC) data for each binary file, path information thr locating files in a file store, partition size information for recovery and customer partitions.
  • CRC cyclic redundancy check
  • installation anal recovery tools may use a list of software releases directly instead of microcode, which is used only for customer recovery, with microcode bit mappings being constrained to respective recovery media sets.
  • a software management database on a computer readable medium can contain data structures supporting computer software provisioning for a range of CTO/BTO variations, language variations, region variations, and operating system variations.
  • Non-limiting data structures may include bill of materials (BOM) entities containing information related to parent BOMs and child BOMs, if any.
  • BOM entity can also include an engineering part ID, a software release ID, a major version ID, a group ID, a component ID, a planning parts ID, and a software series ID.
  • a plan parts entity can also be provided that includes launch dates for software base releases, import dates for software bases indicating when the bases were imported into computers, and identifications for software bases.
  • Non-limiting entities in the database may include component entities including launch dates for software base releases, import dates for software bases, identifications for software bases.
  • Software release entities containing a base ID, a name, a file path, a launch date can also be provided, as can be software release status entities that include data representing status and name of a software release.
  • Additional database entities may include: a group entity containing data representing a name and launch of a type, a series entity containing a software series ID, base ID, name, an indication of being active, a launch date, an import date, an engineering parts entity containing an engineering part ID, a base ID, a type ID, a name, a launch date, and indication of dependent parts, an engineering parts major revision entity containing information related to default use, an engineering part software release entity containing information on a related engineering part entity, a related engineering parts major revision entity, a related language code entity, and a language entity containing information related to a language name and a language code.
  • a computer-implemented system for creating bills of materials includes logic that can be executed by a computer and stored on a computer readable medium.
  • the logic facilitates creation of BOMs using templates and/or snapshots.
  • BOMs can be automatically generated based on part attributes and groups of parts, major versions, and releases.
  • the logic can automatically check BOMs to reduce errors.
  • a computer system executing logic stored on a computer readable medium enters, into a first database, first software data.
  • the first software data includes operating systems and configure to order build to order (CTO/BTO) options.
  • CTO/BTO order build to order
  • the system transfers at least some of the first software data in the first database to a comprehensive global database, referred to herein colloquially as “ePic.”
  • Second software data such as operating system updates, device drivers, and utilities is automatically adding to a bill of materials (BOM) through the comprehensive global database.
  • BOM bill of materials
  • software along with metadata that describes the software can be checked into the comprehensive global database by users, and the BOM for a specific series/language/region can be frozen/locked and the process to create factory deliverables including software image, software modules, and data can then begin.
  • the database tracks defects and relates them to parts, stores test cases which are related to parts which in turn allows test strategies to be auto-generated.
  • FIGS. 1-3 are diagrams of non-limiting software management phases
  • FIG. 4 is a flow diagram of non-limiting overall software development, integration, and factory deployment processes
  • FIG. 5 is a flow diagram of a non-limiting software planning process
  • FIG. 6 is a flow diagram of a non-limiting bill of materials (BOM) creation process
  • FIG. 7 is a flow diagram of a non-limiting software development process
  • FIG. 8 is a flow diagram of a non-limiting software integration process
  • FIG. 9 is a flow diagram of a non-limiting factory deployment process
  • FIG. 10 is a flow diagram of aspects of a non-limiting factory deployment process
  • FIG. 11 is a flow diagram of a non-limiting software installation process
  • FIGS. 12-17 are non-limiting screen shots used for defect management and test case management purposes.
  • FIG. 18 is a diagram showing software inputs to the epic database interface
  • FIG. 18A is a flow chart of logic of downloading an image to a test system
  • FIG. 19 is a flow chart showing how BOM snapshots are generated, automatically at least in part, and entered into epic;
  • FIGS. 20 and 21 are consolidated diagrams showing the interaction between various entities in a non-limiting implementation
  • FIG. 22 is a diagram showing various data entities in the ePic database and some of their attributes
  • FIG. 23 is a map showing a non-limiting deployment regime
  • FIG. 23A is a flow chart showing software integration logic
  • FIG. 24 is a flow diagram showing a non-limiting factory deployment process.
  • FIGS. 25-27 are further non-limiting defect-related screen shots.
  • DB Hero a data store referred to below as “DB Hero”.
  • software data that is visible to customers e.g., operating systems, configure to order/build to order (CTO/BTO) options, software highlighted on web sites, etc.
  • CTO/BTO order/build to order
  • ePic a comprehensive global database referred to herein as ePic, including both stock keeping unit (SKU) data and software data.
  • factory deliverables are tested and validated to meet quality standards.
  • the factory deliverables, and the metadata that describes them, are then delivered to the factory to be used in mass production.
  • the range of potential software offerings for a given sales cycle is defined as a set of classes and specifications.
  • the class structure captures how the various software items will be offered to the customer, and is a specific type of software.
  • Specifications are individual software items that are associated with classes. Thus, a specification is an option that the customer may choose within a class, and a class may have more than one specification while a specification is assigned to only one class.
  • Software offerings (classes and specifications) are associated with individual series, with the resulting structure being called the “configuration range,”
  • the configuration range for a SKU is a list of all the Classes (and specifications) that are offered for that SKU.
  • a “class” might be “pre-installed office software”, and specifications within that class from which the customer can select might be “MS Office professional”, “MS Office Small Business”, “MS Office Basic”, and “MS Works.”
  • the database herein supports software variations in CTO/BTO, language, region, and OS.
  • this database and the tools that use it, allow for the creation of CTO systems, based on individual customer orders, in the mass production process with every piece of software preinstalled and ready to use, allowing for a virtually infinite number software offerings to customers as opposed to a few pre-defined options.
  • BOMs are created using templates and snapshots for efficiency.
  • BOMs are automatically generated based on part attributes to reduce effort, and groups of parts, major versions, and releases can be defined and reused. Automatic checking of the BOMs is provided to reduce errors.
  • installation and recovery tools use a list of software releases directly instead of microcode, which is used only for customer recovery, with microcode bit mappings being constrained to each recovery media set that is defined. This solves the problem of limited microcode bits and makes the changing of a recovery key easier.
  • FIG. 1 illustrates that the present methods may be undertaken by a computer system 10 including one or more enterprise computers 12 , each potentially having its own monitor 14 which can display the screen shots described below.
  • the enterprise computers 12 can be used by developers and software engineers to execute the invention.
  • the logic and the databases herein including the so-called “DBHero” database 16 and global database 18 , referred to herein as “epic” may be distributed over plural computers if desired, and some of the method steps may be undertaken by human users of the enterprise computers 12 while other method steps can be undertaken automatically by logic resident on computer readable media in computers.
  • the computer readable media can include but is not limited to RAM, ROM, floppy disks, hard disk drives, optical disk drives, solid state memory devices, etc.
  • a software developer or integrator selects a software series, discussed above, from a list of series.
  • the series can include data on software that an end user ordinarily “sees”, e.g., operating systems and configure to order/build to order (CTO/BTO) software options.
  • a human language and/or geographic region is selected at state 24 and then based on the selected language and region, at state 26 a processor in one or more of the enterprise computers 12 shown in FIG. 1 can retrieve a list of component parts, including images and modules. These component parts typically include software the end user ordinarily does not “see” such as operating system updates, device drivers, and utilities.
  • the software integrator selects the image or module to be built at state 28 , and at state 30 a BOM snapshot from a list is selected for the part selected at state 28 .
  • a processor in one or more of the enterprise computers 12 shown in FIG. 1 then downloads, at state 32 , BOM items from a file store that may be resident in the global database 18 shown in FIG. 1 to create an image to be loaded onto a computer to be vended.
  • the image is checked in to the global database 18 at state 34 and uploaded to the file store, from whence it may be downloaded in the factory and loaded onto a computer to be vended.
  • the process ends at state 36 .
  • FIGS. 1 through 3 represent a non-limiting version of DB Hero process.
  • FIGS. 1-3 do not include software related tasks.
  • One objective of the proposed invention is to integrate the software and hardware design processes.
  • the process outlined in the non-limiting diagram of FIG. 5 may be carried oat in the DB Hero system. This process describes how the software and hardware design processes are integrated in DB Hero.
  • the process definitions are tailored to capture details relevant to SIFD only. Details of the hardware design process are not captured here.
  • This process describes how the software and hardware design processes are integrated in DB Hero.
  • Planning Level Parts e.g. royalties, catalogue, etc.
  • Place order This step does not involve interaction with ePic. It is depicted here to show the order process relative to factory deployment for a CTO sales process).
  • This section describes how running changes would be issued using ePic. This is the VOA EPC process adapted to ePic functionality.
  • EPC-A A running change in which existing software on the Series Software BOM RTM snapshot is patched in the manufacturing process. These are deployed as modules of type EPC. There are two types of EPC modules:
  • GEN-3.1 The main system (ePic) must be available to all Sony users 24 hours a day via intranet.
  • GEN-3.2 Manufacturing deliverables should be available to 3 rd If network delivery is available, it is parties. preferred, but an offline delivery method could also be used.
  • GEN-3.2.1 Only RTM'ed or Test RTM'ed items should me made available to 3 rd party factories.
  • GEN-3.2.3 Pre-release deliverables may be distributed to 3 rd parties (for example, for validation purposes). Such deliveries should be limited to only what is required to ensure efficient use of resources.
  • GEN-3.3 Release check-in functionality should be available to 3 rd Per 2005-6-30 BRD feedback from parties not on the Sony Network. VBD.
  • GEN-1.1 Authentication policy as specified by SGS, The SGS operated “Common Authentication” system will be used for authentication for all users.
  • GEN-1.1.1 System should be accessible only to named users.
  • GEN-1.2.1 System authorization will be role/resource based. See table in 9.2.4.1 for role to resource mappings.
  • GEN-1.2.2 Authorization of the web-based application will be performed at a screen level.
  • GEN-1.2.3 Users can be assigned to one or more roles.
  • GEN-1.2.4 3 rd party users can only access data for series which they have been explicitly authorized to view. Requirements to be provided by SGS.
  • Each instance of an entity can also have an “owner list”. Users with permissions to create/edit and entity can add other users to the owner list. Users on the owner list can edit that instance of the entity regardless of their assigned system role(s).
  • Admin BOM-1.1 Manage series information.
  • X X X BOM-1.2 Manage planning parts.
  • X X X INT-1.12 Create/edit SKU's.
  • X X X BOM-1.9 Create/edit sample SW BOMs X X X (release lists).
  • BOM-1.3/DEV-1.1 Manage engineering parts.
  • X X X BOM-1.4 Manage images.
  • X X BOM-1.6 Create series SW BOM.
  • X X BOM-1.7 Set dependencies.
  • X X X BOM-1.8 Create/edit groups.
  • X X DEV-1.2 Check-in SW releases.
  • X X X X MFG-1.1/MFG-1.2 Issue RTM/Test RTM.
  • X X Mass edit entities. X Create/edit Test Case.
  • X X Create/Edit Defect except for status and X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
  • BOM-1.1.1 A series can be designated as active or inactive to 1 indicate whether the series is EOL.
  • BOM-1.1.2 Product cycle (SP05, SU05, FA05) must not be Since many products can be in production for 1 required to organize data in the system. Product cycle many cycles, the active/inactive designation will be an attribute of a series. will be used in place of product cycle.
  • BOM-1.1.3 Set series attributes. 1 BOM-1.2 Manage planning parts. 1 BOM-1.2.1 Associate engineering parts with planning parts. This information will be used to generate a 1 Associations can be made to part name or a part name “Series Software BOM”. and major version.
  • BOM-1.3 Manage engineering parts. 1 BOM-1.3.1 Create/edit engineering part.
  • BOM-1.3.5 Engineering parts can be associated with planning parts More fine grained associations are possible by 1 (so that series associations can be made via the DB editing the “Series Software BOM Template.” Hero Component BOM), or they can be manually LangRegion associations to releases will be associated with individual product series (for example, handled at module check-in time. manual association would be made for hardware specific software items).
  • BOM-1.3.5.1 User may also specify “all series” so that the part So if new series are added after this is set, they 1 would be used for all active series existing in the would still pick up this part in their BOMs. system at any moment in time.
  • BOM-1.3.6 The LangRegions to be supported by a part can be 1 specified at part creation time.
  • BOM-1.3.11 The Bios Lock ID (BLID) must uniquely identify a Satisfies VBD Factory Install WG 1 foundation image. This means that relationship Requirement 1b. between BLID and FI will be one-to-one.
  • BOM-1.3.12 The user can specify whether parts are active or not. If 1 a user sets a part “inactive” then the system will ignore/hide the part in any BOM creation activities.
  • BOM-1.4 Manage images/modules.
  • BOM-1.4.3 Snapshot BOM template Freeze BOM). NOTE: This requirement applies to Series SW 1 BOM Templates in addition to image/module BOM Templates.
  • BOM-1.4.3.2 All part information at the time of snapshotting is 1 frozen in a snapshot.
  • BOM-1.4.3.3 BOM snapshots are exposed to build tools via the build 1 tool interface.
  • BOM-1.4.3.4 A BOM snapshot is retrievable as a file via ePic UI. 1 Dropped. Satisfied by ePic “group” concept described in BOM-1.8..
  • BOM-1.6 Create Series Software BOM. 1 BOM-1.6.1 System will generate a “Series Software BOM See requirement BOM-1.8 for definition of 1 Template”, which consists of the list of specific part “group”. names, major versions, groups and/or releases assigned to a series, using DB Hero component structure, planning part associations with engineering parts, and the properties of engineering parts.
  • BOM-1.6.2 Edit “Series Software BOM Template”. Releases can This function allows special release 1 be edited manually. dependencies/incompatibilities to be handled.
  • BOM-1.6.3 The Series SW BOM will include mappings from one Satisfies VBD QA WG requirement 1 g. 1 or more DB Hero components to one or more ePic software releases. See section 9.6, requirement INT- 1.10.
  • BOM-1.6.4 Once the Series SW BOM Template is complete, the 1 user can snapshot the template. A snapshot contains only software releases (unspecified releases on the template will be set to defaults). Snapshots cannot be edited manually.
  • BOM-1.6.5 All part information at the time of snapshotting is 1 frozen in a Series SW BOM snapshot.
  • BOM-1.7.1 Other parts can be selected and dependencies will be 2 specified as “DO NOT CARE”, “EXCLUDE”, or “REQUIRED.”
  • BOM-1.7.2 The system will not allow circular dependencies to be 2 defined. Satisfies VBD QA WG requirements 1 g. Dropped per review session with VBD 2005- 9-15.
  • BOM-1.8 Create edit groups. Groups are user defined lists of This is an internal ePic concept intended to 1 engineering part names, major versions, releases, or allow users to define re-usable collections of other groups. parts. This concept, if used properly, makes BOM creation more efficient.
  • BOM-1.8.1 Groups can be added to composite part BOM Note that groups are, for the most part, 1 templates.
  • BOM-1.9 Create edit test software BOM.
  • a test software BOM Per VBD review 2005-9-15 A facility for 5 is a manually created list of software releases for a creating and sharing test software BOMs must single configuration. The releases must be listed in be available in the system. proper order of installation (based on installation This function will be used by both developers priorities specified in the system). and testers. It is the only way to create a software BOM in the system before a series software BOM has been prepared.
  • a test software BOM is, by definition, a snapshot. BOM templating functions will not be used for test BOMs.
  • BOM-1.9.1 User can search for and select part names, part major 5 versions, or releases to be added to a test BOM. System will select default release if user does not specify a specific release.
  • BOM-1.9.2 System should provide filtering capabilities to the user 5 for selecting items for the test BOM.
  • BOM-1.9.3 System should examine dependencies of the items 5 selected and automatically add releases to satisfy these dependencies.
  • BOM-1.9.4 User can download file containing the test BOM. 5 BOM-1.9.5 User can save the test BOM in the system, BOM can 5 be given a name for later retrieval. 3
  • BOM-2.2.3 User can snapshot Series SW BOM. 1 BOM-2.2.4 User can create Component/Release mappings (see 1 INT-1.10).
  • BOM-2.3 Entity Editor Access to all attributes of an entity in 1 one place.
  • BOM-2.3.1 Screens must allow all attributes for each major system The same functionality as the wizard is 1 entity to be edited one screen. supplied for each entity type.
  • BOM-3.1.1 A new part should only be created for a major version release of software.
  • Major version is defined as specification change. Iterative releases within a major release, to fix defects and such, are called Release Versions.
  • BOM-3.1.2 A part name should include the name of the part only, in general terms. For example: Adobe Premiere Professional, VAIO Zone, Sonic Stage.
  • the major version number is an attribute of the part, and can be concatenated for UI and reporting purposes. For example, a part can be created with the Part Name of “Adobe Premiere Professional” and the major version number of “7.1”. The part becomes the concatenation of the part name and major version number: “Adobe Premiere Professional 7.1”.
  • BOM-4.5.1 DB Hero BOM data can be manually loaded from into 1 ePic (via ePic UI). Data updates should be performed using the most efficient means available.
  • BOM-4.5.2 Pre DB Hero release BOM data can only be loaded into One button to update all DB Hero data for a 2 ePic manually. Initial load of any BOM must be series is ideal. manual.
  • BOM-4.5.3 After the DB Hero release, structure/part changes Without ECNs manual load is the only 2 which generate an ECN are automatically implemented possibility (except for series and parts, whose in ePic. Revision history is not kept. masters are synced regularly).
  • BOM-4.5.4 ECNs can be requested by date range.
  • ePic should Update period should be a configurable ePic 2 periodically request all ECNs since last update system option. automatically.
  • BOM-4.5.5 Email and UI notifications will be produced for 2 software integrators for the following changes to DB Hero BOMs: Any SW part (planning part) change on component BOMs. Any changes (HW or SW) to components used in component/release mappings. Changes to Config Range/Line-up. BOM-4.5.6 DB Hero data will be loaded into ePic at most once per If users need up-to-date data, they can initiate 1 day, and at least once per week. a manual transfer via ePic UI.
  • DEV-1.1.1 The set of LangRegions supported by the module must 1 be specified.
  • DEV-1.1.2 The part can be associated with a planning part and/or See BOM-1.3.5. 1 target series. Neither is required (though warning should be issued if neither is selected).
  • DEV-1.2 Check-in software release (non-image). 1
  • DEV-1.2.1 Developer must identify LangRegions supported by the 1 software release to be checked-in.
  • DEV-1.2.2 Developer must indicate installation method and 1 unattended installation command. Alternate installation commands may also be entered with comments.
  • DEV-1.2.5 Software item check-in should allow files to be 1 checked-in to local mirror and uploaded to main store asynchronously.
  • DEV-1.2.6 If the item to be checked in is not an image, it will 1 automatically be replicated to other file stores. If the item is an image, replication will not occur automatically. Users can request to the system that an image be downloaded to their regional file store via ePic UI.
  • DEV-1.2.7 The following statuses can be specified for a release: Satisfies VBD QA WG requirement 1d. 1 “ES/Test”, “FF”, “Pilot”, “CF”, “RC”, and “GM.” Satisfies VBD Factory Install WG requirement 2a.
  • DEV-1.2.8 User can optionally request that the system send the 1 release email.
  • DEV-1.2.8.1 Release email address list is a configurable system This list could also be auto-generated based on 1 item. roles.
  • DEV-1.2.9 User can set a release “inactive.” Inactive releases 1 cannot be set as “default” and vice versa.
  • DEV-1.3 Create/Edit Vendor 1 DEV-1.3.1 User can store information about a software vendor 1 (Name, Address, Contact, Sony Contact).
  • DEV-1.3.2 Vendor can be optionally associated with an It is appropriate to include vendor name in part 1 engineering part. name and also have a vendor association.
  • DEV-1.4 User can initiate download of any release via ePic UI. 1
  • ePic requirements to support integrators who use the system are listed here. ePic will provide a single interface to build tools. Each regional group is expected to modify their build tools to work with the new interface. Functionality specified here is to be used by integrators as part of image creation and Series Software BOM creation. Functionality to manage DB Hero SKU's and associated BOMs and create dummy SKUs and BOMs is also included here.
  • INT-1.2 Check-in software release (image).
  • 1 INT-1.2.1 Software item check-in should allow files to be 1 checked-in to local mirror and uploaded to main store asynchronously.
  • INT-1.3 Schedule software integration activities. Future Requirement. Not in scope.
  • NTH INT-1.4 Track software integration activities. Future Requirement. Not in scope.
  • NTH INT-1.5 Event triggered notification concerning software Future Requirement. Not in scope. NTH integration activities.
  • INT-1.6 System should not have any functional dependencies Build systems will be loosely coupled with 1 on any external build systems. ePic.
  • INT-1.7 Monolithic Images will be created by selecting a SKU User must select which series SW BOM 5 that has been loaded from DB Hero or manually snapshot to use for this function. created in the system (see INT-1.12). The system will automatically create the Image BOM using the series software BOM. INT-1.7.1 Monolithic image BOMs are not editable by users. User must edit the appropriate Series Software 5 BOM to change monolithic BOMs. INT-1.8 ePic will support creation and deployment of MLHD MLHD configurations are like SKUs that 5 configurations. include software for more than one LangRegion.
  • INT-1.8.1 MLHD BOM Template will be automatically generated 5 based on user selected SKU BOM(s) loaded from DB Hero or manually created in ePic (see INT-1.12).
  • INT-1.8.2 MLHD BOM is not manually editable. User should edit SKU BOM and associated 5 Series Software BOM to change MLHD BOM contents.
  • INT-1.8.3 MLHD BOM will be exposed to build system just like An attribute will allow VOE build system to 5 any other image BOM. distinguish MLHD BOMs from other images.
  • INT-1.9 Component selector Allow user to create DB Hero User can use this function to specify a 2 Component lists by selecting DB Hero specs and configuration or just a set of components. classes.
  • This function is used to specify component-to- release mappings during series SW BOM Creation (BOM-1.6) and dummy SKU BOM Creation (INT-1.12.2). It is intended to make it easier for users to select components by allowing them to select the same items a customer would in a sales system.
  • INT-1.9.2 If user is creating a configuration, DB Hero constraints This is necessary to create valid 2 are checked by the system once all selections have been configurations. made.
  • INT-1.9.3 DB Hero spec-to-component relations are used to Thomas will not implement constraints 2 convert user selected specs/classes to a list of enforcement which is required for ePic. components. Dropped. VOA must adapt DB Hero 2 deliverables to existing systems and Thomas will not have all required functionality.
  • INT-1.10 Specify Component-to-Release Mappings.
  • One or These mappings will be included in the 1 more DB Hero Components is mapped to one or more “installation data file,” and factory tools will Releases on a Series SW BOM template. use these mappings to select the correct releases to install on a configuration based on the list of DB Hero components that make up that configuration (this is a SKU BOM).
  • INT-1.10.1 If no mappings exist, the system will auto-generate 1 mappings by using planning part associations to resolve which components will be selected.
  • INT-1.10.2 User can use component selector to select additional 1 components to be used in a component/release mapping or select components directly.
  • INT-1.10.3 System will perform sanity checks upon submission of 1 mappings: Ensure all SW items on the Series SW BOM have mappings with DB Hero components.
  • INT-1.11 Integrators can request images from non-local file Images are not synced to other file stores by 1 stores be copies to the local store. default.
  • INT-1.12 Manage SKU's.
  • a SKU represents an individual SKU BOMs are used by the system to auto- 2 configuration. create monolithic image BOMs (INT-1.7) and MLHD BOMs (INT-1.8).
  • a SKU (stock keeping unit) is a DB Hero part representing a configuration. The part number of such an item is also called SKU or F- number.
  • a SKU BOM is a SKU part with a list of DB Hero component parts representing one configuration as children. Some configurations (for retail products) are officially defined in DB Hero. These product configurations are referred to as Fixed SKUs.
  • INT-1.12.1 SKU BOMs are loaded from DB Hero as part of DB 2 Hero interface functionality. SKU BOMs contain a SKU item as parent and components as children.
  • INT-1.12.2 User can also manually create SKU's. User can use 2 the component selector (INT-1.9) to create a SKU BOM. For manually created SKU BOMs, user should specify the SKU Description.
  • INT-4.5.1 Data to be exported 1 Active Series Master LangRegion Master Image/module BOM Snapshots All entity attributes Binary data (in file store)
  • Register part functionality must be available 1 Authenticate remotely, for example, so that a PIDVD part Check-in (to ePic) (factory media) can be created by build tools Upload files (to local file store) automatically for each monolithic image Register Part (to facilitate auto-creation of created. related parts)
  • Set default release INT-4.7 Config Range must be retrieved from DB Hero.
  • INT-4.8 Constraints must be retrieved from DB Hero.
  • INT-1.9 Interface specified in “DB Hero 5 Common Interface Protocol Specification 2005-07-07”, page 14 and 30.
  • INT-4.9 Spec-to-Component relations must be retrieved from For INT-1.9. Interface specified in “DB Hero 2 DB Hero. Common Interface Protocol Specification 2005-07-07”, page 17 and 35. INT-4.10 All SKU BOMs must be retrieved from DB Hero and For INT-1.7 SKUs are identified by F- 2 stored in ePic. number. Interface specified in “DB Hero Common Interface Protocol Specification 2005-07-07”, page 10 and 24.
  • MFG-1.1 Snapshot Series Software BOM This functionality Snapshots are used for several operations: 1 should be available from the series software BOM Installation Data File creation, Test Strategy management screens. management. MFG-1.1.1 A snapshot can be flagged as a Release Candidate The latest RC snapshot is used for generating 2 (RC). Test Strategies. This function would be used for the “BOM Freeze” milestone in VOA. MFG-1.1.2 User must enter a text version string (or snapshot For example, “1.0”, “1.1.1-rc”, or “Build 1”. 1 name) for each series software BOM snapshot. This Business units will decide conventions this version string should be unique for Series/LangRegion field. combination. This is in addition to system generated ID.
  • MFG-1.3 Running change management. 4 MFG-1.3.1 If a user issues an RTM against a Series/LangRegion 4 combination for which a RTM snapshot already exists the system should warn the user that a previous snapshot was RTM'ed and this is a running change. MFG-1.3.2 When system sends release mail to users, the mail For example: 5 should indicate that the change is a running change to Changes since initial RTM: RTM'ed software. In addition to items described in ⁇ part name> ⁇ detailed ver.> ( ⁇ rel. id>) MFG-1.2.2 the following items should be included in [ADDED] the mail: ⁇ part name> ⁇ detailed ver.> ( ⁇ rel.
  • System will provide This data will be included in the installation 5 functionality for specifying partition sizes for all data file. partitions to be used on production systems. Special partitions “recovery” and “system” (or C drive) can be defined. “System partition must always be specified. MFG-1.4.1 Partitions sizes can be defined for each 5 Series/LangRegion combination. MFG-1.4.2 Partition sizes should be specified in MB (megabytes). 5 MFG-1.4.3 For the recovery partition, user can select “dynamic” If a partition size is dynamic, installation tools 5 instead of specifying a size. For system partition user will decide what the size will be. can specify “single partition” instead of specifying a If partition size is “single partition”, then all size.
  • MFG-1.4.4 For the “system” partition, user must specify a This is used in the factory so that a diagnostic 5 minimum size. This is always required. partition can be created. For single partition models the partition size will be extended to the final size at the end of the factory process. MFG-1.4.5 If user selects “dynamic” for recovery partition size, 5 user must also specify “recovery partition installed size.” This is the size in MB of all data included in the recovery image. It is needed to calculate a dynamic partition size. MFG-1.4.5 For each partition specified, user must specify a disk For example, “Disk 1, Partition 2, SYSTEM.” 5 number, partition number, and label name.
  • MFG-1.4.6 For each partition specified, user must specify a file Standard partition types and numbers should 5 system type. This type will be stored as a hexadecimal be used. number, but system should prompt users with partition type name.
  • MFG-1.5 Factory Media Management. System should provide 4 some addition functionality to facilitate media delivery to factories when defining factory media engineering parts.
  • MFG-1.5.1 System should provide function for auto-creating 4 media BOM based on a series SW BOM snapshot. User can select the snapshot (by RTM, Test RTM, Latest, or version field) and system will prepare a BOM which includes the appropriate installation data file.
  • MFG-1.5.2 System should provide function for auto-creating a 4 media set containing only files which have changed from another media set. User should select two series software BOM snapshots.
  • Default is initial RTM'ed snapshot and latest RTM'ed snapshot. Appropriate installation data file will be included on the BOM.
  • MFG-1.5.3 User can manually add/remove releases from the 4 Factory Media BOM.
  • IDF Installation Data File
  • 1 INST-1.1.1 Installation Data File must include the following Satisfies VBD Factory Install WG requirements 1 elements for each Series/LangRegion: 1a-f. Minimum tools version number - checked Factory Install WG 1c and 1f-1 are satisfied by tools to ensure the correct version is since P1 images, patches, and running changes being used (configurable value). are treated like any other module. Version number of the installation data snapshot. The contents of Snyinst.oem. Installation order for the modules. Mapping of DB Hero components to ePic SW releases. Data required for the installation tools to confirm successful installation of each release. CRC data for each binary file.
  • Total size of each release binary data (used for dynamic partition size calculation). Path information required to locate binary files in the file store and download them (via SMB share). Partition size information for recovery and system partitions. All partition information defined in the system should be included and a field listing total number of partitions defined should be calculated and included in the file. BIOS time zone offset from GMT by the series/LangRegion (e.g., GMT +8, GMT ⁇ 7). For each release included in the file, engineering organization for the developer who checked-in the release. Recovery type (HDD Recovery or media only). MLHD specific information, if applicable. Relevant MCode specification(s). List of all software releases and attributes of all software releases on the Series SW BOM (BLID will be included as an attribute of FI releases).
  • INST-1.1.3 An installation data file can be automatically Intended to satisfy Factory Install WG 3 downloaded to a factory file store, it can be retrieved requirement 3a. manually via ePic UI, or it can be retrieved via DLL interface.
  • INST-1.1.4 Installation data files are generated for each Series There will be many IDF's. To make 2 Software BOM Snapshot. management easier special requirements have been specified for online (STOR-1.10 and STOR-1.14) and offline (MFG-1.5) factory deployment methods. INST-1.1.5 All users can retrieve the “Test RTM” or “RTM” Satisfies Factory Install WQ requirement 1f-2. 4 version of the installation data file for a given series. Sony users can additionally retrieve the “latest” snapshot of an installation data file.
  • INST-1.1.6 Each installation data file must have a unique name 1 with the unique identifier included in the name. INST-1.2 “RTM”, “Test RTM”, and “latest” snapshots of 4 installation data can be generated and stored in the system. INST-1.3 Installation data will be “cycle-less.” Installation data 2 will support all cycles for a given series. INST-1.4 All users must have a system account to access these 2 services. INST-1.5 Third party users should have access only to data 5 relevant to them. Data will be restricted by series (see ADM-1.3). INST-1.6 MCode management. 4 INST-1.6.2 A MCode specification (bit mapping to software This means that MCodes can be duplicated with 4 releases) is defined for each Recovery Media Set. each instance having different meanings.
  • INST-1.6.3 The system will generate a MCode specification once 4 the Recovery Media Set BOM and Series SW BOM for the associated series' are complete. This function can be re-run if the BOM changes and existing MCode Mappings will not be affected.
  • INST-1.6.4 The system can calculate a MCode given a list of SW Satisfies VBD Factory Install WG requirement 5 releases or a list of DB Hero components representing 2c. a single configuration.
  • INST-1.6.5 The system can calculate the list of software based on a 5 given MCode.
  • INST-1.6.5.1 User can produce a list of software from an encrypted 5 MCode or unencrypted MCode. If the MCode is encrypted, user must also enter a UUID (text string) to facilitate decryption.
  • INST-1.6.6 The system can calculate a MCode based on a SKU System must first convert list of DB Hero 4 BOM (user defined or from DB Hero) defined in the components to a list of software releases to system. accomplish this. A SKU BOM must be used, because calculating a valid MCode requires that DB Hero constraints have been enforced for the configuration (see Component Selector, INT- 1.9).
  • INST-1.6.6.1 User can optionally generate an encrypted MCode by 5 entering a UUID in the system.
  • INST-1.6.7 The MCode specification will be included in the 4 installation data file.
  • INST-1.7 Recovery Media Planner Users can define a BOM 4 template for a Recovery Media Engineering Part using a wizard or form.
  • INST-1.7.1 User selects the Series and LangRegion for which the 1 recovery media will be created. User can optionally must select an OS, as well.
  • INST-1.7.2 System will auto create a Recovery Media BOM 4 template. This function is identical to Series Software BOM auto-generation except that it is also constrained by OS selection.
  • INST-1.7.2.1 User can manually add/remove engineering 1 parts/release/groups to the BOM template.
  • INST-1.7.2.2 User can create snapshots of the Recovery Media BOM 1 template. Requirements are the same as for Series Software BOM.
  • INST-2.1.1 Select Series, LangRegion, and OS. One or more of 1 any of these items may be selected. Set media specific attributes.
  • INST-2.1.2 System auto-generates media BOM. Show software Series SW BOM is required for auto- 4 releases and media layout. Allow user to add items to generation. If it is unavailable, user may BOM. Items generated from Series SW BOM cannot create BOM from scratch. be edited.
  • INST-2.1.3 Generate MCode bit mappings. System stores bit 4 mappings. Existing bit mappings are frozen if any Series/LangRegion assigned to media set it RTM'ed. Additional mappings may be created post-RTM.
  • TOOL-1.4 BIOS/Firmware and tools (e.g., to burn BIOS, write 3 firmware or write DMI) part types should be downloaded automatically.
  • TOOL-1.5 BIOS/Firmware parts should be automatically 3 installable.
  • TOOL-1.6 Release Notes and Bug Lists for all parts can be 2 automatically downloaded.
  • TOOL-1.7 Paper manual contents can be automatically 2 downloaded.
  • TOOL-1.8 QA download and installation services and tools must Satisfies QA WG requirements for network 2 be available worldwide to VAIO engineering groups, installation item 3 and 5c. outsourced QA groups, and ODMs. Detailed list of users is included in the original document.
  • TOOL-1.9 Tools should check the minimum required version in 2 the installation data file and should return an error if they are a lower version.
  • TOOL-1.10 Tools will determine install order based on data from 2 ePic.
  • TOOL-1.11 Tools must operate in WinXP and WinPE. Satisfies QA WG requirements for network 2 installation item 5e and 2i.
  • TOOL-1.12 Tools must implement function to convert an MCode to This enables the distribution of MCodes to 2 a list of software releases (using the installation data factory for Fixed SKU production, and it file) and vice versa. enables calculation of MCodes on the fly by installation tools during the modular installation process.
  • TOOL-1.13 Unique ID of each software release must be verified Satisfies VBD QA WG requirement 3a. 3 after installation.
  • TOOL-1.14 Installation tools must be able to detect whether a Satisfies VBD QA WG requirement 3b.
  • TOOL-1.15 Installation tools should support automatic creation of a Satisfies QA WG requirements for network 3 target environment on a machine.
  • installation item 5a TOOL-1.15.1 Target environment includes an HDD image. Assumption is that this is a foundation image.
  • 3 TOOL-1.15.2 Target environment includes firmware and BIOS 3 updates.
  • TOOL-1.15.3 Target environment includes updating of DMI data.
  • 3 TOOL-1.16 Installation tools must have locking mechanism so that Satisfies QA WG requirements for network 3 they only work on Sony PCs.
  • installation item 5b TOOL-1.17 QA installation can be initiated using a WinPE boot Satisfies QA WG requirements for network 2 CD.
  • installation item 5d TOOL-1.18 Installation tools must work in Windows.
  • TOOL-1.19 Installation tools must support preparing recovery Satisfies QA WG requirements for network 3 partition only without performing full install. installation.
  • TOOL-1.20 An automated system should exist that can scan This would help facilitate Test System data 3 hardware data for test systems and load it into ePic entry. through a network connection. WMI based configuration checking implementation could be used to satisfy this requirement.
  • TOOL-1.21 A DLL should be provided that utilizes MCode 1 encoding/decoding and MCode decryption/encryption.
  • TOOL-1.22 Three use cases for installation tools will be supported: 1. Installation using a list of DB Hero component part numbers. a. Convert list of component part numbers to list of software releases. b.
  • STOR-1.7 During a download operation, the total size of the files 3 to be downloaded can be reported to the user before the download starts.
  • STOR-1.8 Users must be able to load binary data into the file Some factories will receive images and 3 store from media. modules on DVD (factory media set).
  • STOR-1.9 User must be able to operate the file store without a Perhaps factory file store can work with just 1 database connection to ePic. installation data file. Engineering stores may use database connection to acknowledge check-in(s) and perform other advanced functions.
  • STOR-1.10 File store will provide a function for downloading latest This function is for factories. 3 installation data file for a Series/LangRegion. The Series/LangRegion list for this function should be kept in a configuration file and downloads should be manually triggered.
  • STOR-1.10.1 User should be able to view/download the list of 3 changes (the same as in requirement MFG-1.3.2) when the file store download is triggered.
  • STOR-1.11 The file store solution should be deliverable as an Package is sent with user manual and required 1 easily installable package with a simple configuration configuration parameters. file.
  • STOR-1.12 The file store solution should be deployable to a wide File store users will have more flexibility in 1 range of system architectures. hardware selection or they can leverage existing infrastructure.
  • STOR-1.13 File and directory management. 1 1 STOR-1.13.2 Files should be stored in a flat file structure with each It is acceptable to have a few directories on the 1 file uniquely named. file store, as long as it is human navigable. Files could be named as the release ID with type prefix.
  • STOR-1.14 A factory file store can be synchronized based on the Intended to satisfy Factory Install WG 3 installation data file. requirement 3b and 3d.
  • STOR-1.15 Files and directories (binary data) in the file store Satisfies Factory Install WG requirement 3c. 1 should be uniquely named. 5.9.2 User interface Requirements
  • STOR-3.1 Any business unit requiring a file store will be Storage requirements will vary for each responsible for purchasing and maintaining hardware. installation.
  • STOR-3.2 Any non-GM software must be available for a specified Satisfies QA WG requirements for network period of time (e.g. 100 days) after the GM version has installation item 4. been released.
  • STOR-3.3 Golden Master (GM) SW releases must be available Satisfies QA WG requirements for network for an indefinite period of time. installation item 4. If indefinite period is impossible one of the following: By the end of OS support period. By the end of product support period. By the end of key parts availability for HW services.
  • STOR-4.1 File store must communicate with other 1 file stores.
  • STOR-4.2 Files stores must authenticate before 1 connecting to another file store or ePic for any reason.
  • TEST-1.1.1 Only “Project Test Leads” and “Test Leads” can 3 create/edit Test Cases and create/edit Test Strategies.
  • TEST-1.1.2 Testers can update the results of a Test Case or 3 create/edit defects. Testers can edit Test Case definitions if they have been added to the owner list for the Test Case by a Test Lead or Project Test Lead.
  • TEST-1.1.3 Developers and Integrators can update status and “Fix-verified” resolution is used to confirm 3 resolution of defects, but cannot set resolution of regression tests were successful.
  • TEST-1.1.4 Any user with an assigned role in the system can Authenticated users without roles are given 3 enter a defect in open status. read-only access to all parts of the system.
  • TEST-1.2.2 If a user chooses to associate a defect with a series, 3 the user should then have the option of selecting releases from the series software BOM (if available).
  • TEST-1.2.3 Before entering a defect, the user should be able to Search functions should be accessible from the 3 search existing defects to ensure that duplicates or create defect view. Similar defects do not already exist.
  • TEST-1.2.4 Defects can be associated with one or more Test 3 Systems. TEST-1.2.4 Defects must be associated with Test Cases if they 3 are discovered as part of testing (see requirements TEST-2.1.4). Defects can also manually be associated with a test case.
  • TEST-1.2.5 Any changes made to an existing defect should be 3 captured in a history log. The user, date/time, and attributes changed should be captured. Changes to values for status and resolution of defect should be tracked in the history log. For other attributes values do not need to be tracked.
  • TEST-1.2.6.1 System will display a table of open defects and allow It is preferred that notes entry be a separate 3 user to enter status, resolution, and notes for each screen invoked by a link to facilitate a more defect. compact UI. TEST-1.2.6.2 If user sets defect resolution to “Will Not Fix” or 3 “Deferred” a note is required.
  • TEST-1.3 Foundation Image (FI) Defect Propagation Tool This is a special purpose function required 4 because each FI is defined as separate engineering part in ePic, but defects found in the FI will often apply to many FIs (for example, defects cause by build tools). It is intended to be used by integrators/image builders as opposed to QA personnel.
  • TEST-1.3.1 System displays all open defects against foundation 4 images and a table of all active foundation image engineering parts and releases.
  • TEST-1.3.2 Attributes displayed for foundation images facilitate 4 dimensional analysis to identify other FIs affected by a defect. User can sort table by column or filter table by column values.
  • TEST-1.3.3 User can select one defect and one or more releases 4 in the FI table and assign the defect to all selected FIs.
  • TEST-1.4 Create/edit test system.
  • User can define test systems 5 (PCs used for testing software and hardware) in ePic.
  • TEST-1.4.1 Each BOM should include a list of basic categories Such categories are maintained in DB Hero as 5 to help user create test BOM: CPU, HDD, ODD, an attribute of parts called “Classification.” Motherboard, LCD, etc. Parts for specific categories This attribute should be used for this function. are not required to be entered; these categories are used only as filters for the hardware parts list.
  • TEST-1.4.2 The user can create a BOM for the hardware (DB 5 Hero HW parts) and Firmware (ePic eng. parts) in a test system. User can browse parts by series or description.
  • TEST-1.4.3 The user should be able to define addition parts on a Sometimes users must substitute parts that are 5 test system BOM template that are not included in not on the DB Hero BOM in the test system. DB Hero part lists. User defined parts will only be User defined HW parts would use the same available for test system management. User defined attributes as DB Hero HW parts. parts will use the same categories as normal DB This function will also be used for special Hero parts. items which must appear on the RTM report, like firmware versions. TEST-1.4.4 User can use parts from more than one series on a Appropriate parts may not be available so user 5 test system BOM. should be able to use any part in test systems.
  • TEST-1.4.5 When a defect is related to a test system, the test 5 system BOM template and other data is automatically snapshotted. The snapshot must be related to the defect. TEST-1.4.6 DMI settings for each test system must be stored in This data is included on RTM report. This 4 ePic. The user can enter the values for a set of keys. data is output from the SXSYSINF tool The keys required are “Manufacturer,” “Model maintained by System Engineering. Keys Name,” “BIOS Lock ID,” “MCode (Un-encrypted),” must be kept in sync with the development of “MCode Tool Version (CDS Models Only),” “BIOS this tool. Information,” “Universal Information.” Keys should be configurable (no admin screen necessary).
  • TEST-1.4.7 User can associate a test BOM or SKU BOM with a 4 test system. This BOM will be used to image the system.
  • TEST-1.5.1.1 A Test Case result (Pass/Fail/Impeded/Not Tested) 3 can be stored for each combination of series and part release. Results are not stored unless the test case is added to a test strategy (default is “Not Tested”). A text note and timestamp must be stored for each result entered in the system. User should be able to retrieve the Test Case result history for a test case for a given Test Strategy or Release.
  • TEST-1.5.1.2 Test cases have the following categories: 3 Basic, Ad-hoc, Use Case, Compatibility, FIV, Benchmarks, MDA, Screen Shot Capture, Accessory, Business Unit, and Other. Some categories have special requirements. See description of categories in section 9.11.5.1. TEST-1.5.1.2.1 Benchmark and MDA Tests results include admin 3 defined category/key sets. Category, Key, and the Value stored are all text fields. Categories should have names and long descriptions. TEST-1.5.1.2.2 Only users with admin privileges can define key These keys change regularly but infrequently. 3 names to be used for Benchmark and MDA testing. An admin screen (not config file) is required for this function.
  • TEST-1.5.1.2.3 Screen Shot Capture tests can have an image file This is a special test case used for the RTM 3 (.JPG, .PNG, or .BMP) attached to it. report.
  • TEST-1.5.1.2.4 Compatibility Tests can have a list of required parts 3 attached to them. This is a text field filled out manually.
  • TEST-1.5.1.4 Test Case data for a single test case can be exported Per VOE review, 2005-11-10. 3 to an Excel spreadsheet.
  • TEST-1.6 Users can define named Test Case Groups.
  • TEST-1.6.1 Test Case Groups can be public or private. Private 3 groups are visible only to the user that created the group.
  • TEST-1.6.2 Test Case Groups can be assigned to the same 3 entities as Test Cases. Such assignments are used as defaults when a user creates a new test within a group.
  • TEST-1.7 Test Strategy Management. 3 TEST-1.7.1 Each series defined in the system will have a test 3 strategy associated with it by default. A series test strategy is a list of test cases and/or defect regressions to be executed against the latest series software BOM snapshot for that series.
  • TEST-1.7.2 User can create and ad-hoc named test strategy to 3 facilitate pre-integration testing.
  • Test strategy can be associated with exactly one engineering part/major version.
  • TEST-1.7.3 Test cases and defect regressions can belong to more 3 than one test strategy. Test case can be added to a strategy only once (no duplicates allowed).
  • TEST-1.7.4 Test strategy auto-update and editing Test strategies Only project test leads can perform these 4 are partially auto-updated when a Project Test Lead activities. accesses the test strategy for a given Series/LangRegion combination.
  • TEST-1.7.4.1 For series test strategies, if a new series software 4 BOM snapshot has been changed or if the status of the snapshot has been changed to Release Candidate (RC), the system will auto-update the test strategy for any releases or that have changed since the last time the test strategy was generated.
  • TEST-1.7.4.2 For ad-hoc test strategies the system will examine the 4 associated engineering part. Composite parts will be recursively processed. TEST-1.7.4.3 Auto-update of test strategies is performed only for 4 the selected LangRegion. TEST-1.7.4.4 1 st build (release) test strategy auto-update: 4 Triggered for the first release checked-in for the first major version of an engineering part. TEST-1.7.4.4.1 Level 1 and 2 test cases associated with the 4 series/part and Level 1 and 2 test cases with no associations are added to the test strategy. TEST-1.7.4.4.2 User can manually add level 3 test cases and test case 4 groups.
  • TEST-1.7.4.5 Minor revision test strategy auto-update Triggered 4 for any new releases/defaults which are not the first release.
  • Test cases are updated as follows: TEST-1.7.4.5.1 Defect regressions are added to the test strategy: 4 Defects with resolution “Fixed” which are associated with the current engineering part/major version or any of its releases are added to the test strategy as “defect regressions.” There are no test cases associated with defect regressions (though there may be test cases associated with the defect itself, they are not used here).
  • TEST-1.7.4.5.2 System adds test cases for any open defects against If defects matching the criteria do not have 4 the current engineering part/major version with associated test cases then they are ignored by Priority of “Must Fix” or “Should fix.” Test cases the system. for open defects with Priority equal to “None” and Severity equal to “1” are also added to the test strategy.
  • TEST-1.7.4.6 Major Revision test strategy auto-update: Triggered 4 for the first release checked in against a major version that is not the first major version.
  • TEST-1.7.4.6.2 System adds test cases for any open defects against If defects matching the criteria do not have 4 the previous engineering part/major version with associated test cases then they are ignored by Priority of “Must Fix” or “Should fix.” Test cases the system. for open defects with Priority equal to “None” and Severity equal to “1” are also added to the test strategy.
  • TEST-1.7.4.7 Final build test strategy auto-update Triggered 4 whenever the latest series software BOM snapshot has been flagged as a Release Candidate (does not apply to ad-hoc test strategies).
  • TEST-1.7.4.7.1 System adds Compatibility, FIV, and Screen Shot If a new snapshot has been generated and them 4 Capture Test Cases to the test strategy. flagged as an RC before the test strategy has been auto-updated, the system should also run the appropriate auto-update tasks.
  • TEST-1.7.4.8 User can re-initiate test strategy auto-update 4 manually at any time.
  • TEST-1.7.5 User can select a part on the test strategy and view all 3 open defects.
  • TEST-1.7.5.1 User can add test cases associated with open defects 3 to the test strategy.
  • TEST-1.7.5.2 User can add the defect as a defect regression 3 (implies changing status to “closed” and resolution to “fixed”).
  • TEST-1.7.6 User can add/delete any test case or test group from a 3 test strategy (even if the test case was added as part of an auto-update action).
  • TEST-1.7.6.1 If a level 1 or regression test case is deleted, a Only one warning should be displayed for 3 warning/confirmation dialog is displayed to the user. multiple selections.
  • TEST-1.7.6.2 A note indicating that level 1 or regression test cases 3 were deleted from a test strategy, and who deleted it when, should be added to the history log.
  • TEST-1.7.7 System should invalidate (set to “pending”) any test This will only be done for Series Test 4 case result for parts if a new release for a part on Strategies, not Ad-Hoc ones. which they depend (based on dependencies defined in ePic) has been checked in. The invalidated test cases should be indicated (highlighted) for the user on screen. Results of the previous test case result should be retained by the system for reference.
  • TEST-1.7.8 Leads can assign Test Cases on a Test Strategy to 3 individual testers.
  • TEST-1.7.9 User can attach one or more test BOMs created using A test BOM can be extracted from the system 4 the function described in section 9.4.1, requirement via interface and used by installation tools to BOM-1.9. prepare a test system.
  • TEST-1.7.10 User can attach one or more SKUs to the test strategy The BOM associated with the SKU can be 5 which have been created using the function described extracted from the system via interface and in section 9.6.1, requirement INT-1.12. used by installation tools to prepare a test system.
  • TEST-1.7.11 When a tester accesses a test strategy, the system will 3 display test cases/defect regressions assigned to that user, and any test cases/defect regressions not assigned to any user.
  • Tester can update the result of each test case and the status/resolution or each defect displayed.
  • TEST-1.7.12 Test must select the Test System used before any test 5 results can be changed.
  • TEST-1.7.13 System must provide a view of a test strategies by See RPT-21. 4 active series which displays the percentage of test cases completed.
  • TEST-1.8 System must provide function to escalate defect to This requires an interface to the VELSUN 5 VELSUN (global sustaining system). system maintained by SDNA.
  • TEST-1.9 System must provide function to push defect to This requires an interface to the VALSUN 5 VALSUN (software defect system used by system maintained by SDNA. SDNA/VBD).
  • TEST-1.10 Reports currently provided by VSMS for CISC must 4 be available in ePic.
  • TEST-1.11 All notes/text area fields should provide advanced 5 editing functionality.
  • TEST-1.11.1 Spell checker functionality should be available.
  • 5 TEST-1.11.2 Formatting functionality as follows: 5 Bullets Numbered lists Color text Font selection TEST-1.11.3 Formatting applied in edit screens should be 5 maintained for reports.
  • TEST-1.12 Benchmark/MDA Field editor User can define 3 delete keys used for Benchmark/MDA test case categories. Only users with admin privileges can use this function.
  • TEST-2.1.1 List of test cases and defect regressions should be 3 displayed in upper right panel. Test cases can be marked as pass/fail and defect resolution can be changed in this panel without opening other windows, only scrolling and clicking.
  • TEST-2.1.2 Facilitating for updating multiple test cases should be For example, check boxes for selecting test 3 provided. cases and action buttons that apply attribute changes to all select test cases.
  • TEST-2.1.3 Details of each selected test case should be displayed in 3 lower right panel.
  • TEST-2.1.4 Test cases marked as “failed” should trigger a prompt 3 for entering a defect. Defects created in this manner will be automatically linked to the appropriate test case.
  • TEST-2.2 Defects can be entered directly from the main 3 menu/navigation panel or can be entered when a test case has been marked as failed. If a defect is entered in connection with a test case the defect.
  • TEST-2.3 Installation tools and recovery images can be Same as requirement DEV-2.2 since these 1 downloaded from ePic manually by UI. items will be defined as engineering parts in ePic.
  • TEST-4.1 VELSUN Interface Used to escalate defects to global Satisfies US sustaining requirements. 5 sustaining group.
  • TEST-4.2 VALSUN Interface Used to push defects into software 5 development defect database used in VBD/SDNA TEST-4.4 Tools interface. Tools will provide functions for Assumption is that testers will perform all test 4 selecting test BOMs and SKU BOMs to be provided to case/defect updating and test BOM installation tools. preparation via ePic UI.
  • Test BOMs SKU BOMs All DB Hero Data for Component Selector TEST-4.4.2 Functions to be provided: Some functions defined in requirements INT- 4 Authenticate. 4.5 and INT-4.6 will be used and are Get Active Series. duplicated here. Get open defects for engineering part (used during Test BOMs contain software release ID's and release check-in). thus don't require an installation data file. Update defect status and resolution (used during SKU BOMs are DB Hero component lists and release check-in). will require an Installation Data File. Get Test Strategy for series/part. Get Test BOMs for test strategy. Get SKU BOMs for test strategy. Get Installation Data File for series. Get Binary Data for SW Release ID (from file store). Functions to allow the component selector function to be used remotely with tools to create and save SKU BOMs.
  • Basic Ad-hoc Use Case Describes a regular user scenario. Compatibility List of steps to test compatibility with external devices (e.g., printer or camera). FIV (Final Image Validation) Benchmarks Performance parameters captured as key/value pairs. MDA (Microsoft Performance parameters dictated by Microsoft Development captured as key/value pairs. Agreement) Screen Shot Capture Special test case consisting of just an image, which is included on the RTM report. Business Unit Accessory Other
  • FIGS. 12-17 show various non-limiting screen shots for defect submission, defect update, test case submit form, defect view, test results, and test case update, respectively.
  • RPTREQ-1 System must provide a custom reporting engine which 3 will allow custom SQL to be stored and run.
  • RPTREQ-2 Reports can be viewed on screen or downloaded in the XML is not required for software integration 3 following file formats: and factory deployment reports, because the Adobe Acrobat (PDF) installation data file contains all required Microsoft Excel information in a single XML file.
  • Comma Separated Values (CSV) MS Word format is required for the RTM XML (Test/Defect Reports only except for RTM) report. If Word format files cannot be Microsoft Word (RTM Report Only) generated then a format that can be imported into MS word is acceptable as a substitute.
  • RPTREQ-3 Some complex reports are configurable by the user. Details are specified in report descriptions. 3 Which data sets to be included and criteria for the report data can be specified before the report is generated.
  • RPT-1 Series Report Report of all relevant information for a given Series 2 (SW BOM and Metadata).
  • RPT-2 Series BOM Report of all relevant SW BOM information for a 2 Report given Series.
  • RPT-3 Series Metadata Report of all relevant metadata for a given Series. 2 Report ID was skipped (it is retained to avoid confusion).
  • RPT-8 Image BOM Report of all Parts and Releases in a given Image Has Optional Data Choices parts, 2 Report BOM. dependencies, parents, children, releases.
  • RPT-9 BOM Freeze Report of all relevant information for a given Series Previous report is an optional drop 2 Report BOM - which includes a report of new items, updated down menu of ALL available items, missing items, removed items (from previous Series BOM Snapshot revisions report). (this means you could compare two different Series). The user would be required to select a BOM Snapshot to do the report for and then a BOM Snapshot to compare it to. If no comparison BOM Snapshot is provided it simply creates the report.
  • RPT-10 Media Set Report of all Components, Parts and Releases used in a Factory Media Report would 2 Report given factory or recovery media set. include Metadata for Factory.
  • Has Optional Data Choices part 2 releases, dependencies, parents, children.
  • Has Optional Data Choices 2 Report information. dependencies, parents, children.
  • RPT-14 RTM Report This is a multi-part report containing test system Test/Defect report. 3 information, detailed SW BOM information, defects, test cases/results, and other items.
  • Unresolved Defects Defects with ‘Defect Status’ equal to Open and ‘Defect Resolution’ not equal to ‘Fixed’, ‘Deferred’, ‘Will not Fix’, ‘Duplicate.’ Defect Attributes to include in the report: Defect ID, Part, Summary, Severity, Exposure, Defect Resolution (sorted by Priority). Test Cases that need to be executed: List of test cases with ‘Test Results’ equal to ‘Not Tested’ or ‘Impeded.’ RPT-16 Test Status for Same as above for all active series. Sorted by Series. Test/Defect report. 2 all Active Series RPT-17 Defect report Displays all available attributes for a defect. User can Test/Defect report.
  • RPT-18 Defects by user, This is a configurable report for Defect analysis. It is Test/Defect report. 3 team, series, intended to be a way to export defect data for analysis cycle, etc. into external tools or for importing to other systems. Filtering fields for Defect: Defect ID, Defect Status, Defect Resolution, Responsible persons, Priority, Severity, Exposure, Champion, Defect Submitter, Submit Date, Close Date, Frequency, Assigned to, Microsoft Defect ID, Beta ID, Sustaining Status, Sustaining Priority, Days Open (less than or equal to given number), Series, Part. System will include all available defect attributes in one table/data structure.
  • RPT-19 Test Case This report is similar to RTP-18 except it is for test Test/Defect report. 2 Report cases. Filtering fields for Test Case: Test Case ID, Test Case Type, Test Results, Part, Series, Test Area, Status, Level, Submitter, Last Updated, Excluded Series, Submit Date, Linked Defects (to a particular test case). System will include all available test case attributes in one table/data structure.
  • RPT-21 Test Strategy A view of a test strategies by active series which 2 Status Report displays the percentage of test cases completed.
  • RPT-22 End-of-cycle This report contains summary information on various 3 Defect Report defects for one or more series and/or time periods. It is to be used as a post-cycle analysis tool. User can select one or more Series/LangRegions. User can also select one or more cycles or date ranges (for product cycle, initial product cycle attribute of the series would be used). User can also select which sub- reports to include. Data is exportable as PDF or excel files (it is okay if more than one excel file is generated).
  • the sub-reports are as follows: Defect Priority Defect Severity Defect Exposure Defect Resolution by Application Champion Defect Resolution by Module (recursive for FI BOM) Top Ten Deferred/Will Not Fix Defects.
  • RPT-23 Build Count Table of Series, OS, FI build count, and Recovery Test/Defect report. Used for end- 2 media build count. of-cycle accounting. User must select cycle, date range, or all active series.
  • RPT-24 FI Test Case Test Case results for a cycle or date range by FI Test/Defect report. 2 Report release.
  • RPT-25 Module Test Test Case results for a cycle by Series SW BOM Test/Defect report. 2 Case Report snapshot (test strategy).
  • EVENT-1 Email notification is issued when a release check-in is DEV-1.2.8 completed (files have been uploaded to file store).
  • EVENT-1.1 Email notification lists should be stored for each This requirement will satisfy the Engineering Part Type (editable via admin screen). need to monitor image builds (Pilot, RC, GM events).
  • EVENT-2 RTM email notification requirements RTM emails MFG-1.2.2, should be sent when “Test RTMs,” “RTMs,” and MFG-1.3.2 “running change RTMs” are issued in the system.
  • EVENT-2.1 Email lists should be maintained by series.
  • EVENT-2.2 Emails should clearly indicate which event for which the email is being sent.
  • EVENT-2.3 Each email notification should contain a unique identifier in the subject line and body of the message that can be used to refer to the message.
  • RTM email notifications should be logged in a history log that can be viewed via ePic UI.
  • EVENT-2.4 Email content should also be attached as a PDF document to the email message (to be used as official documentation).
  • EVENT-3 Series SW BOM snapshot created. Changes since the Notification of changes to the last snapshot (per MFG-1.3.2) should be included in the Series SW BOM (module/image notification. insertions).
  • EVENT-3.1 Email lists are maintained by Series.
  • EVENT-4.1 Email lists are maintained by Series.
  • EVENT-5 Defect submission or defect status/resolution change. Defect monitoring is performed by engineering part. Users can also choose to receive all. EVENT-5.1 Application champion and any users on the owner list for If a user wants to monitor a the affected engineering part should be automatically specific part they must be added added to the notification list. Any owners of a test case to the owner list. associated with the part must also be notified. EVENT-5.2 Users can also subscribe to receive defects events by Series and/or LangRegion. EVENT-6 New series loaded in ePic from DB Hero.
  • ADM-1.1 Add/edit user 1 ADM-1.1.1 User is required to be associated with an engineering 1 organization. ADM-1.1.2 User can be assigned one or more roles. 1 ADM-1.1.3 Users email address must be stored by system. 1 ADM-1.2 Add/edit engineering organization. 1 ADM-1.2.1 Engineering organizations can be Sony or 3 rd party. 1 ADM-1.3 Manage 3 rd party data access. 3 ADM-1.3.1 One or more series can be assigned to a 3 rd party 3 organization. The 3 rd party organization users will only be able to see/download data concerning the series' which have been assigned to them. ADM-1.4 Add/edit LangRegion's.
  • ADM-1.4.1 User can add/remove LangRegions to/from the master.
  • 1 ADM-1.4.2 DB Hero SPECS are mapped to corresponding This requirement can be dropped if 1 LangRegions defined in the system. LangRegion relationship to DB Hero SPECS and COMPONENTS can be identified programmatically.
  • ADM-1.5 System will provide functionality to make batch This is an admin function only. Users must 2 changes to attributes entities. User can search for change items one by one. entities, select groups of items to change, and change one or more attributes for all items in the group.
  • ADM-1.6 System should provide a function for defining teams of Some test/defect functions call for assignment 2 users. to a team. The group management functionality implemented in ePic prototypes may satisfy this requirement.
  • ADM-1.7 Admin functions for defining values for Test Area 2 (10.4.9, TST-006) and Status (10.4.9, TST-013) should be available.
  • VOA tools are Magellan and Modular Image Network Download System (MINDS). All VOA build tools use ePic data, but most of the tools use flat files created by Magellan, as the source of data. Build tools also check in software releases and images and thus need to be able to write data to the ePic database and upload files to the file store. VOA test system preparation is performed using MINDS tools. These tools are provided on a WinPE CD. This toolset will be made available to ePic users.
  • MINDS Modular Image Network Download System
  • the ePic database interface should provide the following functions. When a “Recordset” is specified as return value, all applicable attributes for the entity should be included in the Recordset.
  • DLL-1 Authenticate User UserID Authenticate user.
  • the Magellan, 2 Password SecurityToken security token should be MINDS Action (optional) passed on to all other functions. All other functions can then check for a valid security token before getting data.
  • DLL-2 GetImageBOMData SecurityToken Recordset This function should Magellan 1 BOM Snapshot ID return all items on the isBasePlus (optional) specific Image BOM isOPK (optional) that meet the criteria isRecoverable (optional) set by the optional arguments.
  • DLL-3 GetModulesEPCs SecurityToken Recordset This function should Magellan 1 Series ID return all modules and LangRegion EPCs for the specified isPermanent (optional) Series/LangRegion. If Permanent argument is True, return all permanent items. If it is False, return all temporary items. If it is not specified return all items.
  • DLL-4 GetSeries SecurityToken Recordset This function should Magellan, 1 return all active series. MINDS DLL-5 GetLangRegions SecurityToken Recordset This function should Magellan, 1 return all available MINDS LangRegion values.
  • DLL-6 GetBOMList SecurityToken Recordset This function should Magellan, 1 Series ID return a list of available MINDS LangRegion Image BOM isImageBOM (optional) Snapshots/Module BOM isModuleBOM (optional) Snapshots/All BOM Snapshots (depending on optional arguments) for given Series/LangRegion.
  • DLL-7 GetBOM SecurityToken Recordset This function should Magellan, 1 BOM Snapshot ID return the BOM contents MINDS (parts release list) for selected BOM Snapshot ID.
  • DLL-8 UploadFiles SecurityToken Boolean This function should Magellan, 1 Part Release ID upload Part Release files MINDS Files to be uploaded. to the ePic file store.
  • One function call should upload all the required files. We do not want to call this function for each file. This function must be called after CheckInPart Release. It may be called minutes or hours after CheckInPartReleasefor modules (because modules require release ID to be embedded in the module). DLL-9 CheckInPartRelease SecurityToken Part Release ID This function should add Magellan 1 All Part Release data for a new Part Release to the this Part Type. ePic database. DLL-10 UpdatePartRelease SecurityToken Boolean This function should Magellan 1 Part Release ID. update Part Release All other Part Release record. This function is data for this Part Type.
  • DLL-11 GetSeriesForPart SecurityToken Recordset This function should Magellan 2 Part ID return a list of Series that have this Part on their BOM Templates.
  • DLL-12 AddPartReleaseToSeries SecurityToken Boolean This function should Magellan 2 Part Release ID assign the specified Part Series IDs Release to one or more Series.
  • DLL-13 GetDefectsForPart SecurityToken Recordset This function should Magellan 2 Part ID return a list of defects that Status (optional) are currently assigned to this Part. Optionally result set can be filtered by defect status.
  • DLL-14 UpdateDefects SecurityToken This function should Magellan 2 Part Release ID update the defect status of Defect IDs specified defects.
  • This New Defect Statuses allows the user to specify New Defect Resolutions what defects have been New Defect Notes fixed in this Release DLL-15 GetReleaseEmailContents SecurityToken Text Get the email text.
  • DLL-17 LaunchComponentsSelector SecurityToken String/Recordset Launch Component MINDS 2 Series ID Selector to allow user LangRegion is FreeStyle. to select a configuration, check for validity and returns valid selection of parts. This is used to create a SKU BOM in freestyle mode DLL-18 GetSKUBOMSnapshotList SecurityToken Recordset This function should MINDS 2 Series ID return a list of avaiiable LangRegion SKU BOM snapshots for given Series/LangRegion DLL-19 GetSKUBOM SecurityToken Recordset This function should MINDS 2 BOM Snapshot ID return the SKU BOM contents (parts list). It should also return the installation data file (either as XML or location from where it can be obtained).
  • DLL-20 AddLog SecurityToken BOOL This function adds a MINDS 2 MACAddress record to the log. IPAddress SessionID User Action PartReleaseName ReleaseID Size StartTimestamp EndTimestamp Time Mode DLL-21 GetLog SecurityToken Recordset This function should get MINDS 2 LogID (optional) the specified log record. DLL-22 GetSystemTime SecurityToken String Get time on DB server; MINDS 2 value used in AddLog. (This can be implemented within AddLog in which case this function is not required). DLL-23 IsHDDProject SecurityToken BOOL Check if Series uses HDD MINDS 2 Series recovery LangRegion
  • FIG. 18 shows the non-limiting architecture of VOA Tools.
  • FIG. 18A logic can be used by testers and by integrators.
  • FIG. 19 refers, which has been described above and which can be used by integrators.
  • SUS-1.1.1 A new part type “Sustaining Module” must be added 5 to ePic.
  • SUS-1.1.2.1 Sustaining ID (or SP-ID), separate from normal 5 Part/Release ID must be maintained by ePic and returned when applicable by check-in functions. (ePic will manage this sequence.)
  • SUS-1.1.3 Sustaining module release notifications will be sent 5 to a different email notification list than for other modules.
  • SUS-1.1.4 Sustaining modules must have a unique identifier This is similar functionality as other ePic 5 embedded in them to support post-installation modules.
  • SUS-1.2 Sustaining users should be able to retrieve software 5 BOM information from ePic UI.
  • SUS-1.3 Support groups require a network installation system. Test System Preparation CD can be used for 5 this purpose.
  • SUS-1.4 Maintenance Desk requires Recovery Media 5 (RDVD's/Fulfillment Media).
  • SUS-1.5 Module Specification should be unified with This is so developers only need to create on 5 Sustaining Patch specification. format.
  • SUS-1.6 Software BOM views in ePic should also display any 5 applicable sustaining patches.
  • SUS-1.7 Search function should allow entry of a model name.
  • SUS-1.8 Search functions should allow Series/LangRegions to 5 which a particular sustaining patch has been applied to be to be found by Sustaining Part ID (SP-ID).
  • SP-ID Sustaining Part ID
  • SUS-1.9 User can use Part Name/Major Version as a search 5 key to find Series/LangRegion or list of sustaining patches.
  • SUS-1.10 Legacy data must be maintained in ePic for a time 5 period suitable to sustaining.
  • FIG. 20 shows the overall, non-limiting system architecture for Sony PC production. The figure gives an overview for an ePic related systems diagram.
  • FIG. 21 the data structure and flow chart of ePic are shown.
  • FIG. 22 illustrates a non-limiting ePic database entities diagram.
  • VGC-RB30, VGC-RB30C Functionality depends on DB Hero handling of Marketing Model name.
  • Maintained Reporting. N Y N Y independently in ePic. May be useful for satisfying sustaining requirements.
  • SER-015 Production Site List of production sites for Maintained May be used for NFCH, UCCH, N Y N Y this series. independently in ePic. RTM and test-RTM DPCH, IT-M, SNT release status by production site to facilitate file store functionality and reporting.
  • SER-016 LangRegions List of LangRegions to be Maintained Used to filter the list en_US, en_UK, N Y Y Y Supported supported by this engineering independently in ePic. of LangRegions on jp_JP, etc. part. screens and for reporting.
  • EP-004 Major Version Major version number New major Can be added to a 1.1, 2.4, 6.0, 7.0, Y Y Y Y (For Example: 1.1, 1.2, versions are group. 4.2.00.06070(Not 1.3). created when for LA) specifications change - not when defects are fixed or minor changes are made.
  • EP-005 Part Type Image, OS Setup See below. Lookup List Y N Y Y Installable Application, including: Image, Internal Tools, OS Setup, BIOS/Firmware, Media Installable Set, Other Application, Internal Tools, BIOS/Firmware, Media Set, Other EP-006 Part Sub Type Image (Foundation, P1, See below.
  • Lookup List Y N Y Y Monolithic Image / including: Image Installable Application (Foundation, P1, (Application, Driver, Monolithic Image)/ Online Documents, OS Installable Add-on, Module)/Media Application Set (Recovery, Factory) (Application, Driver, Online Documents, OS Add-on, Module)/Media Set (Recovery, Factory)
  • Image Installable Application Fraundation, P1, (Application, Driver, Monolithic Image)/ Online Documents, OS Installable Add-on, Module)/Media Application Set (Recovery, Factory)
  • EP-007 Dependency Append Textual description of a Information for Text field IE can N Y N Y dependency that is not builders. only be installed on enforced by the system. Tuesday.
  • EP-009 Install Order List of parts with “Don't Used by installation Relation to another N Y N Y care,” “Before,” or tools to control engineering part “After” specified for each order of release index. part. install.
  • EP-010 Customer Label Used in Single Displayed to Adobe Premiere Y (for Y N Y Application Recovery. customer during Standard for recoverable Text for each application Windows XP applications LangRegion. recovery. English, nVidia only) Graphics Driver, DVGate 2.0
  • EP-011 Customer Desc Marketing Desc/Hover Displayed to Instant Video Y (for Y N Y text used in Single customer during Everywhere: Sign recoverable Application Recovery. application up for IP Video applications Text for each recovery.
  • One index or more persons can be listed.
  • EP-016 Localized By Eng. Organization which For information text field: VOE, N Y N Y localized the part. only. Not used by SDNA, VOA, STC, Manually maintained. system.
  • VBD EP-017 Target Series List that describes BOM IRX-3440, IRX- N Y N Y template(this part needs 3760, ATX-7100 to go on these series). Specified by developers, integrators. Used to generate series s/w bom.
  • EP-018 Series Dependency Text description for For information Text description for N Y N Y information, if any. only.
  • LangRegionGroups of variation is manually LangRegions for specified and can be screen functions. anything. For example: Releases are “EN-NTSC” -> en_US, associate with en_UK; “EN-PAL”-> LangRegions and en_DE not Planned Release Variations.
  • EP-022 Change Log History, system All changes History, system generated/maintained. should be generated/maintained. logged with who and when.
  • EPC/Module/X- For Module sub-types Used in VSMS Used by builders Look up table: Y (for Y N Y Module only. Select one of these (VOA) to and installation EPC/Module/X- modules (mutually exclusive). describe a tools. Module. only) EPC Engineering Module. May Process Change. change pending installation tool/recovery specification definition. EP-025 Is Temporary Specifies the part must be Inverse of VOA Used by installation flag (0 or 1) N Y N Y deleted from recovery “Is Permanent” tools. partition after installation attribute. in the factory. Defaults to false.
  • EP-029 RCRelaseSchedule One date for each For information Date field per N Y N Y Planned Localized only. In the future, LangRegionGroup Variation. will be used to specified above. trigger email notifications.
  • EP-032 Default Installer INF, EXE/BATCH, FILE COPY Install Property lookup table: INF, N (for major Y N Y Type (select from Defined in EXE/BATCH, FILE version) list).
  • EP-033 Default Setup File Path to setup file relative Install Property Used by build tools ⁇ setup.exe or N (for major Y N Y to top level folder of Defined in to find setup ⁇ DVGATE ⁇ config ⁇ setup. version) release. Text Field.
  • MajorVersion executable. exe as defaults, carried over to Release, can be modified at check-in.
  • EP-034 Default Command Arguments to be passed Install Property: Used by build tools /quiet/passive N (for major Y N Y Line Arguments to “Setup File”. Text Defined in when running setup /norestart -s version) Field. MajorVersion executable. as defaults, carried over to Release, can be modified at check-in.
  • EP-035 Default OPK Yes/No Set for each Install Property: Used by build tools. flag (0 or 1) Y (for major Y N Y Engineering Organization Defined in version) Major Version as defaults, carried over to Release, can be modified at check-in.
  • EP-036 Default Base Plus Yes/No Set for each Install Property: Used by build tools.
  • REL-006 Status ES/Test, FF, FF (Feature Freeze)/CF Sanity checks Lookup table: Y Y Y Y Pilot, CF, RC, GM (Code Freeze) WHQL during BOM ES/Test, FF, (req) (req) candidate. snapshotting. Pilot, CF, RC, GM. Reporting.
  • (req) (req) REL-008 Next Release Text field which specifies For Information 4.0.4.00.25693A to N Y N N next expected release Only. Reporting. be released in late version and date. August 2007.
  • REL-010 WHQL status No submission/under Sanity checks Lookup table: no N Y N Y submission/passed/not during BOM submission/under (req) applicable. snapshotting. submission/passed/ Reporting. not applicable.
  • REL-011 PlmStatus Dropdown N Y N Y (req) REL-012 Is Default Yes/No Snapshotting of flag (0 or 1) N Y N Y Release BOMs.
  • REL-013 Is Latest Release Yes/No Snapshotting of flag (0 or 1) N Y N Y BOMs.
  • REL-023 Command Line Arguments to be passed to Install Property: Defined Used by build /quiet/passive N Y N N Arguments “Setup File”. Text Field. in MajorVersion as tools when /norestart -s defaults, carried over to running setup Release, can be modified at executable. check-in.
  • REL-025 Base Plus Yes/No Set for each Install Property: Defined Used by build flag (0 or 1) N Y N Y Engineering Organization. in MajorVersion as tools.
  • REL-026 Recoverable Yes/No: Set for each Install Property: Defined Used by tools. flag (0 or 1) N Y Y Y Engineering Organization. in MajorVersion as (req) (req) defaults, carried over to Release, can be modified at check-in.
  • REL-027 Interactive Yes/No: user interaction Install Property: Defined Used by build flag (0 or 1) N Y N Y required? in MajorVersion as tools. (req) defaults, carried over to Release, can be modified at check-in.
  • GRP-009 Target Engineering Organization One or more eng org, all eng org. This will be part of a Lookup Table(s) N Y Y “Define Target Criteria” function used throughout the system.
  • GRP-011 Target OS Select a single OS or This will be part of a For filtering, Lookup Table N Y Y “All”. Default to all. “Define Target Criteria” reporting. Possibly function used throughout used for sanity the system. checks.
  • GRP-012 Target LangRegions One or more LangRegions. Used to select the Lookup Table N Y Y correct release for BOM snapshots.
  • GRP-013 Usage Intended usage for the group. For filtering and Text field: This N Y Y organizing groups. group is for all Windows XP HE images built between 2002 and 2006, but only on Tuesdays.
  • DEF-001 Defect ID Auto generated Y N Y Y sequence.
  • DEF-004 Defect Resolution Fixed, Fix-verified, Dropdown. Should be a Y Y Y Y Will Not Fix, configurable item. Deferred, Duplicate, Withdrawn.
  • DEF-005 responsible Can be one or more N Y Y Y persons. users or a team.
  • DEF-006 Priority Must Fix, Should Dropdown. N Y Y Y Fix, Optional Fix, None DEF-007 Summary (Defect Text field. Y Y Y Y Title)
  • DEF-008 Description Text area.
  • Y Y Y Y DEF-009 Frequency Once, Always, Dropdown. N Y N Y Sometimes
  • DEF-010 Frequency Statistics X out of Y This can be entered if For use in N Y N N “Frequency” is statistical “Sometimes.” User can analysis. enter multiple “X of Y” sets for each defect.
  • DEF-011 Notes Text area N Y N Y DEF-012 Related Test Cases Association with This cannot be a required N Y N Y one or more test attribute because defects cases.
  • DEF-019 Defect Submitter Y N N Y DEF-020 Submit Date Y N N Y DEF-021 Close Date N Y N Y DEF-022 Attachments N Y N N DEF-023 Sustaining status N Y N Y DEF-024 Sustaining Priority N Y N Y DEF-025
  • Microsoft Defect ID N Y N Y DEF-026 Beta ID N Y N Y DEF-027 LangRegion One or more Y Y Y Y LangRegion's to which the defect applies. User can also select All “LangRegions.”
  • DEF-028 Target Series The series for Y Y N Y which the defect was first discovered.
  • DEF-029 Applicable Series List of all other This could be a system N Y N Y series for which a maintainable attribute defect was based on part information. discovered.
  • TST-003 Test Results Pass/Fail/Not Defaults to “Not Y Y Y Y Tested/Impeded stored by Tested.” series, release combo.
  • TST-004 Part/Major Version One or more part/major N Y N Y versions to which the test case is constrained.
  • TST-005 Series One or more series to N Y N Y which the Test Case is constrained.
  • TST-006 Test Area Audio, Video, Still Dropdown. Should be Y Y N Y Picture, Productivity, Etc. a configurable item via admin screen.
  • TST-007 Purpose Text area.
  • Y Y N Y TST-008 Requirements Text area.
  • N Y N N TST-009 Initial Conditions Text field/Dropdown.
  • N Y N N TST-010 Steps Text area.
  • Y Y N N TST-011 Expected Results Text area.
  • Y Y N N TST-012 Notes Text area.
  • N Y N Y TST-013 Status Active, Obsolete, Etc. Dropdown. Should be Y Y Y Y a configurable item via admin screen.
  • TST-014 Level 1 - Always Run, Dropdown Y Y Y Y 2 - Sometimes Run, 3 - Random Sampling/Sanity Check
  • TST-015 Time to Execute User estimate of time Y Y N Y required to complete the test. Integer (in minutes).
  • TST-016 Submitter Auto - user who creates Y N N Y test case.
  • N Y N N Can be a text field but system should interpret values as hyperlinks.
  • TST-018 Last Updated Auto Y Y N Y
  • TST-019 Excluded Series One or more series which N Y N Y are excluded from this test case.
  • TST-020 Submit Date Date user created test Y N N Y case.
  • FIG. 23 a non-limiting production rollout plan is shown. As a global system, More than six places are involved in ePic network:
  • EPic will be rolled out in two phases.
  • Phase 1 Requirements will include the following ePic functionality:
  • Phase 2 Requirements will include the following ePic functionality:
  • VOA tools will be adapted to become the global recovery and installation tools. The release date for these new tools will be timed to coincide with the phase 2 release.
  • Build system modifications must be completed by VOA, VOE, and SDNA in order to build images and modules with ePic. Plans for implementing and testing changes to build systems must be made the following milestones in mind:
  • VSMS Fields Corresponding ePic fields used to create above 3 files. (refer ePic-Attribs_20050808.xls). Project name: used for querying EP-001 and to create folder on network to store these files. Build name: used for querying REL-003 and to create folder on network to store these files.
  • BasePlus check OPK integration REL-025 method only for Base Plus. IntegrationMethod: used by tools & EP-005, EP-006, REL-021 check for OPK items.
  • Silent Don't use IntegrationMethod EP-038, REL-027 if not Silent. BiosLockNo: uniquely identifies EP-012 image.
  • Each folder corresponds to a PAC file.
  • the builder then runs the Pack tool to create a PAC file from the contents of each folder. It is required to create more than one PAC file as one PAC file may not fit on one disc. It contains all items on Image BOM with IsSingleApplicationRecovery is TRUE.
  • VSMS Fields used Corresponding ePic fields.
  • ProjectName used for querying, not EP-001 contained in the file.
  • Build used for querying, not contained REL-003 in the file.
  • SITID to create folder on local machine.
  • REL-001 IsSingleApplicationRecovery used for REL-026 querying, not contained in the file.
  • SITInstallProgram Location on file server.
  • REL-020/Mini ePic Pac_File this value is set in VSMS prior to Obsolete in ePic. Move the creating this file by calculating (according Pac file assignment to size) which PAC file this software functionality to Magellan goes on. (dynamically assign instead of storing in database).
  • Appinfo.ini Contains all applications and drivers that go on the Foundation Image and are available for recovery through Chrysalis (Single Application Recovery).
  • VSMS Fields used Corresponding ePic fields. Project name: used to create folder on EP-001 network to store these files. Build name: used to create folder on network REL-003 to store these files.
  • ARCDFolder used to distinguish Drivers EP-005, 006 from Applications.
  • ARCDTitle used as display title for EP-010 Applications. IntegrationMethod: should be OPK-Driver EP-006 for drivers. Used for querying. ReleaseName: used as display title for REL-003 Drivers.
  • ARCDSpec text description (hover text).
  • EP-011 SITInstallProgram installer file.
  • REL-020, 022/Mini ePic SITID used for unpacking.
  • REL-001 IsSingleApplicationRecovery determine REL-026 if compressed.
  • Pac_File used to determine correct Obsolete; generated by PAC file. external tool dynamically.
  • InstallOrder used to install in a given EP-009 sequence.
  • Prompts 12.2.1.5 Files required for BDVD AllModules.TXT: Contains all modules and EPCs on a base unit.
  • BaseUnitInfo.INI Contains all base units for a project.
  • VSMS Fields used Corresponding ePic fields.
  • BaseUnit Series attributes TBD BaseUnitID SalesType ModelNo_JP OS Product Mcode C-Partition Size P1 Partition Size
  • BTO General Build To Order Retail sales General Selling product through normal shop channel. Direct sales, Online sales General Selling product through internet (Web).
  • B2C General Business To Consumer SMB General Small Business Small company like 50 employees.
  • SOHO General Small Office Home Very small company like 0 to 3 employees. Office Use home as office.
  • Product Design BOM General Bill Of Material List of parts (materials) to produce a product. activity SW BOM General Software Bill Of Material ES Engineering Sample FF Feature Freeze Pilot Build Pilot Build Test Build RC General Release Candidate GM General Golden Master Final and approved master software file.
  • Recovery Microsoft When a customer wants to go back to factory state, “Recovery” to be done. Hard Disk Recovery Microsoft External Recovery Media Microsoft Recovery CD, Microsoft Recovery DVD BIOS Lock ID, BLID Sony M-Code Sony BIOS PC DMI PC Registry Microsoft OPK Microsoft OEM Pre-installation Kit OOBE Microsoft Out Of Box Experience Windows Setup screens at very first power-on. Serial number General Service Tag PC OSR ITC OS Recovery or System Recover the image file. Recovery APR ITC Application Recovery Recover (install) application(s). SAR (ITE) ITE Smart Application Same meaning as “APR” in SDNA. Recovery VSRU ITC VAIO System Recovery Utility name. Recover the image file, using Utility Green Engine.
  • Config Range VBD The set of classes that constitute the full (global) range of customer choices for a given series. Can be used by a sales system to provide CTO offerings to customers.
  • Component VBD Phantom BOM item Derived from Config range during DB Hero block definition process.
  • Factory PCN Production Change Change form used to disclose any non-BOM terminology Notice related changes to the factory.
  • EPC VOE/VOA Engineering Process Running change to software Consists of Change change notification and a corresponding software module.
  • Factory Process Generic term used to refer to all activities performed in the factory in order to produce units.
  • ERP Enterprise resource Generic term for inventory, planning, and order planner management systems used in support of manufacturing or order fulfillment.
  • Configuration BOM VOA The bill of materials for a specific PC configuration.
  • Platform BOM VOA A bill of materials which encapsulates CTO customer choices (like the DB Hero Config range).
  • Phantom BOM VOA A bill of materials representing the manufacturing BOM for a series (like DB Hero component structure). Phantom BOM items can be included as customer choices on the platform BOM.
  • SMAP Simple Manufacturing Unit testing framework used to drive the Advanced Process automated factory process in Sony VAIO factories. Imaging in the factory occurs as a SMAP process step.
  • Sony Terminology VBD or ITC VAIO Business Tokyo Group Formerly Department Division called ITC. name VOA or ITD VAIO of America America Group, San Formerly Diego called ITD or ITA. VOE or ITE VAIO of Europe Europe Group, Formerly Brussels called ITE.
  • FIG. 23A shows a non-limiting software integration process
  • the process flow captures a process for deploying CTO software in the factory. Many of the activities depicted in FIG. 24 are manual, with some small helper applications in use to speed up the work. Some of these activities are executed in parallel with the software integration process.
  • MODULE MOD-Click_To_DVD (0518903.snd) MODULE MOD-DVGate_Plus (0516403.snd) MODULE MOD-IceMaker (0519313.snd) MODULE MOD-Image_Converter (0517211.snd) MODULE MOD-Moodlogic (0516810.snd) MODULE MOD-MS_Works_Bundle (0506705.snd) MODULE MOD-NIS_2005_Trial (0521324.snd) MODULE MOD-Office_2003_Basic (0505102.snd) MODULE MOD-Office_2003_Professional (0520615.snd) MODULE MOD-Office_2003_Small_Business (0520613.snd) MODULE MOD-Office_2003_Small_Business_Trial (0519613.snd) MODULE MOD-Office_2003_Student_Teacher_Trial (0519616.snd) MODULE MOD-PhotoShop_Album_
  • Attribute Name Description Part Name Adobe Premiere Pro Parent Planning Part Adobe Premiere Pro Active Yes Major Version 7 Part Type Installable Application Part Sub Type Application Dependency Append None Dependency Need: VAIO Edit Components 5.0 Install Order After: VAIO Edit Components 5.0 Customer Label Adobe Premiere Pro Customer Desc ENU-US: Adobe's semi professional video editing application.
  • FIG. 25 the screen shot of a “Defect View” is shown, which includes the defect report.

Abstract

A software management database contains data structures supporting computer software provisioning for a range of CTO/BTO variations, language variations, region variations, and operating system variations.

Description

    RELATED APPLICATION
  • This application claims priority from U.S. provisional application 60/722,130, filed Sep. 29, 2005, incorporated herein by reference.
  • I. Field of the Invention
  • The present invention relates generally to systems and methods for software integration and factory deployment of the software.
  • II. BACKGROUND OF THE INVENTION
  • Producing consumer electronics and in particular computers that might incorporate, in addition to operating systems with various configurations and suites of applications, several subsystems, each in turn with their own software drivers, can be complicated. Not only must a bill of materials (BOM) be defined, managed, and conformed to, but product defects and corrective actions must also be managed in way that ensures corrective action can be known and taken across the globe.
  • Because of the complexity inherent in the above considerations, it can happen that more than a single management system might develop over time, complicating efforts to integrate knowledge and data. As recognized herein, it is desirable to have a management system that can integrate the knowledge and input of designers, engineers, software integrators, etc. in ways that reduce engineering lead times and provide ease of tracking defects and cures to the defects in a single, globally shared system within an enterprise, while providing an easy way to manage regional differentiation of software offerings, sharing information between business groups within the enterprise, and eliminating duplicative data maintenance.
  • For example, many computers are sold on a configure to order/build to order (CTO/BTO) basis. Each software part can have a multidimensional relationship with each stock keeping unit (SKU) that represents a product when region, language, various operating system versions, and platforms are factored in. Thus, each software part can potentially have dozens of version releases to accommodate all of these variables. As but one example of the complexity of providing CTO/BTO computers, one version of a “click to DVD” software may be used only on French Windows MCE SR series SKUs that are sold only in Quebec, but another version may be designed to work on any model using Windows XP Home Edition Spanish Version regardless of region.
  • As another example of complexity, consider that there are currently about ten Sony VAIO platforms worldwide, and each platform may contain multiple VAIO models with variations on CPU, RAM, HDD capacity, wireless (WLAN, WWAN, and Bluetooth), graphics chipset, etc. Several major regions that include an even greater number of languages in many different countries, along with plural operating system variations, may require support. Still further, each model of VAIO for each region/language/country/OS variation contains well over one hundred pieces of software, each of which may be a unique version for only that model, or may be used for multiple models of VAIO, giving an idea of the exponential scope of the relationship between software and computer models the database must be designed to support. In summary, the relationships between software parts and the platforms they are used on have become extremely complex, and with this critical recognition in mind, the invention herein is provided.
  • In addition, the present invention critically recognizes that the quality of the final product is important. As understood herein, each piece of software may contain defects, or when combined in an image with other software may cause defects to be generated.
  • SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION
  • As set forth further below, processes and tools are provided herein for quickly assessing the quality of a project by relating the defects to part releases, which are in turn related to projects. For example, if a major flaw is found in a particular release version of a part, this defect is related to the appropriate part release or releases so that the defect is instantly related to all the projects that use the particular part release. Given the complexity of the software BOMs, without the present invention this task would be difficult and time consuming to do manually.
  • Thus, preferred implementations of the present invention correlate the relationships between software parts, the platforms they are used on, and the quality of those parts.
  • A method is disclosed for managing computer production in an enterprise. The method includes receiving a block of software offerings, with each block being associated with at least one product series. A product series component structure is received that defines parts for a respective product series. Parts that are required for a product series are added to the block associated with the series, with parts being assigned to each software class and related software specification pair in a block based on the part or parts required for the pair to thereby define a design structure. The method includes establishing a software bill of materials (BOM) based on the design structure using a template and/or a snapshot.
  • In non-limiting implementations the method includes defining software offerings. A software offering includes at least one software class and at least one associated software specification. Software offerings are associated with respective product series to establish a configuration, with configurations cumulatively defining a configuration range that contains product offerings of the enterprise for all regions in which the enterprise does business. The method may include grouping classes into blocks. A block is associated with at least one product series.
  • The non limiting method may also include defining which classes are dependent on each other, and defining which blocks are base blocks. Defects can be associated with related classes and corrective actions associated with respective defects.
  • If desired, the method can includes associating a respective installation file with each software offering. Each installation file may include a data file format version number, a version number of an installation data snapshot, an installation order for modules, data required for confirming successful installation, cyclic redundancy check (CRC) data for each binary file, path information thr locating files in a file store, partition size information for recovery and customer partitions. Also, installation anal recovery tools may use a list of software releases directly instead of microcode, which is used only for customer recovery, with microcode bit mappings being constrained to respective recovery media sets.
  • In another aspect, a software management database on a computer readable medium can contain data structures supporting computer software provisioning for a range of CTO/BTO variations, language variations, region variations, and operating system variations.
  • Non-limiting data structures may include bill of materials (BOM) entities containing information related to parent BOMs and child BOMs, if any. Each BOM entity can also include an engineering part ID, a software release ID, a major version ID, a group ID, a component ID, a planning parts ID, and a software series ID. A plan parts entity can also be provided that includes launch dates for software base releases, import dates for software bases indicating when the bases were imported into computers, and identifications for software bases.
  • Other non-limiting entities in the database may include component entities including launch dates for software base releases, import dates for software bases, identifications for software bases. Software release entities containing a base ID, a name, a file path, a launch date can also be provided, as can be software release status entities that include data representing status and name of a software release. Additional database entities may include: a group entity containing data representing a name and launch of a type, a series entity containing a software series ID, base ID, name, an indication of being active, a launch date, an import date, an engineering parts entity containing an engineering part ID, a base ID, a type ID, a name, a launch date, and indication of dependent parts, an engineering parts major revision entity containing information related to default use, an engineering part software release entity containing information on a related engineering part entity, a related engineering parts major revision entity, a related language code entity, and a language entity containing information related to a language name and a language code.
  • In another aspect, a computer-implemented system for creating bills of materials (BOMs) includes logic that can be executed by a computer and stored on a computer readable medium. The logic facilitates creation of BOMs using templates and/or snapshots. BOMs can be automatically generated based on part attributes and groups of parts, major versions, and releases. The logic can automatically check BOMs to reduce errors.
  • In still another aspect, a computer system executing logic stored on a computer readable medium enters, into a first database, first software data. The first software data includes operating systems and configure to order build to order (CTO/BTO) options. The system transfers at least some of the first software data in the first database to a comprehensive global database, referred to herein colloquially as “ePic.” Second software data such as operating system updates, device drivers, and utilities is automatically adding to a bill of materials (BOM) through the comprehensive global database. Also, software along with metadata that describes the software can be checked into the comprehensive global database by users, and the BOM for a specific series/language/region can be frozen/locked and the process to create factory deliverables including software image, software modules, and data can then begin.
  • The database tracks defects and relates them to parts, stores test cases which are related to parts which in turn allows test strategies to be auto-generated.
  • The details of the present invention, both as to its structure and operation, can best be understood in reference to the accompanying drawings, in which like reference numerals refer to like parts, and in which:
  • BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS
  • FIGS. 1-3 are diagrams of non-limiting software management phases;
  • FIG. 4 is a flow diagram of non-limiting overall software development, integration, and factory deployment processes;
  • FIG. 5 is a flow diagram of a non-limiting software planning process;
  • FIG. 6 is a flow diagram of a non-limiting bill of materials (BOM) creation process;
  • FIG. 7 is a flow diagram of a non-limiting software development process;
  • FIG. 8 is a flow diagram of a non-limiting software integration process;
  • FIG. 9 is a flow diagram of a non-limiting factory deployment process;
  • FIG. 10 is a flow diagram of aspects of a non-limiting factory deployment process;
  • FIG. 11 is a flow diagram of a non-limiting software installation process;
  • FIGS. 12-17 are non-limiting screen shots used for defect management and test case management purposes;
  • FIG. 18 is a diagram showing software inputs to the epic database interface;
  • FIG. 18A is a flow chart of logic of downloading an image to a test system;
  • FIG. 19 is a flow chart showing how BOM snapshots are generated, automatically at least in part, and entered into epic;
  • FIGS. 20 and 21 are consolidated diagrams showing the interaction between various entities in a non-limiting implementation;
  • FIG. 22 is a diagram showing various data entities in the ePic database and some of their attributes;
  • FIG. 23 is a map showing a non-limiting deployment regime;
  • FIG. 23A is a flow chart showing software integration logic;
  • FIG. 24 is a flow diagram showing a non-limiting factory deployment process; and
  • FIGS. 25-27 are further non-limiting defect-related screen shots.
  • DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF THE PREFERRED EMBODIMENT
  • In the present non-limiting implementation, only part of the software data is contained in a data store referred to below as “DB Hero”. Specifically, software data that is visible to customers (e.g., operating systems, configure to order/build to order (CTO/BTO) options, software highlighted on web sites, etc.) is entered into DB Hero. As set forth in the specification below, periodically, some of the data from DB Hero is pushed to a comprehensive global database referred to herein as ePic, including both stock keeping unit (SKU) data and software data.
  • Software data that is not as visible to customers (such as operating system updates, device drivers, utilities, etc.) are added to the bill of materials (BOM) through the comprehensive global database. Software is checked into the comprehensive global database by developers, vendors or engineers, along with metadata that describes the software for process tools. The BOM for a specific series/language/region is frozen/locked and the process to create the factory deliverables (software image, software modules, and data) can then be started. As set forth in the detailed specification below, various process tools and manual process can be used to create the factory deliverables, all of which use data stored in the comprehensive global database.
  • Additionally, the factory deliverables are tested and validated to meet quality standards. The factory deliverables, and the metadata that describes them, are then delivered to the factory to be used in mass production.
  • To better understand terms used herein, the range of potential software offerings for a given sales cycle is defined as a set of classes and specifications. The class structure captures how the various software items will be offered to the customer, and is a specific type of software. Specifications, on the other hand, are individual software items that are associated with classes. Thus, a specification is an option that the customer may choose within a class, and a class may have more than one specification while a specification is assigned to only one class. Software offerings (classes and specifications) are associated with individual series, with the resulting structure being called the “configuration range,” The configuration range for a SKU is a list of all the Classes (and specifications) that are offered for that SKU.
  • By way of non-limiting example only, a “class” might be “pre-installed office software”, and specifications within that class from which the customer can select might be “MS Office professional”, “MS Office Small Business”, “MS Office Basic”, and “MS Works.”
  • With the detailed description below it will be appreciated that the database herein supports software variations in CTO/BTO, language, region, and OS. In addition, this database, and the tools that use it, allow for the creation of CTO systems, based on individual customer orders, in the mass production process with every piece of software preinstalled and ready to use, allowing for a virtually infinite number software offerings to customers as opposed to a few pre-defined options.
  • Also, unnecessary duplicate data entry is eliminated, hardware components are automatically mapped to software releases, and developers can specify language and geographic region supported for each software release at the time of software check-in, with the correct release being assigned to each BOM automatically. Further, BOMs are created using templates and snapshots for efficiency. Moreover, BOMs are automatically generated based on part attributes to reduce effort, and groups of parts, major versions, and releases can be defined and reused. Automatic checking of the BOMs is provided to reduce errors. In addition, installation and recovery tools use a list of software releases directly instead of microcode, which is used only for customer recovery, with microcode bit mappings being constrained to each recovery media set that is defined. This solves the problem of limited microcode bits and makes the changing of a recovery key easier.
  • Below are details of one non-limiting implementation of present principles, FIG. 1 illustrates that the present methods may be undertaken by a computer system 10 including one or more enterprise computers 12, each potentially having its own monitor 14 which can display the screen shots described below. The enterprise computers 12 can be used by developers and software engineers to execute the invention. Thus, the logic and the databases herein (including the so-called “DBHero” database 16 and global database 18, referred to herein as “epic”) may be distributed over plural computers if desired, and some of the method steps may be undertaken by human users of the enterprise computers 12 while other method steps can be undertaken automatically by logic resident on computer readable media in computers. The computer readable media can include but is not limited to RAM, ROM, floppy disks, hard disk drives, optical disk drives, solid state memory devices, etc.
  • Referring briefly to FIG. 19 out of turn, logic for creating BOMs is shown. Beginning at start state 20, a software developer or integrator selects a software series, discussed above, from a list of series. The series can include data on software that an end user ordinarily “sees”, e.g., operating systems and configure to order/build to order (CTO/BTO) software options.
  • A human language and/or geographic region is selected at state 24 and then based on the selected language and region, at state 26 a processor in one or more of the enterprise computers 12 shown in FIG. 1 can retrieve a list of component parts, including images and modules. These component parts typically include software the end user ordinarily does not “see” such as operating system updates, device drivers, and utilities.
  • The software integrator then selects the image or module to be built at state 28, and at state 30 a BOM snapshot from a list is selected for the part selected at state 28. In response, a processor in one or more of the enterprise computers 12 shown in FIG. 1 then downloads, at state 32, BOM items from a file store that may be resident in the global database 18 shown in FIG. 1 to create an image to be loaded onto a computer to be vended. The image is checked in to the global database 18 at state 34 and uploaded to the file store, from whence it may be downloaded in the factory and loaded onto a computer to be vended. The process ends at state 36.
  • A detailed description of a non-limiting implementation of the invention follows below.
  • 0 Project Objectives 0.1 Goals
      • Enable a global software CTO process which can be used for all VAIO business styles (CTO, BTO, Retail).
      • Redesign the software process from design through manufacturing to be a global process.
      • Define a global modular software specification.
      • Define a global recovery specification.
      • Integrate the software and hardware design process.
      • Shorten lead-time to market.
      • Reduce engineering costs.
      • Shift engineering resources from maintenance roles to value-add development roles.
      • Maintain product quality in the new process.
      • Create a flexible process and system.
      • Automate tasks where appropriate to create greater accuracy and speed in activities.
    0.2 Critical To Quality
      • World-wide scalability.
      • Global access to system (including third parties).
      • Data portability.
      • Multi-language handling for software items.
      • Seamless interfaces to DH Hero.
      • Turn-key factory deployment.
    0.1 Dependencies and Assumptions 1.1 Dependencies 1.2 Assumptions
      • LangRegion Specifications (Specs) in DB Hero will be reused between series.
      • Software parts in DB Hero will be defined so that the “Part Name” and “Major Version” will be separate fields.
      • No language/region specific information will be entered for parts into DB Hero unless royalty/licensing requirements differ by language/region for the given software part.
    User Roles and Responsibilities
      • Product Planner
        • Determines the VAIO hardware and software offerings to be made to customers.
      • Program Manager
        • Works with product planners, sales and marketing, and engineering to produce a detailed product plan and offering strategy for each VAIO product series.
      • Software Developer
        • Develops software to be included in VAIO product offerings.
        • Prepares software so that it may be delivered to the factory for installation on products.
      • Software Integrator
        • Uses OPK (OEM Pre-installation Kit) in combination with build systems to prepare images.
        • Prepares data used in the factory to convert manufacturing bills of materials (BOMs) to a list of software items for installation.
        • Prepares data used to facilitate the software recovery by the customer in the event of a failure with their VAIO product.
      • Project Test Lead
        • Person in charge of preparing test cases and test strategies for a series and/or project (project would be Windows beta or VAIO mouse—this concept is not managed by ePic).
        • Assesses defects and devises test strategies to ensure they are fixed.
      • Test Lead
        • Tester in charge of an individual software release/component
        • Maintain test cases as requirements change.
        • Resolves defects.
      • Tester
        • Tests software deliverables to ensure quality product.
        • Identifies and tracks defects.
        • Reports quality status.
        • Sometimes maintains test cases as requirements change.
      • Factory Engineer
        • Deploys the tools and software deliverables to the factory floor so that they may be automatically installed.
        • Collects data produced in the factory installation process and delivers it to a data warehouse.
      • Customer
        • Makes hardware and software choices when placing an order for a custom product.
        • Initiates the recovery process in the event of a system failure.
        • The customer does not interact with the SIFD system directly.
      • 3 Party Developer
        • Checks current software releases.
      • 3rd Party Factory Engineer/QA Tester
        • Downloads or receives software deliverables and tools.
    3 Business Process 3.1 Hardware Design
  • The Software Integration and Factory Deployment Project solution will operate within the context of the new design process specified as part of the DB Hero project. FIGS. 1 through 3 represent a non-limiting version of DB Hero process.
  • FIGS. 1-3 do not include software related tasks. One objective of the proposed invention is to integrate the software and hardware design processes.
  • 3.2 Overall Software Process—Now Referencing the Non-Limiting Process Outlined in FIG. 4.
  • 1. Software Planning and Design
      • a. Description
        • i. Program Managers and Product Planners define software offerings.
      • b. Inputs
        • i. Previous cycle's software offerings.
        • ii. New software offerings.
      • c. Outputs
        • i. Configuration (Config) Range and Component Structure.
      • d. System Interactions
        • i. Offering structure and planning parts are entered in DB Hero.
        • ii. Planning Parts and Component Structure are transferred to ePic.
  • 2. Software Development
      • a. Description
        • i. Register engineering parts and develop software.
      • b. Inputs
        • i. Software offerings.
        • ii. Planning parts from DB Hero.
      • c. Outputs
        • i. Software applications, drivers, documentation, and other software items.
      • d. System Interactions
        • i. Part registration and item check-in in ePic.
  • 3. Software Integration
      • a. Description
        • i. Define image BOMs, build images, define media sets (factory and recovery), and prepare factory deliverables.
      • b. Inputs
        • i. Software items checked-in by developers.
      • c. Outputs
        • i. Images, Modules, and Series Software BOM.
      • d. System Interactions
        • i. Register parts.
        • ii. Check image releases.
        • iii. Create series software BOM.
        • iv. Define recovery media.
  • 4. Release to Manufacturing
      • a. Description
        • i. Planner or Program Manager issues a RIM for a series/region.
      • b. Inputs
        • i. Series software BOM
      • c. Outputs
        • i. Installation data file. RTM'ed image and module releases.
        • ii. RTM Notification.
      • d. System interactions
        • i. RIM is issued in ePic.
        • ii. Installation data file is auto-generated in ePic.
  • 5. Download installation data, images, and modules to factory
      • a. Description
        • i. Factory engineer downloads required files from ePic or receives them by disk,
        • ii. Factory engineer deploys the files to manufacturing servers.
      • b. Inputs
        • i. Notification email of updated installation data.
      • c. Outputs
        • i. Factory has up to date BOM information and all required images and modules,
      • d. System interactions
        • i. Factory engineer downloads or receives latest version of installation data file.
        • ii. If the factory receives files by network, the factory file store system automatically downloads required images and modules and removes obsolete files.
        • iii. If the factory receives files by disk, the factory engineers load the files manually into the local factory file store.
    3.3 Planning
  • The process outlined in the non-limiting diagram of FIG. 5 may be carried oat in the DB Hero system. This process describes how the software and hardware design processes are integrated in DB Hero.
  • The process definitions are tailored to capture details relevant to SIFD only. Details of the hardware design process are not captured here.
  • This process describes how the software and hardware design processes are integrated in DB Hero.
  • 1. Define Series
      • a. Description
        • i. Hardware planners define the series code names and numbers for a given sales cycle.
      • b. Inputs
        • i. The list of new product series to be offered for a given sales cycle.
      • c. Outputs
        • i. Series prototype numbers.
        • ii. Series code-names.
      • d. System Interactions
        • i. Series information is entered into DB Hero.
  • 2. Identify Software Offerings
      • a. Description
        • i. The planner or program manager defines the software strategy for a given sales cycle. This strategy does not yet specify which software offerings will be made at a series level.
        • ii. Sony and 3rd party software offerings that may be carried over from a previous cycle are identified.
        • iii. New Sony and 3rd party software offerings are identified.
        • iv. Updates to existing specifications are made if required.
        • v. New specifications are added to classes if required.
      • b. Inputs
        • i. Previous cycle 3rd party vendor software items.
        • ii. Previous cycle Sony software items.
      • c. Outputs
        • i. The tentative list of 3rd party and Sony software offerings for the given sales cycle.
      • d. System Interactions
        • i. None.
  • 3. Define Classes and Specifications
      • a. Description
        • i. A “Class Definition Committee Meeting” is held multiple per year. The purpose of each meeting will be to define the software classes and their contents (specifications) to be used two sales cycles later. Hardware classes are defined separately.
        • ii. The range of potential software offerings is defined for the given sales cycles as a set of classes and specifications. Offerings for individual product series will not be defined at this point.
        • iii. The classes and specifications defined are global and commonly used across all regions. The class structure captures how the various software items will be offered to the customer.
        • iv. Specifications for individual software items, if known, are identified and associated with classes.
      • b. Inputs
        • i. Previously defined classes and specifications.
        • ii. New class definition ideas.
      • c. Outputs
        • i. Class Names.
        • ii. Specification Names (e.g. class contents).
        • iii. Class/Specification relationships.
      • d. System Interactions
        • i. A DB Hero administrator enters the classes into DB Hero. Users cannot input classes due to limitations of DB Hero Software.
        • ii. A Product Planner or Program Manager enters specification information and elms/specification relationships into DB Hero.
  • 4. Define Planning Level Parts (e.g. royalties, catalogue, etc.)
      • a. Description
        • i. Software offerings are broken down into individual parts. Offerings which have varying royalty, licensing, or catalogue requirements must be broken up into discrete items.
        • ii. These parts will be associated with classes and specifications during the block definition process at a later time.
        • iii. These parts will later be used in ePic to help create SW BUMS,
      • b. Inputs
        • i. Software offerings.
        • ii. Royalty, licensing; and catalogue requirements.
      • c. Outputs
        • i. List of software parts.
      • d. System interactions
        • i. The parts identified are registered in DB Hero.
  • 5. Define Offerings Structure and Constraints
      • a. Description
        • i. Software offerings (classes and specifications) are associated with individual series. The resulting structure is called the Config Range. The Config Range is global in scope and contains all product offerings, both hardware (HW) and software (SW), for all regions.
        • ii. Constraints on the offering range are identified as necessary for engineering or business reasons. These constraints are also global in scope; they do not reflect regional constraints. Regional constraints will be implemented in regional CTO sales systems or implicitly included in fixed configurations defined from the Config Range.
      • b. Inputs
        • i. The software offerings (classes and specifications) identified for the given sales cycle.
      • c. Outputs
        • i. Offering strategy, structure, and constraints, series by series.
      • d. System Interactions
        • i. The classes selected are associated with a series and are entered in DB Hero resulting in the Config Range,
        • ii. Constraints are defined in DB Hero as rules against the Config Range.
  • 6. Define Block Structure
      • a. Description
        • i. Block structure definitions are used to generate the component structure. Users group classes into blocks and define which classes are dependent on each other and which blocks are “base blocks.”
      • b. Inputs
        • i. Config Range for each series,
      • c. Outputs
        • i. Block structure of the classes for a given series.
        • ii. Component Structure without parts.
      • d. System Interactions
        • i. The blocks defined are entered in DB Hero.
        • ii. Classes are associated with the blocks per the defined block structure in DB Hero.
        • iii. “Dependency” and “Base Block” flags are set as required.
  • 7. Confirm Component Structure
      • a. Description
        • i. Program Manager or Product Planners confirm components without parts whether these components are made in just proportion—without exaggeration or omission—for their region.
        • ii. Confirmation of components is done by each region.
      • b. Inputs
        • i. Component Structure without parts.
      • c. Outputs
        • i. Confirmation List.
      • d. System Interactions
        • i. None.
    Notes:
      • 1, DB Hero series can be made “cycle-less” by adding an additional class specifying product cycle or software revision for integrators to manage software offerings from series to series.
        3.4 Engineering Software BOM Creation—Now referencing the limiting process outlined in FIG. 6.
  • 1. Transfer Parts and Series info to ePic
      • a. Description
        • i. The parts and series defined DB Hero are transferred to ePic.
      • b. Inputs
        • i. Series and Parts registered in DB Hero,
      • c. Outputs
        • i. Series and Planning Parts registered in ePic.
      • d. System Interactions
        • i. Scheduled system process and/or user initiated process.
  • 2. Planning BOM Creation
      • a. Description
        • i. Parts required for each block are added to the block structure for a series. The parts are assigned to each class/specification pair in a block based on which parts are required for that option. This structure is called the “Design Structure.”
        • ii. When the Design Structure is complete, DB-Hero generates the Component BOM, e.g. Component Structure, for the series.
      • b. Inputs
        • i. Block Structure.
        • ii. Parts.
      • c. Outputs
        • i. Component Structure with parts,
      • d. System Interactions
        • i. Parts are associated with specs via a block/spec pivot table DB Hero.
  • 3. Define engineering image and module parts as required
      • a. Description
        • i. Developer or integrator defines engineering parts in ePic as required. ePic engineering parts can include many things, including images, modules, recovery media sets, documentation, etc.
        • ii. Developer defines technical attributes of each part. (See ePic attributes below for more details.)
        • iii. Developer optionally specifies the target series for this part. One or more target series may be specified.
        • iv. Developer specifies the languages to be supported by this part.
        • v. Developer specifies dependencies between this part and other parts.
        • vi. Developer provides installation instructions, including installation order.
        • vii. Once these parts have been fully registered in ePic, associated software releases for the standalone parts can be checked-in.
        • viii. Composite parts, e.g. images, multipart modules, and recovery media, will require BOMs to be created before automated building can begin.
      • b. Inputs
        • i. Information from hardware engineers, software engineers, and planners.
      • c. Outputs
        • i. List of parts with their associated attributes and target series/language information.
      • d. System Interactions
        • i. Parts, attributes, and target series/language information is entered into ePic via user interface.
  • 4. Associate planning level parts with engineering parts
      • a. Description
        • i. Developer/Integrator associates planning parts from DB Hero with one or more engineering parts defined in ePic.
        • ii. This activity is done for any planning parts that correspond to ePic engineering parts.
        • iii. These associations will be used later to generate the “Series Software BOM”.
      • b. Inputs
        • i. DB Hero part list (planning parts).
        • ii. Engineering parts as defined in ePic.
      • c. Outputs
        • i. Planning to engineering part associations.
      • d. System interactions
        • i. The associations will be created via ePic user interface.
  • 5. Define image & module contents where required
      • a. Description
        • i. Developer/integrator creates individual image/module BOMs by defining relationships between parts. The Engineering Parts to be included in a given image or module are specified as the children of the top level part.
      • b. Inputs
        • i. Parts completely defined in ePic.
      • c. Outputs
        • i. Image/module BOMs,
      • d. System Interactions
        • i. Developer/Integrator creates BOM structures in ePic using functions specific to each part type, e.g., “Image Planner”, “Media Planner”, “Module Planner.”
  • 6. BOM Confirmation
      • a. Description
        • i. Program Managers or Product Planners confirm component structure.
        • ii. Confirmation of component structure is done by each region.
      • b. Inputs
        • i. Component Structure, including parts.
      • c. Outputs
        • i. Confirmation list or minutes of meeting,
      • d. System Interactions
        • i. None.
  • 7. Transfer Component BOM to ePic
      • a. Description
        • i. The component BOM for a given series is transferred to ePic.
      • b. Inputs
        • i. DB Hero Component BOM.
      • c. Outputs
        • i. Component BOM registered in ePic.
      • d. System Interactions
        • i. Scheduled system process and/or user initiated process.
  • 8. Create Series Software BOM
      • a. Description
        • i. The “Series Software BOM” is a detailed BOM containing all the software releases assigned to a given product series and their relationship to DB Hero Component part numbers. It represents all the software releases (image, module deliverables) that could be installed on a unit and not the software BOM for a specific configuration.
        • ii. This BOM is initially generated automatically based on the target information of engineering parts, engineering part associations with planning parts, and the DB Hero Component DOM. The user can then make changes before the BOM creation process is complete.
        • iii. This data will be combined with recovery and installation data to create an installation data file for the factory.
        • iv. After initial generation, this BOM may be manually modified in the system to manage exceptions/limitations of software releases that are not covered by basic assignment to series and languages or DB Hero constraints.
      • b. inputs
        • i. Image/module target series information.
        • ii. Planning part/engineering part associations.
        • iii. DB Hero Component BUM.
      • c. Outputs
        • i. Series Software BUM.
      • d. System Interactions
        • i. User will create Series SW BUM using a wizard.
        • ii. Series Software BUM may be edited via ePic
    3.5 Software Development—Now Referencing the Non-Limiting Process Outlined in FIG. 7.
  • 1. Register DB Hero Part
      • See section 7.3, step 4.
  • 2. Transfer Parts to ePic
      • See section 74, step 1.
  • 3. Register Part (ePic)
      • See section 7.4, step 3.
  • 4. Associate Planning Parts with Engineering Parts
      • See section 7.4, step 4.
  • 5. Develop Software Module
      • a. Description
        • i. Software Developer codes software module,
      • b. inputs
        • i. Part definition and technical attributes as specified in ePic.
      • c. Outputs
        • i. Packaged software module with all required installation scripts.
      • d. System interactions
        • i. None.
  • 6. Check-In Software Module
      • a. Description
        • i. Developer checks-in a software build.
        • ii. Developer updates technical attributes as required. These attributes include installation details, supported languages, and other technical information about the release.
        • iii. Developer logs release notes.
      • b. inputs
        • i. Packaged software module with all required installation scripts.
      • c. Outputs
        • i. Module is stored in the ePic file store.
        • ii. Technical information and release notes stored in ePic.
      • d. System Interactions
        • i. The module check-in procedure will be initiated via ePic user interface or client utility.
        • ii. Files will be uploaded to a local file store, should they be available. If the files represent a module or application, they will be replicated automatically to other file stores. If files represent an image, they will not be replicated to other file stores unless other system users request the replication.
    3.6 Software Integration—Now Referencing the Non-Limiting Process Outlined In FIG. 8
  • ePic System Interlace can Engage Each Regional Build Tool Implementation.
  • 1. Extract Build Info
      • a. Description
        • i. Integrator initiates build process. Build tools gets build data from ePic to be used as input to the build tools.
      • b. inputs
        • i. ePic image ROM and technical attributes.
      • c. Outputs
        • i. Build data fat matted generically.
      • d. System Interactions
        • i. Each regional build system will interface with ePic to obtain image BOMs and software parts.
  • 2. Build Image
      • a. Description
        • i. Image is constructed using build tools.
      • b. inputs
        • i. Build data extracted from ePic.
      • c. Outputs
        • i. Image files and additional data to be stored in ePic.
      • d. System Interactions
        • i. None.
  • 3. Check-in Image
      • a. Description
        • i. Integrator checks-in image files to ePic.
      • b. Inputs
        • i. Image files and additional data to be stored in ePic.
      • c. Outputs
        • i. Image files are store in the ePic file store and relevant data is updated.
      • d. System. Interactions
        • i. Information required for check-in will be entered manually into ePic via UI or supplied by the build system via an interface to ePic.
        • ii. Image files are uploaded to local file store as part of check-in function.
          • 3.7 Test Management and Defect Tracking
    3.8 Factory Deployment 3.8.1 Online Factory Deployment Process—Now Referencing the Non-Limiting Process Outline in FIG. 9.
  • 1. Release to Manufacturing
      • a. Description
        • i. Program Manager releases a series to manufacturing. This is done at for a Series/LangRegion combination.
        • ii. The system performs a number of sanity checks:
          • 1. Ensure that all SW releases are Golden Master or Release Candidates.
          • 2. Ensure that releases exist in the system for the selected LangRegion.
      • b. Inputs
        • i. Series SW BOM.
      • c. Outputs
        • i. New snapshot of RTM'ed Series SW BOM.
      • d. System Interactions
        • i. PM issues RTM in ePic.
  • 2. Generate Installation Data File
      • a. Description
        • i. The system updates the Installation Data File for the RTM'ed releases.
      • b. Inputs
        • i. Series Software BOM.
        • ii. Software release attributes.
      • c. Outputs
        • i. Updated installation data file.
      • d. System Interactions
        • i. None. This is an automated ePic process,
  • 3. Notify Factory Engineers
      • a. Description
        • i. ePic notifies factories that installation data has been updated. Only factories that are affected should be notified.
      • b. Inputs
        • i. Changed Installation data file.
      • c. Outputs
        • i. Email notification message.
      • d. System Interactions
        • i. None. Automated ePic process.
  • 4. Download Installation Data File
      • a. Description
        • i. Factory Engineer downloads the installation data file from ePic,
      • b. Inputs
        • i. Notification email.
      • c. Outputs
        • i. Latest installation data file.
      • d. System Interactions
        • i. Initiate update of installation data file for the Series/LangRegion via file store function,
  • 5. Download Image and Module Files.
      • a. Description
        • i. The factory file store is updated with the latest image and module files.
      • b. Inputs
        • i. Installation data file.
      • c. Outputs
        • i. New required images and modules are downloaded to local file store.
        • ii. Obsolete images and modules are deleted from local file store.
      • d. System interactions
        • i. Initiate update of image/module releases for the Series/LangRegion via file store function.
  • 6. Place order (NOTE: This step does not involve interaction with ePic. It is depicted here to show the order process relative to factory deployment for a CTO sales process).
      • a. Description
        • i. Customer places an order on a sales system.
      • b. Inputs
        • i. Customer CTO choices or Fixed SKU selection.
      • c. Outputs
        • i. Configuration as a list of DE Hero components.
      • d. System Interactions
        • i. Customer places order in sales system.
        • ii. Sales system or order management system passes order on to factory shop floor control system,
        • iii. Factory shop floor system delivers list of components to installation tools.
  • 7. Install Software
      • a. Description
        • i. The installation data file and list of components in a file for the configuration are provided as inputs to the installation tools.
        • ii. The installation tools automatically install required software. Sec section 7.9 for further details.
      • b. Inputs
        • i. Configuration of DB Hero component part list.
        • ii. Installation data file from ePic.
      • c. Outputs
        • i. Log data file.
      • d. System Interactions
        • i. Installation tools are executed via automated factory process.
        • ii. Log file must be collected to a central location (should be implemented in factory process).
  • 8. Deliver Log data to GARATA
      • a. Description
        • i. Log data file generated during the installation process is delivered to GARATA for loading into the database.
      • b. Inputs
        • i. Log file from installation process.
      • c. Outputs
        • i. Log file stored in GARATA or other data warehouse system.
      • d. System Interactions
        • i. Log file should be delivered to appropriate Sony server by FTP or other means.
        • ii. Files should be loaded into a database.
    3.8.2 Offline Factory Deployment Process is Shown in FIG. 10. 3.8.3 Running Change Process
  • This section describes how running changes would be issued using ePic. This is the VOA EPC process adapted to ePic functionality.
  • 3.8.3.1.1 Purpose
  • To facilitate, review and implement any Engineering Processing Changes (EPC's) to projects after initial RTM has been issued.
  • 3.8.3.1.2 Definitions
  • EPC-A: A running change in which existing software on the Series Software BOM RTM snapshot is patched in the manufacturing process. These are deployed as modules of type EPC. There are two types of EPC modules:
      • Temporary—Applied during imaging and “thrown away”. Not in HDD recovery partition.
      • Permanent—Applied during imaging and “kept”. Copied to the HDD Recovery Partition.
        EPC-M: A running change in which a foundation image or module is added/changed/deleted to/from the RTM snapshot of a Series SW BOM.
    3.8.3.1.3 Deliverables
      • EPC Notification—an automatic email triggered when a program manager re-issues an RTM.
      • EPC Executable—module checked-in to an ePic file store and distributed using online (network) or offline (media) delivery methods.
      • Updated Installation Data File (IDF).
      • Testing Result (Product Quality Group).
      • Testing Result, if applicable (Manufacturing Quality Group).
      • Date EPC was implemented (Manufacturing)—relevant data should be delivered to GARATA.
    3.8.3.1.4 Participants
      • Program Management Representative
      • Software Integration Representative
      • Quality Group Representative
      • Sustaining Group Representative
      • Application Champion or other applicable group representative
      • Manufacturing Representative
    3.8.3.1.5 Roles & Responsibility
    • 1. Program Manager—Initiates EPC request, facilitates the documentation, posting and announcement of EPC release. Issues RTM in ePic to release the IDF and images/modules.
    • 2. Software Integration Representative—Creates executable, checks in executable to ePic, announces release.
    • 3. Quality Group Representative—Tests and verifies EPC on applicable models.
    • 4. Manufacturing Representative—Tests and verifies EEC on applicable models, if applicable. Implements EPC and provides date of when EEC was implemented.
    3.8.3.1.6 Process
    • 1. Program Manager will email a software integration representative for an EEC request.
      • a. Email should appropriate documentation: issue(s), resolution, applicable models.
    • 2. Software Integrator will create EPC module or replacement image module. This may also be performed by the developer.
      • a. New release will be checked-ifs to ePic.
      • b. Appropriate changes will be made to the Series SW BOM template.
      • c. New snapshot of the Series SW BOM Template will be created and flagged as a release candidate (RC).
      • d. Quality group will be notified.
    • 3. Quality member tests software module.
      • a. Test strategies are updated.
      • b. Testing is performed and test results logged.
      • c. If testing fails Integrator is notified and steps from #2 repeated.
      • d. If testing is successful all interested parties are notified.
    • 4. Program manager issues an RTM for each applicable Series/LangRegion in ePic.
      • a. System sends running change notification to applicable persons.
    • 5. Installation data file and new release(s) are delivered to factory.
      • a. Online or offline factory deployment methods documented above are used to deploy EPC.
    • 6. If applicable, factory quality group tests new deliverables.
      • a. If testing fails, interested parties are notified and steps from #2 repeated.
      • b. If testing succeeds, interested parties are notified.
    • 7. Factory Engineer deploys new deliverables are deployed in production environment.
      • a. Data concerning which units have the EPC applied is collected (from installation tool log data) and delivered to persons responsible for loading data into GARATA.
    3.9 Installation
  • The installation process and tools will be common for all QA, Factory, and Recovery applications and is in reference by the non-limiting process of FIG. 11.
  • 1. Generate Software Release List
      • a. Description
        • i. The list of DB Hero component part numbers representing a configuration are converted into a list of software releases.
        • ii. This step can be skipped and process can begin from step 2 if a valid software release list has been generated by other means.
      • b. Inputs
        • i. Configuration (DB Hero component part list).
        • ii. Installation data file from ePic.
      • c. Outputs
        • i. List of software releases,
      • d. System Interactions
        • i. Installation tools function,
  • 2. Generate Recovery Key
      • a. Description
        • i. A list of software releases is used to generate a MCode.
      • b. Inputs
        • i. Software release list.
        • ii. Installation data file,
      • c. Outputs
        • i. Encrypted MCode.
      • d. System Interactions
        • i. Installation tools function.
  • 3. Write Recovery Key to DMI
      • a. Description
        • i. The Encrypted MCode is written to DMI.
      • b. Inputs
        • i. Encrypted MCode.
      • c. Outputs
        • i. MCode stored in DMI.
      • d. System Interactions
        • i. This is done using DMI writing tools.
  • 4. Partition Hard Drive
      • a. Description
        • i. The hard drive is partitioned according to data in the installation data file.
      • b. Inputs
        • i. Installation data file.
        • ii. Series and LangRegion.
      • c. Outputs
        • i. Hard drive is partitioned appropriately.
      • d. System Interactions
        • i. Installation tools output a list of partitions with sizes.
        • ii. Partition tools are used to partition the hard drive as part of factory process.
  • 5. Copy required file to recovery partition (HDD Recovery Only).
      • a. Description
        • i. If the series uses HDD Recovery partition, the recovery partition is prepared by the installation tools:
          • 1. The WinPE recovery partition is written to P1.
          • 2. Images modules and required data are copied to the recovery partition.
          • 3. Installation data file (or a portion of it) are copied to recovery partition.
      • b. Inputs
        • i. Software release list.
        • ii. Installation data file.
      • c. Outputs
        • i. Recovery partition is completely setup.
      • d. System Interactions
        • i. Installation tools function.
  • 6. Prepare Customer Partition(s)
      • a. Description
        • i. If the series uses HDD recovery, then the customer partitions are prepared by initiating the user recovery process in “unattended mode.”
        • ii. If HDD recovery is not used, the installation tools prepare customer partitions directly.
      • b. Inputs
        • i. installation Data File.
        • ii. Software Release list.
      • c. Outputs
        • i. Customer partitions are prepared.
      • d. System Interactions
        • i. Installation tool function.
  • 7. Generate Log Data
      • a. Description
        • i. Data about the releases installed are stored in a file suitable for loading into GARATA or any other data warehouse.
      • b. Inputs
        • i. Data about installation activities.
        • ii. Information about the unit (S/N, service tag, MCode, etc).
      • c. Outputs
        • i. File containing log information.
      • d. System Interactions
        • i. Creation of the log file is an installation tools function.
        • ii. The log file must be collected and delivered to appropriate system as part of factory process.
          Within this process flow, three use cases for installation tools will be supported:
      • 1. Installation using a list of DB Hero component part numbers.
        • a. Convert list of component part numbers to list of software releases.
        • b. Generate MCode using list of software releases.
        • c. Install software.
      • 2. Installation using a MCode.
        • a. Generate list of software releases using MCode.
        • b. Install software.
      • 3. Installation using a list of releases.
        • a. Generate MCode (optional).
        • b. Install software.
      • Factory Installation will use method #1 only. For retail models the DB Hero component part number list can be prepared offline and distributed at RTM time.
      • Recovery Media Sets (RDVD's or Fulfillment Media) can use method #2.
      • HDD Recovery and recovery using customer created media can use method #3.
      • Test system preparation can use all three methods.
    3.10 Recovery 3.10.1 Recovery Media Preparation
  • 1. Define recovery media engineering parts.
      • a. Description
        • i. Engineering parts for fulfillment recovery media are defined in ePic as “Recovery Media Sets,” Engineering parts for user created recovery media are not defined.
        • ii. NOTE: ePic need not be aware of specific recovery media types (SRCD, ARCD, etc.). This can be managed by recovery media creation tools. ePic also need not support media layout functions: eventually only RDVD's with a single set of recovery tools and factor-v distribution media need be supported.
      • b. Inputs
        • i. Series Software BOM snapshot.
        • ii. Additional Engineering parts required for recovery media,
        • iii. Media set specific information.
      • c. Outputs
        • i. Recovery media BOM in ePic.
      • d. System Interactions
        • i. User defines recovery media using “recovery media planner” in ePic.
    2. Generate MCode Specification.
      • a. Description
        • i. System calculates MCode Specification. An MCode Specification (or MCode Spec) is a set of bit/release relationships. More than one release can be assigned to one bit.
      • b. Inputs
        • i. Series Software BOM.
        • ii. Component/Release Mappings.
      • c. Outputs
        • i. MCode Specification.
      • d. System Interactions
        • i. Automated process with possible manual intervention.
  • 3. Create Recovery Media.
      • a. Description
        • i. Recovery Media (AKA, Fulfillment Media or RDVD's) are created using external tools.
        • ii. Tools use BOM's created in ePic.
        • iii. Optionally, media images can be checked into file store as a software release.
      • b. Inputs
        • i. Recovery Media BOM and attributes as defined in ePic.
      • c. Outputs
        • i. Physical Recovery Media.
        • ii. Optionally, media images.
      • d. System Interaction
        • i. Media creation tools interface with ePic to retrieve Recovery Media BOM and part attributes.
        • ii. Media images optionally checked-in to ePic file store, interactions with other systems.
          4 Interaction with Other Systems.
    4.1 Overview
  • ePic will interface with many systems and tools. This chapter summarizes those interfaces.
  • 1. DB Hero
      • a. DB Hero may be the global product data management system (PDM) for the VAIO business.
      • b. ePic can gather data from DB Hero to be used in BOM creation and factory deployment.
      • c. ePic can interface directly to DB Hero to retrieve needed data. No data need be fed back into ePic.
  • 2. Image/Module Build Tools
      • a. Tools used to build image (or module) releases and check them into the ePic file store.
      • b. ePic will export BOM data to these tools and provide functionality for checking in binary releases.
      • c. Data and functionality will be exposed to tools via an interface DLL.
  • 3. Test System Preparation Tools
      • a. Tools used to install software on systems to be used for testing.
      • b. ePic will expose BOM data for pre-integration testing and installation data files for post-integration testing.
      • c. Data and functionality will be exposed to tools via an interface DLL.
  • 4. Media creation Tools/Systems
      • a. Tools used to create recovery and factory media. Similar to image building tools.
      • b. ePic will export BOM data to these tools and provide functionality for checking in media image releases.
      • c. Data and functionality will be exposed to tools via an interface DLL.
  • 5. VELSUN
      • a. Global sustaining defect tracking system.
      • b. ePic will provide functionality for exporting defects to this system.
  • 6. VALSUN
      • a. Software development defect tracking system,
      • b. ePic will provide functionality for exporting defects to this system.
  • 7. ESG
      • a. VOE sustaining system.
      • b. ePic will export software parts and BOM data and defects to this system.
  • 8. OASIS
      • a. VOA tool to create MCode writing floppy disks.
      • b. Used by many Sony personnel to image systems with Recovery Media.
      • c. ePic will pass simple parameters to this system using an HTTP GET/POST request.
    4.2 A Project Peripheral Components
  • Several components external to the core ePic system will be developed by Neusoft, VOA, and VBD to facilitate these system interactions. Detailed requirements for these components are captured throughout chapter 9.
      • ePic Interface DLL
        • Win32 library.
        • Detailed requirements in chapter 9.14.
      • Installation Tools
        • Installation tools used in for testing, factory installation, and recovery media
        • Tools use the ePic installation data file, DB Hero component list, and/or software release list as inputs.
        • Tools output data suitable for import to GARATA.
      • Test System Preparation CD
        • WinPE based CD may be used to install software releases managed by ePic on test systems to be developed by SIT.
        • Current US implementation, called MINDS (Modular Installation Network Download System), adapted to meet requirements. interacts with ePic using the ePic Interface DLL and utilize the Installation Tools.
      • MCode Encoder/Decoder DLL
        • Mcode encoding/decoding libraries adapted to work with ePic Installation Data Files by SIT.
        • This library used by both ePic and Installation Tools for all MCode encoding/decoding requirements.
          In addition to the above components, build systems interface with ePic and use ePic data (see chapter 12). Sirs build system (Magellan) will interface with ePic using the ePic Interface DLL. SDN will use the build system provided by VOA.
    5 Requirements 5.1 Key Terms
  • The following terms are important for understanding requirements in this section. Additional terms are defined in chapter 13.
    • LangRegion: Term used to describe the combination of an ISO-639 language code with an ISO-3166-1 country code. (For example, “es_SP”, “es_MX”, “jp_JP”, “en_UK”, “en_US”, etc.), ePic and DB Hero will use LangRegion codes to define which language/region combo is to be supported by a software release.
    • Engineering Part: All software, documentation, and media sets are defined as “engineering parts” in ePic. Each engineering part can have many software releases associated with it.
    • Major Version: Attribute of an Engineering Part referring to the Major Version of a software item. Major Version is treated like an individual entity in ePic for certain functions.
    • Release: A release corresponds to a specific set of files and directories checked into ePic for a specific engineering part. Releases can satisfy one or more LangRegions.
    • Planning Part: ePic term for software parts defined in DB Hero.
    • Packaged Software: Software which has been packaged using WISE, Install Shield or some other installer technology (whether it was packaged by Sony or an ISV). Packaged Software is NOT the same as a module.
    • Foundation Image: Also known as “Base Image”. This is a set of files includes the OS and any software items (drivers, utilities, etc.) the integrator chooses to include. Recovery related components (PAC files, data files, etc.) are also considered a part of the Foundation Images.
    • Module: Software packaged with WISE which is suitable for use by factory installation tools (the installation is silent/unattended; the installation can be verified by install tools; the module is BIOS locked; etc.). ePic will support three types of modules: “Module”, “X-Module”, or “EPC.” “Modules” install in a single configuration, “X-Modules” are can install different configurations depending on target system characteristics. “EPC's” (Engineering Process Changes) are used for patches or running changes.
    General
  • Requirements that apply to all aspects of the system are listed here.
  • 5.1.1 Usabliity/Performance
  • ID Description Comments Priority
    GEN-2.1 All system data should be
    stored and presented in
    double-byte characters.
    GEN-2.2 All user interface prompts, No inter-
    command line tools, and nationalization
    online documentation of UI's!
    will be in English only.
    GEN-2.3 System should perform
    adequately for users in
    remote regions so that
    work schedules are not
    impacted by network
    speeds.
    GEN-2.3.1 Page views via the
    Sony intranet shall take no
    more than 10 seconds per
    view.
    GEN-2.3.2 Uploads/downloads between
    file stores on the Sony intranet
    should occur at a minimum
    rate of 450 MB per hour
    (1 Mbps).
    GEN-2.4 Online user documentation
    should be available.
  • 5.1.2 Availability
  • ID Description Comments Priority
    GEN-3.1 The main system (ePic) must be available to all Sony
    users 24 hours a day via intranet.
    GEN-3.2 Manufacturing deliverables should be available to 3rd If network delivery is available, it is
    parties. preferred, but an offline delivery method
    could also be used.
    GEN-3.2.1 Only RTM'ed or Test RTM'ed items should me made
    available to 3rd party factories.
    GEN-3.2.3 Pre-release deliverables may be distributed to 3rd
    parties (for example, for validation purposes). Such
    deliveries should be limited to only what is required to
    ensure efficient use of resources.
    GEN-3.3 Release check-in functionality should be available to 3rd Per 2005-6-30 BRD feedback from
    parties not on the Sony Network. VBD.
  • 5.1.3 Support
  • ID Description Comments Priority
    GEN-4.1 Live support for the system
    must be available to all
    users 24 hours a day.
  • 5.1.4 Security
  • ID Description Comments Priority
    GEN-1.1 Authentication policy as specified by SGS, The SGS operated “Common
    Authentication” system will be used for
    authentication for all users.
    GEN-1.1.1 System should be accessible only to named users.
    GEN-1.2 Authorization policy.
    GEN-1.2.1 System authorization will be role/resource based. See
    table in 9.2.4.1 for role to resource mappings.
    GEN-1.2.2 Authorization of the web-based application will be
    performed at a screen level.
    GEN-1.2.3 Users can be assigned to one or more roles.
    GEN-1.2.4 3rd party users can only access data for series which
    they have been explicitly authorized to view.
    Requirements to be provided by SGS.
  • 5.1.4.1 Role to Resource Mapping
  • Each instance of an entity can also have an “owner list”. Users with permissions to create/edit and entity can add other users to the owner list. Users on the owner list can edit that instance of the entity regardless of their assigned system role(s).
  • Role
    PM/ Test Project Factory 3rd Party
    Resource/Function Planner Developer Integrator Tester Lead Test Engineer User* Admin
    BOM-1.1: Manage series information. X X X
    BOM-1.2: Manage planning parts. X X X X
    INT-1.12: Create/edit SKU's. X X X
    BOM-1.9: Create/edit sample SW BOMs X X X
    (release lists).
    BOM-1.3/DEV-1.1: Manage engineering parts. X X X
    BOM-1.4: Manage images. X X
    BOM-1.6: Create series SW BOM. X X
    BOM-1.7: Set dependencies. X X X
    BOM-1.8: Create/edit groups. X X
    DEV-1.2: Check-in SW releases. X X X X
    MFG-1.1/MFG-1.2: Issue RTM/Test RTM. X X
    Download installation data and binary data for X X X X X X X
    SW releases.
    Download latest DB Hero data into ePic. X X
    Add users, set privileges.
    Manage 3rd party access. X
    Set champion of parts. X X
    Mass edit entities. X
    Create/edit Test Case. X X X
    Create/edit Test System. X X X X
    Create/edit Test Strategy. X X X
    Edit Test Case Result. X X
    Create/Edit Defect (except for status and X X X X X X X X X
    resolution).
    Create/Edit Defect (set status and resolution, X X X X X X
    except for “fix-verified” resolution).
    Create/Edit Defect (all attributes). X X X X
    Defined MDA/Benchmark categories/keys for X
    test cases.
    Edit miscellaneous IDF Data X X
      • Third party users can only view data for Series they have been authorized to view (see section 9.13.1, requirement ADM-1.3, “Manage 3rd party data access.”).
      • For VBD/SDNA, software project leaders (SPL's) will be assigned both the “PM/Planner” and “Developer” roles.
    5.1.5 Legacy Data
  • ID Description Comments Priority
    GEN-5.1 For all groups who Data will be manually
    require any legacy data entered to assist in training
    to be loaded, legacy users and quality testing.
    data will be manually ePic schema is significantly
    entered and software different from any existing
    releases manually systems. Data import may
    checked-in. be impractical.
  • 5.2 Planning
  • These are requirements for the “high-level planning” functions implemented in DB Hero that impact STD. Only business rules or functional requirements which are necessary to ensure proper STD functionality are captured here.
  • 5.2.1 Usage Requirements
  • ID Description Comments Priority
    Regional differentiation of software offerings
    will be managed in ePic.
    This is generically solved by implementing
    DB Hero “spec to component relationship”
    functionality (see section 9.6, INT-1.9).
  • 5.2.2 Business Rules
  • ID Description Comments Priority
    PLAN-2.1 A special DB Hero Class ePic must use this to
    (e.g., Product Cycle or SW revise software from
    Revision) must be introduced cycle-to-cycle.
    into a Series Config
    Range in order for the Series
    to be “cycle-less.”
  • 5.3 Engineering Software BOM Creation
  • Requirements for the “low-level planning” functions and software BOM creation in ePic are listed here.
    The following is a graphical representation of an ePic Engineering Part to help readers understand requirements:
  • 5.3.1 Usage Requirements
  • ID Description Comments Priority
    BOM-1.1 Manage series information.
    BOM-1.1.1 A series can be designated as active or inactive to 1
    indicate whether the series is EOL.
    BOM-1.1.2 Product cycle (SP05, SU05, FA05) must not be Since many products can be in production for 1
    required to organize data in the system. Product cycle many cycles, the active/inactive designation
    will be an attribute of a series. will be used in place of product cycle.
    BOM-1.1.3 Set series attributes. 1
    BOM-1.2 Manage planning parts. 1
    BOM-1.2.1 Associate engineering parts with planning parts. This information will be used to generate a 1
    Associations can be made to part name or a part name “Series Software BOM”.
    and major version.
    BOM-1.3 Manage engineering parts. 1
    BOM-1.3.1 Create/edit engineering part. 1
    BOM-1.3.2 Set part type. The following part types will be See ePic attributes in section 10.4. 1
    supported by ePic:
     1. Foundation Image
     2. P1 (recovery) Image
     3. Monolithic Image
     4. OS Setup
     5. Application
     6. Driver
     7. Online Documents
     8. OS Add-on
     9. Module
    10. Internal Tools
    11. BIOS/Firmware
    12. Recovery Media Set
    13. Factory Media Set
    14. Other
    BOM-1.3.3 Set part attributes. See ePic attributes in section 10.4. 1
    BOM-1.3.4 Engineering parts can be composite parts, consisting of This applies to not just images, but modules 1
    several other parts, or a single standalone part. and other part types as well.
    BOM-1.3.5 Engineering parts can be associated with planning parts More fine grained associations are possible by 1
    (so that series associations can be made via the DB editing the “Series Software BOM Template.”
    Hero Component BOM), or they can be manually LangRegion associations to releases will be
    associated with individual product series (for example, handled at module check-in time.
    manual association would be made for hardware
    specific software items).
    BOM-1.3.5.1 User may also specify “all series” so that the part So if new series are added after this is set, they 1
    would be used for all active series existing in the would still pick up this part in their BOMs.
    system at any moment in time.
    BOM-1.3.6 The LangRegions to be supported by a part can be 1
    specified at part creation time.
    BOM-1.3.7 One or more software releases can be associated with 1
    each part. Each software release can be associated
    with one or more LangRegions.
    BOM-1.3.8 For each LangRegion, one of the associated releases The default release can be manually 1
    can be flagged as “default.” The default release will be overridden after Series Software BOM
    used for “Series Software BOM” creation. Template generation (see BOM-1.6.2).
    BOM-1.3.9 Electronic data files for printed documentation can be Per 2005-6-30 BRD feedback from VBD. 1
    defined as engineering parts and stored in ePic. No
    additional functionality specific to these items is
    required.
    BOM-1.3.10 Installation priority of the part can be specified relative Satisfies VBD QA WG requirements 1c. 1
    to other part names/major versions as “BEFORE” or Installation tools will calculate installation
    “AFTER.” The system will not allow invalid order for a set of modules at installation time.
    installation order states (e.g., circular installation order
    relationships) to be defined.
    BOM-1.3.11 The Bios Lock ID (BLID) must uniquely identify a Satisfies VBD Factory Install WG 1
    foundation image. This means that relationship Requirement 1b.
    between BLID and FI will be one-to-one.
    BOM-1.3.12 The user can specify whether parts are active or not. If 1
    a user sets a part “inactive” then the system will
    ignore/hide the part in any BOM creation activities.
    BOM-1.4 Manage images/modules. Images and modules are To be implemented as a “Part Registration” 1
    engineering parts which can be final deliverables. wizard.
    BOM-1.4.1 Set image/module type. 1
    BOM-1.4.2 Create/edit image/module BOM Template. Each Composite parts only. 1
    composite engineering part has exactly one BOM
    Template.
    BOM-1.4.2.1 Groups, Part Names, Part Major Versions, and/or 1
    Releases can be added to BOM templates.
    BOM-1.4.2.2 Auto generate image/module BOM using target series 1
    attribute of parts and groups. User can edit auto-
    generated BOM before it is saved.
    Perform Sanity checks: The first check is to alert users that items 4
    Ensure items included in template must not be which are optional for a given series might be
    installed individually (use planning part included in the foundation image. The system
    associations). cannot know for sure from the DB Hero
    Ensure dependencies are satisfied. component structure, but it should indicate to
    the user that an eng. part has planning part
    associations.
    BOM-1.4.2.4 Releases flagged as “disabled” cannot be added to a Per review with SDNA 2005-9-14 1
    BOM template. (corresponding attribute REL-025 added).
    BOM-1.4.3 Snapshot BOM template (Freeze BOM). NOTE: This requirement applies to Series SW 1
    BOM Templates in addition to image/module
    BOM Templates.
    BOM-1.4.3.1 A snapshot contains only software releases 1
    (unspecified releases on the template will be set to
    defaults). Snapshots cannot be edited manually.
    BOM-1.4.3.2 All part information at the time of snapshotting is 1
    frozen in a snapshot. Changes made to the main data
    after snapshotting will not be reflected in the snapshot.
    BOM-1.4.3.3 BOM snapshots are exposed to build tools via the build 1
    tool interface.
    BOM-1.4.3.4 A BOM snapshot is retrievable as a file via ePic UI. 1
    Dropped. Satisfied by ePic “group” concept
    described in BOM-1.8..
    BOM-1.6 Create Series Software BOM. 1
    BOM-1.6.1 System will generate a “Series Software BOM See requirement BOM-1.8 for definition of 1
    Template”, which consists of the list of specific part “group”.
    names, major versions, groups and/or releases assigned
    to a series, using DB Hero component structure,
    planning part associations with engineering parts, and
    the properties of engineering parts. The system will
    show default value for unspecified items on the
    template.
    BOM-1.6.2 Edit “Series Software BOM Template”. Releases can This function allows special release 1
    be edited manually. dependencies/incompatibilities to be handled.
    BOM-1.6.3 The Series SW BOM will include mappings from one Satisfies VBD QA WG requirement 1 g. 1
    or more DB Hero components to one or more ePic
    software releases. See section 9.6, requirement INT-
    1.10.
    BOM-1.6.4 Once the Series SW BOM Template is complete, the 1
    user can snapshot the template. A snapshot contains
    only software releases (unspecified releases on the
    template will be set to defaults). Snapshots cannot be
    edited manually.
    BOM-1.6.5 All part information at the time of snapshotting is 1
    frozen in a Series SW BOM snapshot. Changes made
    to the main data after snapshotting will not be reflected
    in the snapshot.
    The system will indicate problems to the user when 4
    displaying the Series SW BOM template. Problems can
    be:
    Non-RC/GM releases.
    Target series information in conflict with
    planning part association.
    Dependencies not satisfied.
    No default releases available for a part.
    No releases available for a given language.
    Dependencies are not satisfied.
    BOM-1.6.7 The system should not allow an “inactive” part/release Added per review with SDNA 2005-9-14. 1
    to be added to a series SW BOM template.
    BOM-1.7 Dependencies between engineering part names and/or Satisfies VBD QA WG requirements 1a and 2
    part name/major versions can be specified. 1b.
    BOM-1.7.1 Other parts can be selected and dependencies will be 2
    specified as “DO NOT CARE”, “EXCLUDE”, or
    “REQUIRED.”
    BOM-1.7.2 The system will not allow circular dependencies to be 2
    defined.
    Satisfies VBD QA WG requirements 1 g.
    Dropped per review session with VBD 2005-
    9-15.
    BOM-1.8 Create edit groups. Groups are user defined lists of This is an internal ePic concept intended to 1
    engineering part names, major versions, releases, or allow users to define re-usable collections of
    other groups. parts. This concept, if used properly, makes
    BOM creation more efficient.
    BOM-1.8.1 Groups can be added to composite part BOM Note that groups are, for the most part, 1
    templates. Changes made to group contents after group functionally equivalent to BOM templates.
    assignment to a BOM template will be reflected on the
    BOM template.
    BOM-1.9 Create edit test software BOM. A test software BOM Per VBD review 2005-9-15: A facility for 5
    is a manually created list of software releases for a creating and sharing test software BOMs must
    single configuration. The releases must be listed in be available in the system.
    proper order of installation (based on installation This function will be used by both developers
    priorities specified in the system). and testers. It is the only way to create a
    software BOM in the system before a series
    software BOM has been prepared.
    A test software BOM is, by definition, a
    snapshot. BOM templating functions will not
    be used for test BOMs.
    BOM-1.9.1 User can search for and select part names, part major 5
    versions, or releases to be added to a test BOM.
    System will select default release if user does not
    specify a specific release.
    BOM-1.9.2 System should provide filtering capabilities to the user 5
    for selecting items for the test BOM.
    BOM-1.9.3 System should examine dependencies of the items 5
    selected and automatically add releases to satisfy these
    dependencies.
    BOM-1.9.4 User can download file containing the test BOM. 5
    BOM-1.9.5 User can save the test BOM in the system, BOM can 5
    be given a name for later retrieval.
    3
  • 5.3.2 User Interface Requirements
  • ID Description Comments Priority
    BOM-2.1 Part Registration Wizard. Implements the Image and Module Planners. 1
    BOM-2.1.1 Set general part attributes. 1
    BOM-2.1.2 Set type specific part attributes. 1
    BOM-2.1.3 Set part dependencies and installation order. 1
    BOM-2.1.4 Associate with planning part/set target series. 1
    BOM-2.1.5 If part is a composite part, show BOM Template 1
    creation interface (optional).
    BOM-2.1.6 BOM snapshotting function (optional). 1
    BOM-2.2 Series Software BOM Builder (Wizard). 1
    BOM-2.2.1 System generates the series software BOM and shows 1
    it to user with distinctive display of releases that fail
    sanity checks or are marked as special.
    BOM-2.2.2 User can edit Series SW BOM. 1
    BOM-2.2.3 User can snapshot Series SW BOM. 1
    BOM-2.2.4 User can create Component/Release mappings (see 1
    INT-1.10).
    BOM-2.3 Entity Editor. Access to all attributes of an entity in 1
    one place.
    BOM-2.3.1 Screens must allow all attributes for each major system The same functionality as the wizard is 1
    entity to be edited one screen. supplied for each entity type.
  • 5.3.3 Business Rules
  • ID Description Comments Priority
    BOM-3.1 Business Rule for Engineering Part Creation
    BOM-3.1.1 A new part should only be created for a major version
    release of software. Major version is defined as
    specification change. Iterative releases within a major
    release, to fix defects and such, are called Release
    Versions.
    BOM-3.1.2 A part name should include the name of the part only,
    in general terms. For example: Adobe Premiere
    Professional, VAIO Zone, Sonic Stage. The major
    version number is an attribute of the part, and can be
    concatenated for UI and reporting purposes. For
    example, a part can be created with the Part Name of
    “Adobe Premiere Professional” and the major version
    number of “7.1”. The part becomes the concatenation
    of the part name and major version number: “Adobe
    Premiere Professional 7.1”.
    BOM-3.1.3 Part names should not contain specific references to a
    series or CTO options. The following examples would
    not be acceptable: “Adobe Premiere 7.1 for IRX-3560”
    or “WinDVD 5.6 for Six Channel Speakers.”
    BOM-3.1.4 Part names can only contain the characters: a-z, A-Z, 0-9,, Only pintable ASCII characters (including
    —, or. space) should be allowed in part names.
    BOM-3.1.5 Major Version Number is a text field, with the same
    character restrictions.
    BOM-3.2 Changes to DB Hero controlled entities must be made
    in DB Hero only and then propagated to ePic via
    interface. Entity attributes owned by DB Hero must,
    therefore, not be editable in ePic.
  • 5.3.4 Interface Requirements
  • ID Description Comments Priority
    BOM-4.1 Load series master from DB Hero. 1
    BOM-4.2 Load parts master (planning parts) from DB Hero. 1
    BOM-4.2.1 Certain classes of hardware parts (HDD's, CPU's, etc.) Hardware parts are required for Test/Defect 1
    should not be filtered from the master parts list. If that management system functions.
    is not possible, all hardware parts should be loaded and
    ePic should filter hardware parts from UI.
    BOM-4.3 Load component structure from DB Hero. 1
    BOM-4.4 Load updates to all previously loaded DB Hero data. 1
    BOM-4.5 DB Hero interface behavior rules: BOM-4.5.X applies to all DB Hero interface 2
    requirements.
    BOM-4.5.1 DB Hero BOM data can be manually loaded from into 1
    ePic (via ePic UI). Data updates should be performed
    using the most efficient means available.
    BOM-4.5.2 Pre DB Hero release BOM data can only be loaded into One button to update all DB Hero data for a 2
    ePic manually. Initial load of any BOM must be series is ideal.
    manual.
    BOM-4.5.3 After the DB Hero release, structure/part changes Without ECNs manual load is the only 2
    which generate an ECN are automatically implemented possibility (except for series and parts, whose
    in ePic. Revision history is not kept. masters are synced regularly).
    BOM-4.5.4 ECNs can be requested by date range. ePic should Update period should be a configurable ePic 2
    periodically request all ECNs since last update system option.
    automatically.
    BOM-4.5.5 Email and UI notifications will be produced for 2
    software integrators for the following changes to DB
    Hero BOMs:
    Any SW part (planning part) change on
    component BOMs.
    Any changes (HW or SW) to components
    used in component/release mappings.
    Changes to Config Range/Line-up.
    BOM-4.5.6 DB Hero data will be loaded into ePic at most once per If users need up-to-date data, they can initiate 1
    day, and at least once per week. a manual transfer via ePic UI.
  • 5.4 Software Development
  • ePic requirements to support developers who use the system are listed here.
    The detailed format for software modules is documented separately in a “Modular Specification”.
  • 5.4.1 Usage Requirements
  • ID Description Comments Priority
    DEV-1.1 Engineering part registration (developer specific See “Software Engineering BOM Creation” 1
    requirements). for additional information concerning part
    registration.
    DEV-1.1.1 The set of LangRegions supported by the module must 1
    be specified.
    DEV-1.1.2 The part can be associated with a planning part and/or See BOM-1.3.5. 1
    target series. Neither is required (though warning
    should be issued if neither is selected).
    DEV-1.2 Check-in software release (non-image). 1
    DEV-1.2.1 Developer must identify LangRegions supported by the 1
    software release to be checked-in.
    DEV-1.2.2 Developer must indicate installation method and 1
    unattended installation command. Alternate
    installation commands may also be entered with
    comments.
    DEV-1.2.3 Developer must indicate any special requirements of These releases will be given special attention 1
    the software release (incompatibilities, special during “Series Software BOM” creation.
    instructions). System will flag release as having Can include a flag on release called “Special”
    special requirements where appropriate. or “Warning.” These releases would be called
    out on part templates and snapshots and
    comment would be displayed.
    DEV-1.2.4 Developer must enter release notes. A release note is See attributes in section 10.4 for more details. 1
    text entered into ePic. User can append an entry to the
    release note.
    DEV-1.2.4.1 Users can download all release note entries in a single 1
    text file via the UI.
    DEV-1.2.5 Software item check-in should allow files to be 1
    checked-in to local mirror and uploaded to main store
    asynchronously.
    DEV-1.2.6 If the item to be checked in is not an image, it will 1
    automatically be replicated to other file stores. If the
    item is an image, replication will not occur
    automatically. Users can request to the system that an
    image be downloaded to their regional file store via
    ePic UI.
    DEV-1.2.7 The following statuses can be specified for a release: Satisfies VBD QA WG requirement 1d. 1
    “ES/Test”, “FF”, “Pilot”, “CF”, “RC”, and “GM.” Satisfies VBD Factory Install WG requirement
    2a.
    DEV-1.2.8 User can optionally request that the system send the 1
    release email.
    DEV-1.2.8.1 Release email address list is a configurable system This list could also be auto-generated based on 1
    item. roles.
    DEV-1.2.9 User can set a release “inactive.” Inactive releases 1
    cannot be set as “default” and vice versa.
    DEV-1.3 Create/Edit Vendor 1
    DEV-1.3.1 User can store information about a software vendor 1
    (Name, Address, Contact, Sony Contact).
    DEV-1.3.2 Vendor can be optionally associated with an It is appropriate to include vendor name in part 1
    engineering part. name and also have a vendor association.
    DEV-1.4 User can initiate download of any release via ePic UI. 1
  • 5.4.2 User Interface Requirements
  • ID Description Comments Priority
    DEV-2.1 Extracting engineering part, release, Per 2005-6- 1
    BOM data, and planning part 30 BRD
    associations from the database feedback
    must be efficient for the developer. from VBD.
    DEV-2.2 Users should be able to easily initiate 1
    download of any release via ePic UI.
  • 5.4.3 Business Rules
  • ID Description Comments Priority
    DEV-3.1 Business rules specified as
    part of requirement BOM-
    3.1 apply to developers, as well.
  • 5.4.4 Interface Requirements None 5.5 Software Integration
  • ePic requirements to support integrators who use the system are listed here. ePic will provide a single interface to build tools. Each regional group is expected to modify their build tools to work with the new interface.
    Functionality specified here is to be used by integrators as part of image creation and Series Software BOM creation. Functionality to manage DB Hero SKU's and associated BOMs and create dummy SKUs and BOMs is also included here.
  • 5.5.1 Usage Requirements
  • ID Description Comments Priority
    Dropped. File store related requirements will
    be captures in section 9.10.
    INT-1.2 Check-in software release (image). 1
    INT-1.2.1 Software item check-in should allow files to be 1
    checked-in to local mirror and uploaded to main store
    asynchronously.
    INT-1.3 Schedule software integration activities. Future Requirement. Not in scope. NTH
    INT-1.4 Track software integration activities. Future Requirement. Not in scope. NTH
    INT-1.5 Event triggered notification concerning software Future Requirement. Not in scope. NTH
    integration activities.
    INT-1.6 System should not have any functional dependencies Build systems will be loosely coupled with 1
    on any external build systems. ePic.
    INT-1.7 Monolithic Images will be created by selecting a SKU User must select which series SW BOM 5
    that has been loaded from DB Hero or manually snapshot to use for this function.
    created in the system (see INT-1.12). The system will
    automatically create the Image BOM using the series
    software BOM.
    INT-1.7.1 Monolithic image BOMs are not editable by users. User must edit the appropriate Series Software 5
    BOM to change monolithic BOMs.
    INT-1.8 ePic will support creation and deployment of MLHD MLHD configurations are like SKUs that 5
    configurations. include software for more than one
    LangRegion.
    INT-1.8.1 MLHD BOM Template will be automatically generated 5
    based on user selected SKU BOM(s) loaded from DB
    Hero or manually created in ePic (see INT-1.12).
    INT-1.8.2 MLHD BOM is not manually editable. User should edit SKU BOM and associated 5
    Series Software BOM to change MLHD BOM
    contents.
    INT-1.8.3 MLHD BOM will be exposed to build system just like An attribute will allow VOE build system to 5
    any other image BOM. distinguish MLHD BOMs from other images.
    INT-1.9 Component selector. Allow user to create DB Hero User can use this function to specify a 2
    Component lists by selecting DB Hero specs and configuration or just a set of components.
    classes. This function is used to specify component-to-
    release mappings during series SW BOM
    Creation (BOM-1.6) and dummy SKU BOM
    Creation (INT-1.12.2). It is intended to make
    it easier for users to select components by
    allowing them to select the same items a
    customer would in a sales system.
    INT-1.9.2 If user is creating a configuration, DB Hero constraints This is necessary to create valid 2
    are checked by the system once all selections have been configurations.
    made.
    INT-1.9.3 DB Hero spec-to-component relations are used to Thomas will not implement constraints 2
    convert user selected specs/classes to a list of enforcement which is required for ePic.
    components.
    Dropped. VOA must adapt DB Hero 2
    deliverables to existing systems and Thomas
    will not have all required functionality.
    INT-1.10 Specify Component-to-Release Mappings. One or These mappings will be included in the 1
    more DB Hero Components is mapped to one or more “installation data file,” and factory tools will
    Releases on a Series SW BOM template. use these mappings to select the correct
    releases to install on a configuration based on
    the list of DB Hero components that make up
    that configuration (this is a SKU BOM).
    INT-1.10.1 If no mappings exist, the system will auto-generate 1
    mappings by using planning part associations to resolve
    which components will be selected.
    INT-1.10.2 User can use component selector to select additional 1
    components to be used in a component/release
    mapping or select components directly.
    INT-1.10.3 System will perform sanity checks upon submission of 1
    mappings:
    Ensure all SW items on the Series SW BOM have
    mappings with DB Hero components.
    INT-1.11 Integrators can request images from non-local file Images are not synced to other file stores by 1
    stores be copies to the local store. default.
    INT-1.12 Manage SKU's. A SKU represents an individual SKU BOMs are used by the system to auto- 2
    configuration. create monolithic image BOMs (INT-1.7) and
    MLHD BOMs (INT-1.8).
    A SKU (stock keeping unit) is a DB Hero part
    representing a configuration. The part number
    of such an item is also called SKU or F-
    number. A SKU BOM is a SKU part with a
    list of DB Hero component parts representing
    one configuration as children.
    Some configurations (for retail products) are
    officially defined in DB Hero. These product
    configurations are referred to as Fixed SKUs.
    INT-1.12.1 SKU BOMs are loaded from DB Hero as part of DB 2
    Hero interface functionality. SKU BOMs contain a
    SKU item as parent and components as children.
    INT-1.12.2 User can also manually create SKU's. User can use 2
    the component selector (INT-1.9) to create a SKU
    BOM. For manually created SKU BOMs, user should
    specify the SKU Description.
    INT-1.12.3 User cannot edit SKU BOMs originating from DB 2
    Hero.
  • 5.5.2 User Interface Requirements
  • ID Description Comments Priority
    Moved to section 9.4.2, requirement BOM-
    2.1.
  • 5.5.3 Business Rules
  • ID Description Comments Priority
    INT-3.1 Both regional and global of foundation
    images will be supported by ePic. When
    reqional images are used, foundation
    images will be designed and built locally
    in each engineering division using ePic
    and local build tools.
  • 5.5.4 Interface Requirements
  • ID Description Comments Priority
    INT-4.1 Provide image BOM data and software items for 1
    VOA's build environment.
    Dropped.
    INT-4.3 Provide image BOM data and software items for 1
    SDNA's build environment.
    INT-4.4 Data and functionality will be exposed to build tools DB Connection will be used by SDNA. VOA 1
    via interface DLL. and VOE will use web services.
    INT-4.5 Build data will be exported via system interface. Build data is a snapshot of a BOM template 1
    for an engineering part. The interface should
    expose other data so that the remote user can
    select snapshots.
    INT-4.5.1 Data to be exported: 1
    Active Series Master
    LangRegion Master
    Image/module BOM Snapshots
    All entity attributes
    Binary data (in file store)
    INT-4.5.2 Functions to be provided: Multiple calls required to get BOM. Filtering 1
    Authenticate of data should be done client side.
    Get Active Series
    Get LangRegion Master
    Get Composite Parts for Series
    Get Snapshot List for Part
    Get Snapshot BOM
    Get Binary Data for SW Release ID (from
    file store)
    INT-4.6 Check-in functionality will be provided via system 1
    interface.
    INT-4.6.1 Data to be imported: Part registration is needed since some parts 1
    Release attributes (like “clean” or “base+” OS images) will be
    Binary data (to file store) auto-created from build tools.
    Part Registration
    INT-4.6.2 Functions to be provided: Register part functionality must be available 1
    Authenticate remotely, for example, so that a PIDVD part
    Check-in (to ePic) (factory media) can be created by build tools
    Upload files (to local file store) automatically for each monolithic image
    Register Part (to facilitate auto-creation of created.
    related parts)
    Set default release
    INT-4.7 Config Range must be retrieved from DB Hero. For INT-1.9. Interface specified in “DB Hero 2
    Common Interface Protocol Specification
    2005-07-07”, page 12 and 27.
    INT-4.8 Constraints must be retrieved from DB Hero. For INT-1.9. Interface specified in “DB Hero 5
    Common Interface Protocol Specification
    2005-07-07”, page 14 and 30.
    INT-4.9 Spec-to-Component relations must be retrieved from For INT-1.9. Interface specified in “DB Hero 2
    DB Hero. Common Interface Protocol Specification
    2005-07-07”, page 17 and 35.
    INT-4.10 All SKU BOMs must be retrieved from DB Hero and For INT-1.7 SKUs are identified by F- 2
    stored in ePic. number. Interface specified in “DB Hero
    Common Interface Protocol Specification
    2005-07-07”, page 10 and 24.
  • 5.6 Factory Deployment
  • This section captures ePic requirements specific to factory deployment. Some of these requirements extend previously specified functionality. The requirements and data format for the installation data file is captured in section 9.8.
  • 5.6.1 Usage Requirements
  • ID Description Comments Priority
    MFG-1.1 Snapshot Series Software BOM. This functionality Snapshots are used for several operations: 1
    should be available from the series software BOM Installation Data File creation, Test Strategy
    management screens. management.
    MFG-1.1.1 A snapshot can be flagged as a Release Candidate The latest RC snapshot is used for generating 2
    (RC). Test Strategies. This function would be used
    for the “BOM Freeze” milestone in VOA.
    MFG-1.1.2 User must enter a text version string (or snapshot For example, “1.0”, “1.1.1-rc”, or “Build 1”. 1
    name) for each series software BOM snapshot. This Business units will decide conventions this
    version string should be unique for Series/LangRegion field.
    combination. This is in addition to system generated ID. It
    is used throughout the system and external
    tools as the name of the snapshot.
    MFG.1.2 Issue RTM or Test RTM. RTM's and Test RTM's will Test RTM's will be used as a mechanism for 4
    be issues by Series/LangRegion. pre-releasing BOMs for PVT events.
    MFG-1.2.1 Only one snapshot for a given Series/LangRegion This implies that different snapshots could be 4
    combination can be flagged as RTM or Test RTM. used for different LangRegion combinations.
    MFG-1.2.2 System must send when an RTM has been issued in 5
    the system. Email must include the following
    information:
    Installation data file name with hyperlink to ePic
    page from which it can be downloaded.
    Name and email of user who issued the RTM.
    Engineering organization of the user.
    MFG-1.3 Running change management. 4
    MFG-1.3.1 If a user issues an RTM against a Series/LangRegion 4
    combination for which a RTM snapshot already exists
    the system should warn the user that a previous
    snapshot was RTM'ed and this is a running change.
    MFG-1.3.2 When system sends release mail to users, the mail For example: 5
    should indicate that the change is a running change to Changes since initial RTM:
    RTM'ed software. In addition to items described in <part name> <detailed ver.> (<rel. id>)
    MFG-1.2.2 the following items should be included in [ADDED]
    the mail: <part name> <detailed ver.> (<rel. id>)
    List of releases added/deleted/changed since initial [DELETED]
    RTM. Items which are patches (EPCs) should be <part name> <detailed ver.> (<rel. id>)
    tagged as such. [CHANGED]
    List of releases added/deleted/changed since the <part name> <detailed ver.> (<rel. id>)
    last running change release. Items which are [ADDED] [PATCH]
    patches (EPCs) should be tagged as such. Changes since last RTM:
    <part name> <detailed ver.> (<rel. id>))
    [ADDED]
    MFG-1.4 Manage partitioning information. System will provide This data will be included in the installation 5
    functionality for specifying partition sizes for all data file.
    partitions to be used on production systems. Special
    partitions “recovery” and “system” (or C drive) can be
    defined. “System partition must always be specified.
    MFG-1.4.1 Partitions sizes can be defined for each 5
    Series/LangRegion combination.
    MFG-1.4.2 Partition sizes should be specified in MB (megabytes). 5
    MFG-1.4.3 For the recovery partition, user can select “dynamic” If a partition size is dynamic, installation tools 5
    instead of specifying a size. For system partition user will decide what the size will be.
    can specify “single partition” instead of specifying a If partition size is “single partition”, then all
    size. available space remaining on the disk would
    be allocated for the partition.
    MFG-1.4.4 For the “system” partition, user must specify a This is used in the factory so that a diagnostic 5
    minimum size. This is always required. partition can be created. For single partition
    models the partition size will be extended to
    the final size at the end of the factory process.
    MFG-1.4.5 If user selects “dynamic” for recovery partition size, 5
    user must also specify “recovery partition installed
    size.” This is the size in MB of all data included in the
    recovery image. It is needed to calculate a dynamic
    partition size.
    MFG-1.4.5 For each partition specified, user must specify a disk For example, “Disk 1, Partition 2, SYSTEM.” 5
    number, partition number, and label name.
    MFG-1.4.6 For each partition specified, user must specify a file Standard partition types and numbers should 5
    system type. This type will be stored as a hexadecimal be used.
    number, but system should prompt users with partition
    type name.
    MFG-1.5 Factory Media Management. System should provide 4
    some addition functionality to facilitate media delivery
    to factories when defining factory media engineering
    parts.
    MFG-1.5.1 System should provide function for auto-creating 4
    media BOM based on a series SW BOM snapshot.
    User can select the snapshot (by RTM, Test RTM,
    Latest, or version field) and system will prepare a
    BOM which includes the appropriate installation data
    file.
    MFG-1.5.2 System should provide function for auto-creating a 4
    media set containing only files which have changed
    from another media set. User should select two series
    software BOM snapshots. Default is initial RTM'ed
    snapshot and latest RTM'ed snapshot. Appropriate
    installation data file will be included on the BOM.
    MFG-1.5.3 User can manually add/remove releases from the 4
    Factory Media BOM.
    MFG-1.6 Miscellaneous IDF data maintenance. Functions for 4
    managing data in the IDF not covered elsewhere in this
    document must be provided.
  • 5.6.2 User Interface Requirements
  • ID Description Comments Priority
    MFG-2.1 RTM/Running Change Wizard. 5
    MFG-2.2 Download Installation Data file. 3
  • 5.6.3 Business Rules
  • ID Description Comments Priority
    MFG-3.1 . . .

    5.6.4 interface Requirements
  • ID Description Comments Priority
    MFG-4.1

    5.7 Installation and Recovery (ePic)
    These requirements describe ePic functionality required to support software installation and recovery.
  • 5.7.1 Usage Requirements
  • ID Description Comments Priority
    INST-1.1 “Installation Data File” (IDF) Management. 1
    INST-1.1.1 Installation Data File (IDF) must include the following Satisfies VBD Factory Install WG requirements 1
    elements for each Series/LangRegion: 1a-f.
    Minimum tools version number - checked Factory Install WG 1c and 1f-1 are satisfied
    by tools to ensure the correct version is since P1 images, patches, and running changes
    being used (configurable value). are treated like any other module.
    Version number of the installation data
    snapshot.
    The contents of Snyinst.oem. Installation
    order for the modules.
    Mapping of DB Hero components to ePic
    SW releases.
    Data required for the installation tools to
    confirm successful installation of each
    release.
    CRC data for each binary file.
    Total size of each release binary data (used
    for dynamic partition size calculation).
    Path information required to locate binary
    files in the file store and download them
    (via SMB share).
    Partition size information for recovery and
    system partitions. All partition information
    defined in the system should be included
    and a field listing total number of partitions
    defined should be calculated and included
    in the file.
    BIOS time zone offset from GMT by the
    series/LangRegion (e.g., GMT +8, GMT −7).
    For each release included in the file,
    engineering organization for the developer
    who checked-in the release.
    Recovery type (HDD Recovery or media
    only).
    MLHD specific information, if applicable.
    Relevant MCode specification(s).
    List of all software releases and attributes of
    all software releases on the Series SW
    BOM (BLID will be included as an
    attribute of FI releases).
    INST-1.1.3 An installation data file can be automatically Intended to satisfy Factory Install WG 3
    downloaded to a factory file store, it can be retrieved requirement 3a.
    manually via ePic UI, or it can be retrieved via DLL
    interface.
    INST-1.1.4 Installation data files are generated for each Series There will be many IDF's. To make 2
    Software BOM Snapshot. management easier special requirements have
    been specified for online (STOR-1.10 and
    STOR-1.14) and offline (MFG-1.5) factory
    deployment methods.
    INST-1.1.5 All users can retrieve the “Test RTM” or “RTM” Satisfies Factory Install WQ requirement 1f-2. 4
    version of the installation data file for a given series.
    Sony users can additionally retrieve the “latest”
    snapshot of an installation data file.
    INST-1.1.6 Each installation data file must have a unique name 1
    with the unique identifier included in the name.
    INST-1.2 “RTM”, “Test RTM”, and “latest” snapshots of 4
    installation data can be generated and stored in the
    system.
    INST-1.3 Installation data will be “cycle-less.” Installation data 2
    will support all cycles for a given series.
    INST-1.4 All users must have a system account to access these 2
    services.
    INST-1.5 Third party users should have access only to data 5
    relevant to them. Data will be restricted by series (see
    ADM-1.3).
    INST-1.6 MCode management. 4
    INST-1.6.2 A MCode specification (bit mapping to software This means that MCodes can be duplicated with 4
    releases) is defined for each Recovery Media Set. each instance having different meanings.
    INST-1.6.3 The system will generate a MCode specification once 4
    the Recovery Media Set BOM and Series SW BOM
    for the associated series' are complete. This function
    can be re-run if the BOM changes and existing MCode
    Mappings will not be affected.
    INST-1.6.4 The system can calculate a MCode given a list of SW Satisfies VBD Factory Install WG requirement 5
    releases or a list of DB Hero components representing 2c.
    a single configuration.
    INST-1.6.5 The system can calculate the list of software based on a 5
    given MCode.
    INST-1.6.5.1 User can produce a list of software from an encrypted 5
    MCode or unencrypted MCode. If the MCode is
    encrypted, user must also enter a UUID (text string) to
    facilitate decryption.
    INST-1.6.6 The system can calculate a MCode based on a SKU System must first convert list of DB Hero 4
    BOM (user defined or from DB Hero) defined in the components to a list of software releases to
    system. accomplish this.
    A SKU BOM must be used, because
    calculating a valid MCode requires that DB
    Hero constraints have been enforced for the
    configuration (see Component Selector, INT-
    1.9).
    INST-1.6.6.1 User can optionally generate an encrypted MCode by 5
    entering a UUID in the system.
    INST-1.6.7 The MCode specification will be included in the 4
    installation data file.
    INST-1.7 Recovery Media Planner. Users can define a BOM 4
    template for a Recovery Media Engineering Part using
    a wizard or form.
    INST-1.7.1 User selects the Series and LangRegion for which the 1
    recovery media will be created. User can optionally
    must select an OS, as well.
    INST-1.7.2 System will auto create a Recovery Media BOM 4
    template. This function is identical to Series Software
    BOM auto-generation except that it is also constrained
    by OS selection.
    INST-1.7.2.1 User can manually add/remove engineering 1
    parts/release/groups to the BOM template.
    INST-1.7.2.2 User can create snapshots of the Recovery Media BOM 1
    template. Requirements are the same as for Series
    Software BOM.
    INST-1.7.2.3 A function for comparing Recovery media BOM Recovery Media BOM's and Series SW 5
    snapshots to series SW BOM snapshots should be BOM's (their lifecycles are different) are not
    available. Differences should be shown to the user. directly related. This function is necessary so
    that users can reconcile differences.
    INST-1.8 The ePic component selector function must provide a This is just a button or hyperlink. 4
    function for issuing an HTTP GET or POST to the This function cannot yet be merged into ePic
    OASIS system in the VOA (This system generates because it is heavily tied to VSMS and legacy
    MCode writing floppy disks for Sony personnel around support will be required for a while. This can
    the world). The HTTP request will include an eventually be convened to a standalone tool
    unencrypted MCode and any other data necessary to which runs alongside ePic once the VSMS
    produce a MCode floppy in OASIS. dependencies can be lifted.
  • 5.7.2 User Interface Requirements
  • ID Description Comments Priority
    INST-2.1 Recovery media planner (wizard). 1
    INST-2.1.1 Select Series, LangRegion, and OS. One or more of 1
    any of these items may be selected. Set media specific
    attributes.
    INST-2.1.2 System auto-generates media BOM. Show software Series SW BOM is required for auto- 4
    releases and media layout. Allow user to add items to generation. If it is unavailable, user may
    BOM. Items generated from Series SW BOM cannot create BOM from scratch.
    be edited.
    INST-2.1.3 Generate MCode bit mappings. System stores bit 4
    mappings. Existing bit mappings are frozen if any
    Series/LangRegion assigned to media set it RTM'ed.
    Additional mappings may be created post-RTM.
  • 5.7.3 Business Rules
  • ID Description Comments Priority
    INST-3.1 MCode format will be changed:
    Current MCode space occupied by
    PCODE will be replaced with a
    MCode Spec identifier.
    All remaining bits will be used for
    algorithmic mapping bits to
    software items. There will no
    longer be HW/SW MCode -
    only SW MCode.
    INST-3.2 HDD recovery and recovery from
    customer created recovery media
    will not be dependent on MCode.
    MCode is required only for recovery
    using Sony supplied recovery media
    (as defined in ePic).
  • 5.7.4 Interface Requirements
  • ID Description Comments Priority
    INST-4.1 . . .
  • 5.7.5 MCode Specification Changes 5.7.5.1 Current MCode Implementation 5.7.5.2 New MCode Implementation Changes:
      • Number of bits available for software will increase from 48 to 80.
      • PCode value will be replaced with an ePic “MCode Spec” identifier,
      • Recovery tools will require only MCode and installation data file (included on media) to recovery a machine. Reliance on any other DMI fields will be eliminated.
    Installation Data File Mockup
  • <?xml version=″1.0″ encoding=″UTF-8″>
    <InstallationDataFile>
    // Versioning information and other top level data
    <Header>
    <Series name=″″/>
    <LangRegion name=″″/>
    <BomSnapshot id=″″ versionString=″″/>
    <MinimumToolVersion version=″″ />
    </Header>
    // List of DB Hero component ID to SW release mappings
    // (created as part of Series Software BOM management)
    <ComponentReleaseMap>
    <Mapping>
    <ComponentIDList/>
    <ReleaseIDList/>
    </Mapping>
    ...
    </ComponentReleaseMap>
    // List of MCode bit mappings
    // MCode spec by recovery media set or Series/LangRegion/OS
    <MCodeSpec>
    <OperatingSystem id=””>
    <Mapping>
    <MCode bitmask=″″ value=″″/>
    <ReleaseIDList/>
    </Mapping>
    ...
    </OperatingSystem>
    ...
    </MCodeSpec>
    // Partition Data
    <ParitionInfo/>
    // List of all releases and their attributes for the Series/LangRegion
    // (includes BIOS/Firmware releases)
    <SeriesSoftwareBom>
    <Release id=″″ blid=″″ ...>
    <SetupCommand/>
    <Dependencies/>
    </Release>
    ...
    </SeriesSoftwareBom>
    </InstallationDataFile>
  • 5.8 Installation and Recovery (Tools)
  • As part of the requirements process global modular and recovery specifications will be defined. These requirements describe changes that must be made to US installation and recovery tools in order to work with ePic. These tools will become the global Installation and Recovery Toolset.
  • 5.8.1 Usage Requirements
  • ID Description Comments Priority
    TOOL-1.1 Image and Module part types can be downloaded and Requirements TEST-1.1 to TEST-1.4 satisfy 2
    installed automatically using the same tools to be used QA WG requirements for network installation
    in the factory. item 2.
    Patches and running changes are “Modules”
    and are thus included.
    TOOL-1.2 Installation without a Series SW BOM must be This functionality should be provided on a 2
    supported. boot CD.
    Software list building/storing functional
    requirements added to ePic per 2005-9-15
    VBD review.
    TOOL-1.3 Installation of a clean OS should be possible. VBD QA WG Requirement. 2
    This is for early SW development (of drivers,
    for example). ePic will allow such images to
    be checked in and users can use QA
    installation tools to image units.
    TOOL-1.4 BIOS/Firmware and tools (e.g., to burn BIOS, write 3
    firmware or write DMI) part types should be
    downloaded automatically.
    TOOL-1.5 BIOS/Firmware parts should be automatically 3
    installable.
    TOOL-1.6 Release Notes and Bug Lists for all parts can be 2
    automatically downloaded.
    TOOL-1.7 Paper manual contents can be automatically 2
    downloaded.
    TOOL-1.8 QA download and installation services and tools must Satisfies QA WG requirements for network 2
    be available worldwide to VAIO engineering groups, installation item 3 and 5c.
    outsourced QA groups, and ODMs. Detailed list of users is included in the original
    document.
    TOOL-1.9 Tools should check the minimum required version in 2
    the installation data file and should return an error if
    they are a lower version.
    TOOL-1.10 Tools will determine install order based on data from 2
    ePic.
    TOOL-1.11 Tools must operate in WinXP and WinPE. Satisfies QA WG requirements for network 2
    installation item 5e and 2i.
    TOOL-1.12 Tools must implement function to convert an MCode to This enables the distribution of MCodes to 2
    a list of software releases (using the installation data factory for Fixed SKU production, and it
    file) and vice versa. enables calculation of MCodes on the fly by
    installation tools during the modular
    installation process.
    TOOL-1.13 Unique ID of each software release must be verified Satisfies VBD QA WG requirement 3a. 3
    after installation.
    TOOL-1.14 Installation tools must be able to detect whether a Satisfies VBD QA WG requirement 3b. 3
    module successfully installed.
    TOOL-1.15 Installation tools should support automatic creation of a Satisfies QA WG requirements for network 3
    target environment on a machine. installation item 5a.
    TOOL-1.15.1 Target environment includes an HDD image. Assumption is that this is a foundation image. 3
    TOOL-1.15.2 Target environment includes firmware and BIOS 3
    updates.
    TOOL-1.15.3 Target environment includes updating of DMI data. 3
    TOOL-1.16 Installation tools must have locking mechanism so that Satisfies QA WG requirements for network 3
    they only work on Sony PCs. installation item 5b.
    TOOL-1.17 QA installation can be initiated using a WinPE boot Satisfies QA WG requirements for network 2
    CD. installation item 5d.
    TOOL-1.18 Installation tools must work in Windows. 2
    TOOL-1.19 Installation tools must support preparing recovery Satisfies QA WG requirements for network 3
    partition only without performing full install. installation.
    TOOL-1.20 An automated system should exist that can scan This would help facilitate Test System data 3
    hardware data for test systems and load it into ePic entry.
    through a network connection. WMI based configuration checking
    implementation could be used to satisfy this
    requirement.
    TOOL-1.21 A DLL should be provided that utilizes MCode 1
    encoding/decoding and MCode decryption/encryption.
    TOOL-1.22 Three use cases for installation tools will be supported:
    1. Installation using a list of DB Hero
    component part numbers.
    a. Convert list of component part
    numbers to list of software
    releases.
    b. Generate MCode using list of
    software releases (optional -
    could be done offline).
    c. Install software.
    2. Installation using a MCode.
    a. Generate list of software
    releases using MCode.
    b. Install software.
    3. Installation using a list of releases.
    a. Generate MCode (optional -
    could be done offline).
    b. Install software.
  • 5.8.2 User Interface Requirements
  • ID Description Comments Priority
    TOOL-2.1
  • 5.8.3 Business Rules
  • ID Description Comments Priority
    TOOL- For the use cases defined in TOOL-1.22:
    3.1 Factory Installation will use method #1
    only. For retail models the DB Hero
    component part number list can
    be prepared offline and distributed
    at RTM time.
    Recovery Media Sets (RDVDs or
    Fulfillment Media) will use method #2.
    HDD Recovery and recovery using
    customer created media will use method
    #
    3.
    Test system preparation will use all
    three methods.
  • 5.8.4 Interface Requirements
  • ID Description Comments Priority
    TOOL-4.1
  • 5.9 File Store/Mini-ePic 5.9.1 Usage Requirements
  • ID Description Comments Priority
    Moved to Business Rules section.
    Moved to Business Rules section.
    STOR-1.3 New module and application releases will automatically 1
    be synced with other engineering file stores. Images
    will not.
    STOR-1.4 Sony user can request that images from another 1
    engineering file store be transferred to their local file
    store via ePic UI.
    STOR-1.5 Factory engineers can automatically sync their local file File store solution would thus require a 3
    store by providing installation data file to function for parsing the installation data file.
    synchronization tool.
    STOR-1.5.1 All binary data required will be automatically 3
    downloaded to factory file store according to
    installation data file.
    STOR-1.5.2 Obsolete releases will be automatically deleted from The “delete obsolete files” function is intended 3
    factory file store according to installation data file. for factory use. Factories will usually only
    This function can be optionally disabled. require latest RTM'ed releases. Obsolete
    releases would be any releases that were
    removed/replaced in the installation data file.
    Such a function ensures that factories will
    never need to allocate more storage than is
    absolutely necessary to the file store.
    STOR-1.5.3 Factory engineers can only download “RTM” or “Test 3
    RTM” releases as indicated in the installation data file
    they receive.
    STOR-1.6 For each release, one or more files and directories can 1
    be checked into file store.
    STOR-1.6.1 During release check-in, upload process should be a User should not have to zip up files or FTP 1
    fully automated and atomic operation. them anywhere.
    STOR-1.7 During a download operation, the total size of the files 3
    to be downloaded can be reported to the user before the
    download starts.
    STOR-1.8 Users must be able to load binary data into the file Some factories will receive images and 3
    store from media. modules on DVD (factory media set).
    STOR-1.9 User must be able to operate the file store without a Perhaps factory file store can work with just 1
    database connection to ePic. installation data file. Engineering stores may
    use database connection to acknowledge
    check-in(s) and perform other advanced
    functions.
    STOR-1.10 File store will provide a function for downloading latest This function is for factories. 3
    installation data file for a Series/LangRegion. The
    Series/LangRegion list for this function should be kept
    in a configuration file and downloads should be
    manually triggered.
    STOR-1.10.1 User should be able to view/download the list of 3
    changes (the same as in requirement MFG-1.3.2) when
    the file store download is triggered.
    STOR-1.11 The file store solution should be deliverable as an Package is sent with user manual and required 1
    easily installable package with a simple configuration configuration parameters.
    file.
    STOR-1.12 The file store solution should be deployable to a wide File store users will have more flexibility in 1
    range of system architectures. hardware selection or they can leverage
    existing infrastructure.
    STOR-1.13 File and directory management. 1
    1
    STOR-1.13.2 Files should be stored in a flat file structure with each It is acceptable to have a few directories on the 1
    file uniquely named. file store, as long as it is human navigable.
    Files could be named as the release ID with
    type prefix.
    STOR-1.14 A factory file store can be synchronized based on the Intended to satisfy Factory Install WG 3
    installation data file. requirement 3b and 3d.
    STOR-1.15 Files and directories (binary data) in the file store Satisfies Factory Install WG requirement 3c. 1
    should be uniquely named.

    5.9.2 User interface Requirements
  • ID Description Comments Priority
    STOR-2.1 Solution should be command-line Operations can 1
    based. Some functions may be be scripted. No
    implemented in a daemon. graphical UI
    required.
  • 5.9.3 Business Rules
  • ID Description Comments Priority
    STOR-3.1 Any business unit requiring a file store will be Storage requirements will vary for each
    responsible for purchasing and maintaining hardware. installation.
    STOR-3.2 Any non-GM software must be available for a specified Satisfies QA WG requirements for network
    period of time (e.g. 100 days) after the GM version has installation item 4.
    been released.
    STOR-3.3 Golden Master (GM) SW releases must be available Satisfies QA WG requirements for network
    for an indefinite period of time. installation item 4.
    If indefinite period is impossible one of the following:
    By the end of OS support period.
    By the end of product support period.
    By the end of key parts availability for HW services.
  • 5.9.4 Interface Requirements
  • ID Description Comments Priority
    STOR-4.1 File store must communicate with other 1
    file stores.
    STOR-4.2 Files stores must authenticate before 1
    connecting to another file store or
    ePic for any reason.
  • 5.10 Test Management and Defect Tracking
  • The following key concepts are central to ePic Test Management and Defect Tracking functionality:
      • Test Case: Unit test case associated with a single hardware or software item.
      • Test Case Strategy: A collection of test cases for a series or engineering part/major version. Partially auto-generated based on the releases on a series software BOM. The test case strategy changes over time as items on the series software BOM change.
      • Defect: A flaw of a software or hardware item. Defects can be linked to test cases or standalone.
      • Test System: A PC used for testing. ePic will track the configurations of test systems.
    9.11.1 Usage Requirements
  • ID Description Comments Priority
    TEST-1.1 Three primary system roles are used for the 3
    Test/Defect components of ePic: “Project Test
    Lead,” “Test Lead,” and “Tester.”
    TEST-1.1.1 Only “Project Test Leads” and “Test Leads” can 3
    create/edit Test Cases and create/edit Test Strategies.
    TEST-1.1.2 Testers can update the results of a Test Case or 3
    create/edit defects. Testers can edit Test Case
    definitions if they have been added to the owner list
    for the Test Case by a Test Lead or Project Test
    Lead.
    TEST-1.1.3 Developers and Integrators can update status and “Fix-verified” resolution is used to confirm 3
    resolution of defects, but cannot set resolution of regression tests were successful.
    defects to “Fix-verified.”
    TEST-1.1.4 Any user with an assigned role in the system can Authenticated users without roles are given 3
    enter a defect in open status. read-only access to all parts of the system.
    TEST-1.2 Defect management. 3
    TEST-1.2.1 Defects can be associated with one or more Thus for hardware defects, DB Hero part 3
    engineering part/major versions, releases, series, or numbers are used, and for software defects
    hardware parts. Defects cannot be associated with (including BIOS and firmware) ePic part
    software planning parts from DB Hero. numbers are used.
    TEST-1.2.2 If a user chooses to associate a defect with a series, 3
    the user should then have the option of selecting
    releases from the series software BOM (if available).
    TEST-1.2.3 Before entering a defect, the user should be able to Search functions should be accessible from the 3
    search existing defects to ensure that duplicates or create defect view.
    similar defects do not already exist.
    TEST-1.2.4 Defects can be associated with one or more Test 3
    Systems.
    TEST-1.2.4 Defects must be associated with Test Cases if they 3
    are discovered as part of testing (see requirements
    TEST-2.1.4). Defects can also manually be
    associated with a test case.
    TEST-1.2.5 Any changes made to an existing defect should be 3
    captured in a history log. The user, date/time, and
    attributes changed should be captured. Changes to
    values for status and resolution of defect should be
    tracked in the history log. For other attributes values
    do not need to be tracked.
    TEST-1.2.6 Users checking-in new part releases are required to This will be required for ALL users who check 3
    update the status and resolution of any open defects in releases regardless of whether their
    linked against that part/major version. organization uses the Test Mgmt/Defect
    Tracking functions of ePic. This is critical for
    correctly assessing the quality level in any
    release on the series SW BOM, as will as
    auto-generating the regression portion of a
    Test Strategy.
    TEST-1.2.6.1 System will display a table of open defects and allow It is preferred that notes entry be a separate 3
    user to enter status, resolution, and notes for each screen invoked by a link to facilitate a more
    defect. compact UI.
    TEST-1.2.6.2 If user sets defect resolution to “Will Not Fix” or 3
    “Deferred” a note is required.
    TEST-1.3 Foundation Image (FI) Defect Propagation Tool. This is a special purpose function required 4
    because each FI is defined as separate
    engineering part in ePic, but defects found in
    the FI will often apply to many FIs (for
    example, defects cause by build tools). It is
    intended to be used by integrators/image
    builders as opposed to QA personnel.
    TEST-1.3.1 System displays all open defects against foundation 4
    images and a table of all active foundation image
    engineering parts and releases.
    TEST-1.3.2 Attributes displayed for foundation images facilitate 4
    dimensional analysis to identify other FIs affected by
    a defect. User can sort table by column or filter table
    by column values.
    TEST-1.3.3 User can select one defect and one or more releases 4
    in the FI table and assign the defect to all selected
    FIs.
    TEST-1.4 Create/edit test system. User can define test systems 5
    (PCs used for testing software and hardware) in ePic.
    TEST-1.4.1 Each BOM should include a list of basic categories Such categories are maintained in DB Hero as 5
    to help user create test BOM: CPU, HDD, ODD, an attribute of parts called “Classification.”
    Motherboard, LCD, etc. Parts for specific categories This attribute should be used for this function.
    are not required to be entered; these categories are
    used only as filters for the hardware parts list.
    TEST-1.4.2 The user can create a BOM for the hardware (DB 5
    Hero HW parts) and Firmware (ePic eng. parts) in a
    test system. User can browse parts by series or
    description.
    TEST-1.4.3 The user should be able to define addition parts on a Sometimes users must substitute parts that are 5
    test system BOM template that are not included in not on the DB Hero BOM in the test system.
    DB Hero part lists. User defined parts will only be User defined HW parts would use the same
    available for test system management. User defined attributes as DB Hero HW parts.
    parts will use the same categories as normal DB This function will also be used for special
    Hero parts. items which must appear on the RTM report,
    like firmware versions.
    TEST-1.4.4 User can use parts from more than one series on a Appropriate parts may not be available so user 5
    test system BOM. should be able to use any part in test systems.
    TEST-1.4.5 When a defect is related to a test system, the test 5
    system BOM template and other data is
    automatically snapshotted. The snapshot must be
    related to the defect.
    TEST-1.4.6 DMI settings for each test system must be stored in This data is included on RTM report. This 4
    ePic. The user can enter the values for a set of keys. data is output from the SXSYSINF tool
    The keys required are “Manufacturer,” “Model maintained by System Engineering. Keys
    Name,” “BIOS Lock ID,” “MCode (Un-encrypted),” must be kept in sync with the development of
    “MCode Tool Version (CDS Models Only),” “BIOS this tool.
    Information,” “Universal Information.” Keys should
    be configurable (no admin screen necessary).
    TEST-1.4.7 User can associate a test BOM or SKU BOM with a 4
    test system. This BOM will be used to image the
    system.
    TEST-1.5 Test Case Management. 3
    TEST-1.5.1 Test Cases can be associated with a series or 3
    engineering part/major version combo. An
    association is not required.
    TEST-1.5.1.1 A Test Case result (Pass/Fail/Impeded/Not Tested) 3
    can be stored for each combination of series and part
    release. Results are not stored unless the test case is
    added to a test strategy (default is “Not Tested”). A
    text note and timestamp must be stored for each
    result entered in the system. User should be able to
    retrieve the Test Case result history for a test case for
    a given Test Strategy or Release.
    TEST-1.5.1.2 Test cases have the following categories: 3
    Basic, Ad-hoc, Use Case, Compatibility, FIV,
    Benchmarks, MDA, Screen Shot Capture,
    Accessory, Business Unit, and Other. Some
    categories have special requirements. See
    description of categories in section 9.11.5.1.
    TEST-1.5.1.2.1 Benchmark and MDA Tests results include admin 3
    defined category/key sets. Category, Key, and the
    Value stored are all text fields. Categories should
    have names and long descriptions.
    TEST-1.5.1.2.2 Only users with admin privileges can define key These keys change regularly but infrequently. 3
    names to be used for Benchmark and MDA testing. An admin screen (not config file) is required
    for this function.
    TEST-1.5.1.2.3 Screen Shot Capture tests can have an image file This is a special test case used for the RTM 3
    (.JPG, .PNG, or .BMP) attached to it. report.
    TEST-1.5.1.2.4 Compatibility Tests can have a list of required parts 3
    attached to them. This is a text field filled out
    manually.
    TEST-1.5.1.3 For all test cases “Level” can be set. Levels can be 1, This attribute is used in Test Strategy 3
    2, 3, or “Sampling/Sanity Check” (see section 10.4.8, generation functions (see below).
    TST-13).
    TEST-1.5.1.4 Test Case data for a single test case can be exported Per VOE review, 2005-11-10. 3
    to an Excel spreadsheet.
    TEST-1.6 Users can define named Test Case Groups. Functionality is similar but not identical to 3
    groups used in software BOM creation.
    TEST-1.6.1 Test Case Groups can be public or private. Private 3
    groups are visible only to the user that created the
    group.
    TEST-1.6.2 Test Case Groups can be assigned to the same 3
    entities as Test Cases. Such assignments are used as
    defaults when a user creates a new test within a
    group.
    TEST-1.7 Test Strategy Management. 3
    TEST-1.7.1 Each series defined in the system will have a test 3
    strategy associated with it by default. A series test
    strategy is a list of test cases and/or defect
    regressions to be executed against the latest series
    software BOM snapshot for that series.
    TEST-1.7.2 User can create and ad-hoc named test strategy to 3
    facilitate pre-integration testing. This test strategy
    can be associated with exactly one engineering
    part/major version.
    TEST-1.7.3 Test cases and defect regressions can belong to more 3
    than one test strategy. Test case can be added to a
    strategy only once (no duplicates allowed).
    TEST-1.7.4 Test strategy auto-update and editing: Test strategies Only project test leads can perform these 4
    are partially auto-updated when a Project Test Lead activities.
    accesses the test strategy for a given
    Series/LangRegion combination.
    TEST-1.7.4.1 For series test strategies, if a new series software 4
    BOM snapshot has been changed or if the status of
    the snapshot has been changed to Release Candidate
    (RC), the system will auto-update the test strategy for
    any releases or that have changed since the last time
    the test strategy was generated. Release for
    composite parts will be recursively processed
    (system will examine the BOMs for each composite
    part, including FIs).
    TEST-1.7.4.2 For ad-hoc test strategies the system will examine the 4
    associated engineering part. Composite parts will be
    recursively processed.
    TEST-1.7.4.3 Auto-update of test strategies is performed only for 4
    the selected LangRegion.
    TEST-1.7.4.4 1st build (release) test strategy auto-update: 4
    Triggered for the first release checked-in for the first
    major version of an engineering part.
    TEST-1.7.4.4.1 Level 1 and 2 test cases associated with the 4
    series/part and Level 1 and 2 test cases with no
    associations are added to the test strategy.
    TEST-1.7.4.4.2 User can manually add level 3 test cases and test case 4
    groups. User can remove any auto-added test cases.
    TEST-1.7.4.5 Minor revision test strategy auto-update: Triggered 4
    for any new releases/defaults which are not the first
    release. Test cases are updated as follows:
    TEST-1.7.4.5.1 Defect regressions are added to the test strategy: 4
    Defects with resolution “Fixed” which are associated
    with the current engineering part/major version or
    any of its releases are added to the test strategy as
    “defect regressions.” There are no test cases
    associated with defect regressions (though there may
    be test cases associated with the defect itself, they are
    not used here).
    TEST-1.7.4.5.2 System adds test cases for any open defects against If defects matching the criteria do not have 4
    the current engineering part/major version with associated test cases then they are ignored by
    Priority of “Must Fix” or “Should fix.” Test cases the system.
    for open defects with Priority equal to “None” and
    Severity equal to “1” are also added to the test
    strategy.
    TEST-1.7.4.6 Major Revision test strategy auto-update: Triggered 4
    for the first release checked in against a major
    version that is not the first major version.
    TEST-1.7.4.6.1 Defect regressions are added to the test strategy: 4
    Defects with resolution “Fixed” which are associated
    with the previous engineering part/major version or
    any of its releases are added to the test strategy as
    “defect regressions.” There are no test cases
    associated with defect regressions (though there may
    be test cases associated with the defect itself, they are
    not used here).
    TEST-1.7.4.6.2 System adds test cases for any open defects against If defects matching the criteria do not have 4
    the previous engineering part/major version with associated test cases then they are ignored by
    Priority of “Must Fix” or “Should fix.” Test cases the system.
    for open defects with Priority equal to “None” and
    Severity equal to “1” are also added to the test
    strategy.
    TEST-1.7.4.7 Final build test strategy auto-update: Triggered 4
    whenever the latest series software BOM snapshot
    has been flagged as a Release Candidate (does not
    apply to ad-hoc test strategies).
    TEST-1.7.4.7.1 System adds Compatibility, FIV, and Screen Shot If a new snapshot has been generated and them 4
    Capture Test Cases to the test strategy. flagged as an RC before the test strategy has
    been auto-updated, the system should also run
    the appropriate auto-update tasks.
    TEST-1.7.4.8 User can re-initiate test strategy auto-update 4
    manually at any time.
    TEST-1.7.4.9 When an auto-update executes, system should For example, using color coding. 4
    display changes (test case adds, deletes, and status
    changes) to the user visually.
    TEST-1.7.5 User can select a part on the test strategy and view all 3
    open defects.
    TEST-1.7.5.1 User can add test cases associated with open defects 3
    to the test strategy.
    TEST-1.7.5.2 User can add the defect as a defect regression 3
    (implies changing status to “closed” and resolution to
    “fixed”).
    TEST-1.7.6 User can add/delete any test case or test group from a 3
    test strategy (even if the test case was added as part
    of an auto-update action).
    TEST-1.7.6.1 If a level 1 or regression test case is deleted, a Only one warning should be displayed for 3
    warning/confirmation dialog is displayed to the user. multiple selections.
    TEST-1.7.6.2 A note indicating that level 1 or regression test cases 3
    were deleted from a test strategy, and who deleted it
    when, should be added to the history log.
    TEST-1.7.7 System should invalidate (set to “pending”) any test This will only be done for Series Test 4
    case result for parts if a new release for a part on Strategies, not Ad-Hoc ones.
    which they depend (based on dependencies defined
    in ePic) has been checked in. The invalidated test
    cases should be indicated (highlighted) for the user
    on screen. Results of the previous test case result
    should be retained by the system for reference.
    TEST-1.7.8 Leads can assign Test Cases on a Test Strategy to 3
    individual testers.
    TEST-1.7.9 User can attach one or more test BOMs created using A test BOM can be extracted from the system 4
    the function described in section 9.4.1, requirement via interface and used by installation tools to
    BOM-1.9. prepare a test system.
    TEST-1.7.10 User can attach one or more SKUs to the test strategy The BOM associated with the SKU can be 5
    which have been created using the function described extracted from the system via interface and
    in section 9.6.1, requirement INT-1.12. used by installation tools to prepare a test
    system.
    TEST-1.7.11 When a tester accesses a test strategy, the system will 3
    display test cases/defect regressions assigned to that
    user, and any test cases/defect regressions not
    assigned to any user. Tester can update the result of
    each test case and the status/resolution or each defect
    displayed.
    TEST-1.7.12 Test must select the Test System used before any test 5
    results can be changed.
    TEST-1.7.13 System must provide a view of a test strategies by See RPT-21. 4
    active series which displays the percentage of test
    cases completed.
    TEST-1.8 System must provide function to escalate defect to This requires an interface to the VELSUN 5
    VELSUN (global sustaining system). system maintained by SDNA.
    TEST-1.9 System must provide function to push defect to This requires an interface to the VALSUN 5
    VALSUN (software defect system used by system maintained by SDNA.
    SDNA/VBD).
    TEST-1.10 Reports currently provided by VSMS for CISC must 4
    be available in ePic.
    TEST-1.11 All notes/text area fields should provide advanced 5
    editing functionality.
    TEST-1.11.1 Spell checker functionality should be available. 5
    TEST-1.11.2 Formatting functionality as follows: 5
    Bullets
    Numbered lists
    Color text
    Font selection
    TEST-1.11.3 Formatting applied in edit screens should be 5
    maintained for reports.
    TEST-1.12 Benchmark/MDA Field editor. User can define 3
    delete keys used for Benchmark/MDA test case
    categories. Only users with admin privileges can use
    this function.
  • 9.11.2 User Interface Requirements
  • ID Description Comments Priority
    TEST-2.1 User interfaces for viewing test cases/strategies should 3
    provide efficient means for updating data.
    TEST-2.1.1 List of test cases and defect regressions should be 3
    displayed in upper right panel. Test cases can be
    marked as pass/fail and defect resolution can be
    changed in this panel without opening other windows,
    only scrolling and clicking.
    TEST-2.1.2 Facilitating for updating multiple test cases should be For example, check boxes for selecting test 3
    provided. cases and action buttons that apply attribute
    changes to all select test cases.
    TEST-2.1.3 Details of each selected test case should be displayed in 3
    lower right panel.
    TEST-2.1.4 Test cases marked as “failed” should trigger a prompt 3
    for entering a defect. Defects created in this manner
    will be automatically linked to the appropriate test case.
    TEST-2.2 Defects can be entered directly from the main 3
    menu/navigation panel or can be entered when a test
    case has been marked as failed. If a defect is entered in
    connection with a test case the defect.
    TEST-2.3 Installation tools and recovery images can be Same as requirement DEV-2.2 since these 1
    downloaded from ePic manually by UI. items will be defined as engineering parts in
    ePic.
  • 9.11.3 Business Rules
  • ID Description Comments Priority
    TEST-3.1
  • 9.11.4 Interface Requirements
  • ID Description Comments Priority
    TEST-4.1 VELSUN Interface. Used to escalate defects to global Satisfies US sustaining requirements. 5
    sustaining group.
    TEST-4.2 VALSUN Interface. Used to push defects into software 5
    development defect database used in VBD/SDNA
    TEST-4.4 Tools interface. Tools will provide functions for Assumption is that testers will perform all test 4
    selecting test BOMs and SKU BOMs to be provided to case/defect updating and test BOM
    installation tools. preparation via ePic UI.
    TEST-4.4.1 Data to be exported: These requirements can be merged with build 4
    Active Series Master tool requirements since the same tools
    LangRegion Master platform will be used to interface to ePic.
    Test BOMs
    SKU BOMs
    All DB Hero Data for Component Selector
    TEST-4.4.2 Functions to be provided: Some functions defined in requirements INT- 4
    Authenticate. 4.5 and INT-4.6 will be used and are
    Get Active Series. duplicated here.
    Get open defects for engineering part (used during Test BOMs contain software release ID's and
    release check-in). thus don't require an installation data file.
    Update defect status and resolution (used during SKU BOMs are DB Hero component lists and
    release check-in). will require an Installation Data File.
    Get Test Strategy for series/part.
    Get Test BOMs for test strategy.
    Get SKU BOMs for test strategy.
    Get Installation Data File for series.
    Get Binary Data for SW Release ID (from file
    store).
    Functions to allow the component selector function
    to be used remotely with tools to create and save
    SKU BOMs.
  • 9.11.5 Definitions 9.11.5.1 Test Case Types
  • Name Description
    Basic
    Ad-hoc
    Use Case Describes a regular user scenario.
    Compatibility List of steps to test compatibility with external
    devices (e.g., printer or camera).
    FIV (Final
    Image Validation)
    Benchmarks Performance parameters captured as key/value pairs.
    MDA (Microsoft Performance parameters dictated by Microsoft
    Development captured as key/value pairs.
    Agreement)
    Screen Shot Capture Special test case consisting of just an image, which
    is included on the RTM report.
    Business Unit
    Accessory
    Other
  • 9.11.6 Screen Shot Mock-ups
  • FIGS. 12-17 show various non-limiting screen shots for defect submission, defect update, test case submit form, defect view, test results, and test case update, respectively.
  • Reporting and Notification 9.12.1 General Requirements
  • ID Description Comments Priority
    RPTREQ-1 System must provide a custom reporting engine which 3
    will allow custom SQL to be stored and run.
    RPTREQ-2 Reports can be viewed on screen or downloaded in the XML is not required for software integration 3
    following file formats: and factory deployment reports, because the
    Adobe Acrobat (PDF) installation data file contains all required
    Microsoft Excel information in a single XML file.
    Comma Separated Values (CSV) MS Word format is required for the RTM
    XML (Test/Defect Reports only except for RTM) report. If Word format files cannot be
    Microsoft Word (RTM Report Only) generated then a format that can be imported
    into MS word is acceptable as a substitute.
    RPTREQ-3 Some complex reports are configurable by the user. Details are specified in report descriptions. 3
    Which data sets to be included and criteria for the
    report data can be specified before the report is
    generated.
  • 9.12.2 Reports
  • The following predefined reports must be provided by ePic. Samples can be found in the appendix (chapter 13.3)
  • ID Report Name Description Comments Priority
    RPT-1 Series Report Report of all relevant information for a given Series 2
    (SW BOM and Metadata).
    RPT-2 Series BOM Report of all relevant SW BOM information for a 2
    Report given Series.
    RPT-3 Series Metadata Report of all relevant metadata for a given Series. 2
    Report
    ID was skipped (it is retained to avoid confusion).
    RPT-5 BOM Report Report of all relevant information for a given Part, Has Optional Data Choices: parts, 2
    Group or Release which has a BOM. dependencies, parents, children,
    releases.
    RPT-6 Module Release Report of all relevant information for a given Module Has Optional Data Choices: parts, 2
    Report Release including BOM and Metadata. dependencies, parents, children,
    releases.
    RPT-7 Group Report Report of all Parts and Releases in a given group. Has Optional Data Choices: parts, 2
    dependencies, parents, children,
    releases.
    RPT-8 Image BOM Report of all Parts and Releases in a given Image Has Optional Data Choices: parts, 2
    Report BOM. dependencies, parents, children,
    releases.
    RPT-9 BOM Freeze Report of all relevant information for a given Series Previous report is an optional drop 2
    Report BOM - which includes a report of new items, updated down menu of ALL available
    items, missing items, removed items (from previous Series BOM Snapshot revisions
    report). (this means you could compare
    two different Series). The user
    would be required to select a
    BOM Snapshot to do the report for
    and then a BOM Snapshot to
    compare it to. If no comparison
    BOM Snapshot is provided it
    simply creates the report.
    RPT-10 Media Set Report of all Components, Parts and Releases used in a Factory Media Report would 2
    Report given factory or recovery media set. include Metadata for Factory.
    RPT-11 Part Report Report of all relevant information for a given Part. Has Optional Data Choices: part 2
    releases, dependencies, parents,
    children.
    RPT-12 Part Release List of all Releases by major part with basic attribute Has Optional Data Choices: 2
    Report information. dependencies, parents, children.
    RPT-13 Part Release Report of all relevant information for a given Part Has Optional Data Choices: 2
    Version Report Release Version. dependencies, parents, children.
    RPT-14 RTM Report This is a multi-part report containing test system Test/Defect report. 3
    information, detailed SW BOM information, defects,
    test cases/results, and other items.
    User must select a Series/LangRegion and one or more
    OSs from the report. User must also select which sub-
    reports to include. The system will then extract all
    required information from the relevant test strategy and
    BOMs and format it.
    The report must be output in MS Word (or compatible
    format) since it must be edited further after being
    generated from ePic.
    See sample in appendix (13.3.14) for more details.
    RPT-15 Test Status for This Report should list ‘Unresolved Defects’ and ‘Test Test/Defect report. 2
    Series Cases’ that needs to be executed for a particular Series.
    User can specify where test cases, defects or both are
    to be included in the report.
    Unresolved Defects: Defects with ‘Defect Status’
    equal to Open and ‘Defect Resolution’ not equal to
    ‘Fixed’, ‘Deferred’, ‘Will not Fix’, ‘Duplicate.’
    Defect Attributes to include in the report: Defect ID,
    Part, Summary, Severity, Exposure, Defect Resolution
    (sorted by Priority).
    Test Cases that need to be executed: List of test cases
    with ‘Test Results’ equal to ‘Not Tested’ or ‘Impeded.’
    RPT-16 Test Status for Same as above for all active series. Sorted by Series. Test/Defect report. 2
    all Active Series
    RPT-17 Defect report Displays all available attributes for a defect. User can Test/Defect report. 2
    for Individual optionally request that defect history be included in the
    Defect report.
    RPT-18 Defects by user, This is a configurable report for Defect analysis. It is Test/Defect report. 3
    team, series, intended to be a way to export defect data for analysis
    cycle, etc. into external tools or for importing to other systems.
    Filtering fields for Defect: Defect ID, Defect Status,
    Defect Resolution, Responsible persons, Priority,
    Severity, Exposure, Champion, Defect Submitter,
    Submit Date, Close Date, Frequency, Assigned to,
    Microsoft Defect ID, Beta ID, Sustaining Status,
    Sustaining Priority, Days Open (less than or equal to
    given number), Series, Part.
    System will include all available defect attributes in
    one table/data structure.
    RPT-19 Test Case This report is similar to RTP-18 except it is for test Test/Defect report. 2
    Report cases.
    Filtering fields for Test Case: Test Case ID, Test Case
    Type, Test Results, Part, Series, Test Area, Status,
    Level, Submitter, Last Updated, Excluded Series,
    Submit Date, Linked Defects (to a particular test case).
    System will include all available test case attributes in
    one table/data structure.
    RPT-20 Test Strategy Listing of test cases on a test strategy. User can Test/Defect report. PQD would 2
    Report optionally request a view. like this report to function
    similarly to the view on
    http://platform.itd.sel.sony.com/
    (click on “test cases” on menu).
    RPT-21 Test Strategy A view of a test strategies by active series which 2
    Status Report displays the percentage of test cases completed.
    RPT-22 End-of-cycle This report contains summary information on various 3
    Defect Report defects for one or more series and/or time periods. It
    is to be used as a post-cycle analysis tool.
    User can select one or more Series/LangRegions. User
    can also select one or more cycles or date ranges (for
    product cycle, initial product cycle attribute of the
    series would be used). User can also select which sub-
    reports to include.
    Data is exportable as PDF or excel files (it is okay if
    more than one excel file is generated).
    The sub-reports are as follows:
    Defect Priority
    Defect Severity
    Defect Exposure
    Defect Resolution by Application Champion
    Defect Resolution by Module (recursive for FI
    BOM)
    Top Ten Deferred/Will Not Fix Defects.
    RPT-23 Build Count Table of Series, OS, FI build count, and Recovery Test/Defect report. Used for end- 2
    media build count. of-cycle accounting.
    User must select cycle, date range, or all active series.
    RPT-24 FI Test Case Test Case results for a cycle or date range by FI Test/Defect report. 2
    Report release.
    RPT-25 Module Test Test Case results for a cycle by Series SW BOM Test/Defect report. 2
    Case Report snapshot (test strategy).
  • 9.12.3 Notification 9.12.3.1 General Requirements
  • ID Description Comments Priority
    NOTE-1 Email notifications will not be tied to 4
    roles, but functions for adding sets of
    email addresses to a notification list by
    system role or group should be
    available. Any email address can be
    added to a notification list (not just
    system users).
    NOTE-2 When a new user is assigned a role in 4
    ePic system should present a list of
    events to the administrator for which
    notification is available. User will be
    added to the list for any events selected.
    NOTE-3 All notification lists can be edited 4
    manually in the system.
  • 9.12.3.2 Events
  • The following events will trigger email notification to users. On screen notifications are indicated elsewhere in this document.
  • ID Description Reference Comment
    EVENT-1 Email notification is issued when a release check-in is DEV-1.2.8
    completed (files have been uploaded to file store).
    EVENT-1.1 Email notification lists should be stored for each This requirement will satisfy the
    Engineering Part Type (editable via admin screen). need to monitor image builds
    (Pilot, RC, GM events).
    EVENT-2 RTM email notification requirements. RTM emails MFG-1.2.2,
    should be sent when “Test RTMs,” “RTMs,” and MFG-1.3.2
    “running change RTMs” are issued in the system.
    EVENT-2.1 Email lists should be maintained by series.
    EVENT-2.2 Emails should clearly indicate which event for which the
    email is being sent.
    EVENT-2.3 Each email notification should contain a unique identifier
    in the subject line and body of the message that can be
    used to refer to the message. RTM email notifications
    should be logged in a history log that can be viewed via
    ePic UI.
    EVENT-2.4 Email content should also be attached as a PDF
    document to the email message (to be used as official
    documentation).
    EVENT-3 Series SW BOM snapshot created. Changes since the Notification of changes to the
    last snapshot (per MFG-1.3.2) should be included in the Series SW BOM (module/image
    notification. insertions).
    EVENT-3.1 Email lists are maintained by Series.
    EVENT-4 Series Software BOM snapshot flagged as release This is a “BOM Freeze”.
    candidate.
    EVENT-4.1 Email lists are maintained by Series.
    EVENT-5 Defect submission or defect status/resolution change.
    Defect monitoring is performed by engineering part.
    Users can also choose to receive all.
    EVENT-5.1 Application champion and any users on the owner list for If a user wants to monitor a
    the affected engineering part should be automatically specific part they must be added
    added to the notification list. Any owners of a test case to the owner list.
    associated with the part must also
    be notified.
    EVENT-5.2 Users can also subscribe to receive defects events by
    Series and/or LangRegion.
    EVENT-6 New series loaded in ePic from DB Hero.
  • 9.13 Administration 9.13.1 Usage Requirements
  • ID Description Comments Priority
    ADM-1.1 Add/edit user. 1
    ADM-1.1.1 User is required to be associated with an engineering 1
    organization.
    ADM-1.1.2 User can be assigned one or more roles. 1
    ADM-1.1.3 Users email address must be stored by system. 1
    ADM-1.2 Add/edit engineering organization. 1
    ADM-1.2.1 Engineering organizations can be Sony or 3rd party. 1
    ADM-1.3 Manage 3rd party data access. 3
    ADM-1.3.1 One or more series can be assigned to a 3rd party 3
    organization. The 3rd party organization users will only
    be able to see/download data concerning the series'
    which have been assigned to them.
    ADM-1.4 Add/edit LangRegion's. 1
    ADM-1.4.1 User can add/remove LangRegions to/from the master. 1
    ADM-1.4.2 DB Hero SPECS are mapped to corresponding This requirement can be dropped if 1
    LangRegions defined in the system. LangRegion relationship to DB Hero SPECS
    and COMPONENTS can be identified
    programmatically.
    ADM-1.5 System will provide functionality to make batch This is an admin function only. Users must 2
    changes to attributes entities. User can search for change items one by one.
    entities, select groups of items to change, and change
    one or more attributes for all items in the group.
    ADM-1.6 System should provide a function for defining teams of Some test/defect functions call for assignment 2
    users. to a team.
    The group management functionality
    implemented in ePic prototypes may satisfy
    this requirement.
    ADM-1.7 Admin functions for defining values for Test Area 2
    (10.4.9, TST-006) and Status (10.4.9, TST-013) should
    be available.
  • 9.13.2 User Interface Requirements
  • ID Description Comments Priority
    ADM-2.1
  • 9.13.3 Business Rules
  • ID Description Comments Priority
    ADM-3.1
  • 9.13.4 Interface Requirements
  • ID Description Comments Priority
    ADM-4.1

    9.14 ePic Interface Library
    This section describes requirements for the ePic database interface library API for Build Tools and Test System Preparation Tools. Some interface requirements and tools requirements in other sections of this document are satisfied in whole or in part by this API.
    VOA tools covered are Magellan and Modular Image Network Download System (MINDS).
    All VOA build tools use ePic data, but most of the tools use flat files created by Magellan, as the source of data. Build tools also check in software releases and images and thus need to be able to write data to the ePic database and upload files to the file store.
    VOA test system preparation is performed using MINDS tools. These tools are provided on a WinPE CD. This toolset will be made available to ePic users.
    SDNA will use VOA provided build tools.
    9.14.1 ePic Database Interface Requirements
    The ePic database interface should provide the following functions. When a “Recordset” is specified as return value, all applicable attributes for the entity should be included in the Recordset.
  • ID Function Parameters Return value Comments Used By Priority
    DLL-1 Authenticate User UserID Authenticate user. The Magellan, 2
    Password SecurityToken security token should be MINDS
    Action (optional) passed on to all other
    functions. All other
    functions can then check
    for a valid security token
    before getting data.
    DLL-2 GetImageBOMData SecurityToken Recordset This function should Magellan 1
    BOM Snapshot ID return all items on the
    isBasePlus (optional) specific Image BOM
    isOPK (optional) that meet the criteria
    isRecoverable (optional) set by the optional
    arguments. If an
    optional argument is not
    passed to the function,
    that criteria should be
    ignored
    DLL-3 GetModulesEPCs SecurityToken Recordset This function should Magellan 1
    Series ID return all modules and
    LangRegion EPCs for the specified
    isPermanent (optional) Series/LangRegion. If
    Permanent argument is
    True, return all permanent
    items. If it is False, return
    all temporary items. If it is
    not specified return all
    items.
    DLL-4 GetSeries SecurityToken Recordset This function should Magellan, 1
    return all active series. MINDS
    DLL-5 GetLangRegions SecurityToken Recordset This function should Magellan, 1
    return all available MINDS
    LangRegion values.
    DLL-6 GetBOMList SecurityToken Recordset This function should Magellan, 1
    Series ID return a list of available MINDS
    LangRegion Image BOM
    isImageBOM (optional) Snapshots/Module BOM
    isModuleBOM (optional) Snapshots/All BOM
    Snapshots (depending on
    optional arguments) for
    given Series/LangRegion.
    DLL-7 GetBOM SecurityToken Recordset This function should Magellan, 1
    BOM Snapshot ID return the BOM contents MINDS
    (parts release list) for
    selected BOM Snapshot
    ID.
    DLL-8 UploadFiles SecurityToken Boolean This function should Magellan, 1
    Part Release ID upload Part Release files MINDS
    Files to be uploaded. to the ePic file store. One
    function call should
    upload all the required
    files. We do not want to
    call this function for
    each file. This function
    must be called after
    CheckInPart Release. It
    may be called minutes or
    hours after
    CheckInPartReleasefor
    modules (because
    modules require release
    ID to be embedded in the
    module).
    DLL-9 CheckInPartRelease SecurityToken Part Release ID This function should add Magellan 1
    All Part Release data for a new Part Release to the
    this Part Type. ePic database.
    DLL-10 UpdatePartRelease SecurityToken Boolean This function should Magellan 1
    Part Release ID. update Part Release
    All other Part Release record. This function is
    data for this Part Type. required as some part
    releases may be created
    using ePic and then
    updated from Magellan
    DLL-11 GetSeriesForPart SecurityToken Recordset This function should Magellan 2
    Part ID return a list of Series that
    have this Part on their
    BOM Templates.
    DLL-12 AddPartReleaseToSeries SecurityToken Boolean This function should Magellan 2
    Part Release ID assign the specified Part
    Series IDs Release to one or more
    Series.
    DLL-13 GetDefectsForPart SecurityToken Recordset This function should Magellan 2
    Part ID return a list of defects that
    Status (optional) are currently assigned to
    this Part. Optionally result
    set can be filtered by
    defect status.
    DLL-14 UpdateDefects SecurityToken This function should Magellan 2
    Part Release ID update the defect status of
    Defect IDs specified defects. This
    New Defect Statuses allows the user to specify
    New Defect Resolutions what defects have been
    New Defect Notes fixed in this Release
    DLL-15 GetReleaseEmailContents SecurityToken Text Get the email text. This is Magellan 2
    Part Release ID used to display the email
    notification to the user
    before it is actually sent
    out.
    Emails sent from
    Magellan will provide
    information on PAC Files,
    FI image, AppInfo and
    DataFile contents.
    DLL-16 SendMail SecurityToken Boolean Send email notification. Magellan 2
    Part Release ID The contents of the email
    CCText will be generated
    automatically like part
    releases checked in from
    ePic. Emails sent from
    Magellan will have a
    different target recipient
    list. User should be able
    to add additional
    recipients.
    DLL-17 LaunchComponentsSelector SecurityToken String/Recordset Launch Component MINDS 2
    Series ID Selector to allow user
    LangRegion is FreeStyle. to select a configuration,
    check for validity and
    returns valid selection of
    parts.
    This is used to create a
    SKU BOM in freestyle
    mode
    DLL-18 GetSKUBOMSnapshotList SecurityToken Recordset This function should MINDS 2
    Series ID return a list of avaiiable
    LangRegion SKU BOM snapshots for
    given Series/LangRegion
    DLL-19 GetSKUBOM SecurityToken Recordset This function should MINDS 2
    BOM Snapshot ID return the SKU BOM
    contents (parts list). It
    should also return the
    installation data file
    (either as XML or
    location from where it can
    be obtained).
    DLL-20 AddLog SecurityToken BOOL This function adds a MINDS 2
    MACAddress record to the log.
    IPAddress
    SessionID
    User
    Action PartReleaseName
    ReleaseID
    Size
    StartTimestamp
    EndTimestamp
    Time
    Mode
    DLL-21 GetLog SecurityToken Recordset This function should get MINDS 2
    LogID (optional) the specified log record.
    DLL-22 GetSystemTime SecurityToken String Get time on DB server; MINDS 2
    value used in AddLog.
    (This can be implemented
    within AddLog in which
    case this function is not
    required).
    DLL-23 IsHDDProject SecurityToken BOOL Check if Series uses HDD MINDS 2
    Series recovery
    LangRegion
  • 9.14.2 Technical Requirements
      • Database access for use in MINDS must be able to run in the stripped down version of Windows, Windows Preinstall Environment. (This generally means the code must be written in C++. It's possible to write the programs in Java, Python, Perl, etc., but this would need to be tested and set up within WinPE.)
      • The Database Interface Layer should support applications running in different environments and developed using different programming languages, as shown in the Appendix 1.3.1.
      • All functions in the epic Database Library should implement stateless security. For example, The Authenticate function should return a SecurityToken object that is then passed to other functions. These functions then check if the security token is valid before interacting with the database. Any other security mechanism can also be used.
    9.14.3 Architecture 9.14.3.1 VOA Tools
  • FIG. 18 shows the non-limiting architecture of VOA Tools.
  • 9.14.4 Usage Scenarios 9.14.4.1 MINDS Usage Scenarios
  • 9.14.4.1.1 Download Image to Test System from MINDS CD.
    FIG. 18A logic can be used by testers and by integrators.
  • 9.14.4.1.2 Upload Foundation Image.
  • FIG. 19 refers, which has been described above and which can be used by integrators.
  • 9.15 Sustaining
  • This section describes requirements for ePic from the Global Sustaining Group. These requirements will extend existing functionality.
  • 9.15.1 Usage Requirements
  • ID Description Comments Priority
    SUS-1.1 Sustaining modules will be managed in ePic. 5
    SUS-1.1.1 A new part type “Sustaining Module” must be added 5
    to ePic.
    SUS-1.1.2 Addition sustaining specific attributes must be 5
    supported.
    SUS-1.1.2.1 Sustaining ID (or SP-ID), separate from normal 5
    Part/Release ID must be maintained by ePic and
    returned when applicable by check-in functions.
    (ePic will manage this sequence.)
    SUS-1.1.3 Sustaining module release notifications will be sent 5
    to a different email notification list than for other
    modules.
    SUS-1.1.4 Sustaining modules must have a unique identifier This is similar functionality as other ePic 5
    embedded in them to support post-installation modules.
    verification by “VAIO Update” software.
    SUS-1.2 Sustaining users should be able to retrieve software 5
    BOM information from ePic UI.
    SUS-1.3 Support groups require a network installation system. Test System Preparation CD can be used for 5
    this purpose.
    SUS-1.4 Maintenance Desk requires Recovery Media 5
    (RDVD's/Fulfillment Media).
    SUS-1.5 Module Specification should be unified with This is so developers only need to create on 5
    Sustaining Patch specification. format.
    SUS-1.6 Software BOM views in ePic should also display any 5
    applicable sustaining patches.
    SUS-1.7 Search function should allow entry of a model name. 5
    SUS-1.8 Search functions should allow Series/LangRegions to 5
    which a particular sustaining patch has been applied
    to be to be found by Sustaining Part ID (SP-ID).
    SUS-1.9 User can use Part Name/Major Version as a search 5
    key to find Series/LangRegion or list of sustaining
    patches.
    SUS-1.10 Legacy data must be maintained in ePic for a time 5
    period suitable to sustaining.
  • 9.15.2 User Interface Requirements
  • ID Description Comments Priority
    SUS-2.1
  • 9.15.3 Business Rules
  • ID Description Comments Priority
    SUS-3.1
  • 9.15.4 Interface Requirements
  • ID Description Comments Priority
    SUS-4.1
  • 10 Data Model 10.1 Concepts
  • FIG. 20 shows the overall, non-limiting system architecture for Sony PC production. The figure gives an overview for an ePic related systems diagram.
  • 10.2 Data Structure
  • Moving to FIG. 21, the data structure and flow chart of ePic are shown.
  • 10.3 Database Entities
  • FIG. 22 illustrates a non-limiting ePic database entities diagram.
  • 10.4 Attributes 10.4.1 Series
  • ID Attribute Name Description Comments Intended Usage Examples Required Modifiable Basic Search Ext. Search
    SER-001 Series ID Auto-generated system identifier.
    SER-002 Series Name IRX or ATX number. IRX-3150, ATX-2230 Y N Y Y
    SER-003 Code Name Textual code name for the series. Diablo EPD Y N Y Y
    SER-004 Marketing Name There will be many (region May be mapped to a Selection criteria in VGN-S270, VGN- Y Y Y Y
    to region, cycle to cycle). series SW BOM and system screens reporting. S27, VGN-S270A,
    For Example: PCV-RS500 one or more LangRegions. VGC-RB30, VGC-RB30C
    Functionality depends
    on DB Hero handling of
    Marketing Model name.
    SER-005 On Sales Date One date for each Maintained Reporting. N Y N Y
    LangRegion. independently in ePic.
    May be useful for
    satisfying sustaining
    requirements.
    SER-006 Off Sales Date One date for each Maintained Reporting. N Y N Y
    LangRegion. independently in ePic.
    May be useful for
    satisfying sustaining
    requirements.
    SER-007 End of Life Yes/No. Defaults to no. Maintained Reporting. N Y N Y
    independently in ePic.
    May be useful for
    satisfying sustaining
    requirements.
    SER-008 Status Planning, active, archive, Maintained Reporting. Y Y Y Y
    obsolete, sustaining. independently in ePic. (req) (req)
    SER-009 Comments Long description of a Maintained Reporting. N Y N Y
    series. independently in ePic.
    SER-010 Created By Series should not be
    created manually - only
    imported from DB
    Hero. DB Hero
    “created by” is not
    necessary here.
    SER-011 Created Date
    SER-012 Active Yes/No Maintained Control display and Y Y Y Y
    independently in ePic. default series lists.
    SER-013 Planning List of planning cycles Reporting. 2005 Q3, 2005 Q4, Y Y Y Y
    Cycle/Season applicable for this series. 2006 Q1
    SER-014 Change Log History, system Maintained
    generated/maintained independently in ePic.
    SER-015 Production Site List of production sites for Maintained May be used for NFCH, UCCH, N Y N Y
    this series. independently in ePic. RTM and test-RTM DPCH, IT-M, SNT
    release status by
    production site to
    facilitate file store
    functionality and
    reporting.
    SER-016 LangRegions List of LangRegions to be Maintained Used to filter the list en_US, en_UK, N Y Y Y
    Supported supported by this engineering independently in ePic. of LangRegions on jp_JP, etc.
    part. screens and for
    reporting.
  • 10.4.2 Components
  • Intended Basic Ext.
    ID Attribute Name Description Comments Usage Examples Required Modifiable Search Search
    COM-001 Component ID Y Y
    COM-002 Component Name Y Y
    COM-003 Active Yes/No Y Y
    Components are Y Y
    unique per series so
    this is really a series
    attribute.
    COM-005 Type N Y
    Components are N Y
    system generated in
    DB Hero. There is
    no comments field.
    COM-007 Child Parts List N Y
    COM-008 List of Specs Spec-to-Component N Y
    relationship may be needed
    for ePic functionality.
  • 10.4.3 Planning (DB Hero) Parts
  • Intended Basic Ext.
    ID Attribute Name Description Comments Usage Examples Required Modifiable Search Search
    PP-001 Part Name Y Y
    PP-002 Part ID DB Hero Part Y Y
    Number (not
    vendor part
    number).
    PP-003 Active Yes/No Y Y
    (req)
    PP-004 SW/HW Flag Y Y
    PP-005 Major Version Assumption is that it Y Y
    will be separated
    from description in
    DR Hero fro SW
    items.
    PP-006 Vendor Y Y
  • 10.4.4 Engineering Parts
  • ID Attribute Name Description Comments Intended Usage Examples Required Modifiable Basic Search Ext. Search
    EP-001 Part Name This is only application Can be added to a Adobe Premiere, Y Y Y Y
    name with no version information. group. Sonic Stage Studio,
    Radeon 7500 Driver
    EP-002 Parent Planning Part Relation Used to facilitate Index to DB Hero N Y Y Y
    Series SW BOM
    creation.
    EP-003 Active Yes/No Used to control flag (0 or 1) Y Y Y Y
    display of parts to (req) (req)
    users. Only active
    parts should be
    shown in most
    screens. Inactive
    part releases can be
    archived from file
    store.
    EP-004 Major Version Major version number New major Can be added to a 1.1, 2.4, 6.0, 7.0, Y Y Y Y
    (For Example: 1.1, 1.2, versions are group. 4.2.00.06070(Not
    1.3). created when for LA)
    specifications
    change - not
    when defects
    are fixed or
    minor changes
    are made.
    EP-005 Part Type Image, OS Setup, See below. Lookup List Y N Y Y
    Installable Application, including: Image,
    Internal Tools, OS Setup,
    BIOS/Firmware, Media Installable
    Set, Other Application,
    Internal Tools,
    BIOS/Firmware,
    Media Set, Other
    EP-006 Part Sub Type Image (Foundation, P1, See below. Lookup List Y N Y Y
    Monolithic Image)/ including: Image
    Installable Application (Foundation, P1,
    (Application, Driver, Monolithic Image)/
    Online Documents, OS Installable
    Add-on, Module)/Media Application
    Set (Recovery, Factory) (Application,
    Driver, Online Documents, OS
    Add-on, Module)/Media Set
    (Recovery, Factory)
    EP-007 Dependency Append Textual description of a Information for Text field: IE can N Y N Y
    dependency that is not builders. only be installed on
    enforced by the system. Tuesday.
    EP-008 Dependency List of parts with “Don't Used to Relation to another N Y N Y
    care,” “Need,” or validate/complete engineering part
    “Exclude” specified for release lists for index.
    each part. System can testers and during
    enforce/interpret these BOM creation.
    dependencies.
    EP-009 Install Order List of parts with “Don't Used by installation Relation to another N Y N Y
    care,” “Before,” or tools to control engineering part
    “After” specified for each order of release index.
    part. install.
    EP-010 Customer Label Used in Single Displayed to Adobe Premiere Y (for Y N Y
    Application Recovery. customer during Standard for recoverable
    Text for each application Windows XP applications
    LangRegion. recovery. English, nVidia only)
    Graphics Driver,
    DVGate 2.0
    EP-011 Customer Desc Marketing Desc/Hover Displayed to Instant Video Y (for Y N Y
    text used in Single customer during Everywhere: Sign recoverable
    Application Recovery. application up for IP Video applications
    Text for each recovery. Conferencing. only)
    LangRegion.
    EP-012 BLID Used for Foundation Assigned Used during UCV156PEUM Y (for FI Y Y N
    Image sub type only. manually installation of only)
    BLID = BIOS Lock ID. currently. releases. Stored in
    Uniquely DMI.
    identifies
    foundation
    image in VOA.
    One FI can
    have multiple
    BLIDs in
    VBD/VOE.
    EP-013 Is Default Yes/no (default for each Actual Creating Snapshots flag (0 or 1) Y Y N Y
    Part Name, Major implementation of BOM Templates
    Version, Release, per the data (Groups).
    LangRegion model provided
    combination). Defaults by Neusoft.
    to false.
    EP-014 Champion Person responsible for Relation to a user N Y N Y
    testing info. One or more index.
    persons can be listed.
    EP-015 Owner Contact Relation to a user Y Y N Y
    Persons/Developer. One index
    or more persons can be
    listed.
    EP-016 Localized By Eng. Organization which For information text field: VOE, N Y N Y
    localized the part. only. Not used by SDNA, VOA, STC,
    Manually maintained. system. VBD
    EP-017 Target Series List that describes BOM IRX-3440, IRX- N Y N Y
    template(this part needs 3760, ATX-7100
    to go on these series).
    Specified by developers,
    integrators. Used to
    generate series s/w bom.
    EP-018 Series Dependency Text description for For information Text description for N Y N Y
    information, if any. only. May be used information, if any.
    by builders/testers.
    EP-019 Supported LangRegions List of LangRegions to be Unsupported Relatuion to N Y N Y
    supported by this part. LangRegions should Language Region
    not be shown to indexes: ENU-US,
    users in other ENU-UK, SPA-LA,
    screens/functions. etc.
    EP-020 Localized Variation Yes/No - enables UI control. flag (0 or 1) N Y Y Y
    functionality for defining
    Planned Localized
    Variations.
    EP-021 Planned Localized A named group of Alternate way to Look up table to N Y N Y
    Variation LangRegions. The name select multiple LangRegionGroups
    of variation is manually LangRegions for
    specified and can be screen functions.
    anything. For example: Releases are
    “EN-NTSC” -> en_US, associate with
    en_UK; “EN-PAL”-> LangRegions and
    en_DE not Planned Release
    Variations.
    EP-022 Change Log History, system All changes History, system
    generated/maintained. should be generated/maintained.
    logged with
    who and when.
    EP-023 OS XPP, XPH, MCE, XPP, XPH, MCE, Y Y N Y
    WinPE, etc. Only used WinPE, etc. Only
    when Part Type is Image. used when Part
    Type is Image.
    EP-024 EPC/Module/X- For Module sub-types Used in VSMS Used by builders Look up table: Y (for Y N Y
    Module only. Select one of these (VOA) to and installation EPC/Module/X- modules
    (mutually exclusive). describe a tools. Module. only)
    EPC = Engineering Module. May
    Process Change. change pending
    installation
    tool/recovery
    specification
    definition.
    EP-025 Is Temporary Specifies the part must be Inverse of VOA Used by installation flag (0 or 1) N Y N Y
    deleted from recovery “Is Permanent” tools.
    partition after installation attribute.
    in the factory. Defaults to
    false.
    EP-026 SpecificationFreezeSched One date for each For information Date field per N Y N Y
    Planned Localized only. In the future, LangRegionGroup
    Variation. will be used to specified above.
    trigger email
    notifications.
    EP-027 GUIFreezeSched One date for each For information Date field per N Y N Y
    Planned Localized only. In the future, LangRegionGroup
    Variation. will be used to specified above.
    trigger email
    notifications.
    EP-028 FeatureFreezeSched One date for each For information Date field per N Y N Y
    Planned Localized only. In the future, LangRegionGroup
    Variation. will be used to specified above.
    trigger email
    notifications.
    EP-029 RCRelaseSchedule One date for each For information Date field per N Y N Y
    Planned Localized only. In the future, LangRegionGroup
    Variation. will be used to specified above.
    trigger email
    notifications.
    EP-030 GMReleaseSched One date for each For information Date field per N Y N Y
    Planned Localized only. In the future, LangRegionGroup
    Variation. will be used to specified above.
    trigger email
    notifications.
    EP-031 GMReleaseActual One date for each For information Date field per N Y N Y
    Planned Localized only. In the future, LangRegionGroup
    Variation. will be used to specified above.
    trigger email
    notifications.
    EP-032 Default Installer INF, EXE/BATCH, FILE COPY Install Property: lookup table: INF, N (for major Y N Y
    Type (select from Defined in EXE/BATCH, FILE version)
    list). MajorVersion COPY
    as defaults,
    carried over to
    Release, can be
    modified at
    check-in.
    EP-033 Default Setup File Path to setup file relative Install Property: Used by build tools \setup.exe or N (for major Y N Y
    to top level folder of Defined in to find setup \DVGATE\config\setup. version)
    release. Text Field. MajorVersion executable. exe
    as defaults,
    carried over to
    Release, can be
    modified at
    check-in.
    EP-034 Default Command Arguments to be passed Install Property: Used by build tools /quiet/passive N (for major Y N Y
    Line Arguments to “Setup File”. Text Defined in when running setup /norestart -s version)
    Field. MajorVersion executable.
    as defaults,
    carried over to
    Release, can be
    modified at
    check-in.
    EP-035 Default OPK Yes/No: Set for each Install Property: Used by build tools. flag (0 or 1) Y (for major Y N Y
    Engineering Organization Defined in version)
    Major Version
    as defaults,
    carried over to
    Release, can be
    modified at
    check-in.
    EP-036 Default Base Plus Yes/No: Set for each Install Property: Used by build tools. flag (0 or 1) Y (for major Y N Y
    Engineering Organization Defined in version)
    MajorVersion
    as defaults,
    carried over to
    Release, can be
    modified at
    check-in.
    EP-037 Default Recoverable Yes/No: Set for each Install Property: Used by tools. flag (0 or 1) Y (for major Y N Y
    Engineering Organization Defined in version)
    MajorVersion
    as defaults,
    carried over to
    Release, can be
    modified at
    check-in.
    EP-038 Default Interactive Yes/No: user interaction Install Property: Used by build tools. flag (0 or 1) Y (for major Y N Y
    required? Defined in version)
    MajorVersion
    as defaults,
    carried over to
    Release, can be
    modified at
    check-in.
    EP-039 Vendor Vendor of the software. This is simply Relation to Vendor Y N Y Y
    an additional Index
    attribute. It
    should not be
    concatenated
    with part name.
    There should be
    a separate table
    with basic
    Vendor
    information.
    Vendor name
    may also be
    included in part
    name if it
    makes sense.
  • 10.4.4.1 Engineering Part Types
  • Type Sub-Type Description Special Requirements
    Image Image file(s)
    Foundation
    P1 WinPE image used for HDD Recovery Partition.
    Monolithic Image
    OS Setup OPK unattend setting, i386 folder. May include some OPK
    specific attributes.
    Installable Application Installed on customer partition.
    Application Application as delivered from vendor. May be repackaged.
    Driver
    Online Documents PDF Files and other documents installed on systems.
    OS Add-on QFE's, Patches
    Module Packaged application: non-interactive installation, secured, Can be X-module, module,
    ready for factory delivery. Usually includes an application or EPC.
    and some internal tools.
    Internal Tools Tools, DLL layer, P1 tools/files.
    BIOS/Firmware Firmware updates not recoverable by customer.
    Media Set Recovery Customer recovery media.
    Factory Media set for factory deployment.
    Other Catch all for other types of files. Can be anything, For
    Example “manual settings requests.”
      • Part types will have different system workflows.
      • Some types or sub-types may require additional attributes to be captured in the system.
      • Functionality for sub-types within a part type is mostly the same.
    10.4.4.2 LangRegion Table
  • The following table lists the LangRegions to be used initially.
  • Language LangRegion Description
    en en_US English for USA.
    en_GB English for UK and other EU.
    en_int English for Asia Pacific.
    de de_DE German for Germany, Austria, Switzerland.
    fr fr_FR French for France, Belgium, Switzerland.
    fr_CA French for Canada.
    ja ja_JP Japanese for Japan.
    ko ko_KR Korean for Korea.
    es es_ES Spanish for Spain.
    es_lat Spanish for Latin America.
    it it_IT Italian for Italy, Switzerland.
    nl nl_NL Dutch for the Netherlands, Belgium.
    zh cns_CN Simplified Chinese for China.
    zh cnt_TW Traditional Chinese for Taiwan.
    pt pt_PT Portuguese for Portugal.
    el el_GR Greek for Greece.
    ru ru_RU Russian for Russia.
  • REFERENCES
    • Language code (ISO-639)
    • http://ftp.ics.uci.edu/pub/ietf/http/related/iso639.txt
    • Region code (ISO-3166)
    • http://www.iso.org/iso/en/prods-services/iso3166ma/02iso-3166-code-lists/list-enl.html
    10.4.5 Software Releases
  • For the attributes listed as “required” in search columns, only one of the required fields must be specified by the user.
    Some attributes are duplicated between Engineering Part and Release: The attributes set for engineering part should be used as defaults when creating a new release. User can override values set for engineering part at the release level. This function is intended to reduce repetitive data entry due release check-in.
  • ID Attribute Name Description Comments Intended Usage Examples Required Modifiable Basic Search Ext. Search
    REL-001 Release ID Integer identifier (possibly SITID(VOA)/ESP # Y N Y Y
    with part type prefix). (VOE)/Software ID (ITC) (auto) (req) (req)
    System generated.
    REL-002 Detailed Version Full release version Can include the Major 4.0.4.00.25691 Y Y Y Y
    identifier. Text field. Version value. This is the (req) (req)
    same as BOM VAIO's
    “Developer Software
    Release Version” For
    Example: Major Version =
    1.4, Detailed Version =
    1.4.2 or 1.4.02.06070.
    REL-003 Release Name Concatenation of “Part For Example: Sonic Stage Reporting. Generated: Adobe Y N Y Y
    Name” + “Detailed 1.4.02.06070 Premiere Standard (auto) (req) (req)
    Version.” Not user 4.0.4.00.25691
    editable.
    REL-004 Target List of LangRegions to be Relation. Relation to one or N Y N Y
    LangRegions supported by this release. more LangRegions. (req)
    (en_US, en_GB, en_int, de_DE,
    fr_FR, fr_CA,, ja_JP, ko_KR,
    es_ES, es_lat, it_IT, nl_NL,
    cns_CN, cnt_TW, pt_PT,
    el_GR, ru_RU)
    REL-005 Release Notes A log of notes. Each notes User can add a note to a For Information Y Y N N
    can belong to one of the release. User specifies Only. Reporting.
    categories listed below. category of the note at data
    entry time and categories
    can be used to filter
    display.
    REL-006 Status ES/Test, FF, FF (Feature Freeze)/CF Sanity checks Lookup table: Y Y Y Y
    Pilot, CF, RC, GM (Code Freeze) = WHQL during BOM ES/Test, FF, (req) (req)
    candidate. snapshotting. Pilot, CF, RC, GM.
    Reporting.
    REL-007 Submitted By User who checked-in the Released By (VOE), Relation to user Y N Y Y
    release. Contact to Developer (ITC) index. (req) (req)
    REL-008 Next Release Text field which specifies For Information 4.0.4.00.25693A to N Y N N
    next expected release Only. Reporting. be released in late
    version and date. August 2007.
    REL-009 Virus Check Dropdown For Information TBD N Y N Y
    Only. Reporting. (req)
    REL-010 WHQL status No submission/under Sanity checks Lookup table: no N Y N Y
    submission/passed/not during BOM submission/under (req)
    applicable. snapshotting. submission/passed/
    Reporting. not applicable.
    REL-011 PlmStatus Dropdown N Y N Y
    (req)
    REL-012 Is Default Yes/No Snapshotting of flag (0 or 1) N Y N Y
    Release BOMs. (req)
    REL-013 Is Latest Release Yes/No Snapshotting of flag (0 or 1) N Y N Y
    BOMs. (req)
    REL-014 Version Path Registry or file path (text). May be changed as part of Used by current HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\ Y Y N N
    a project globalization of VOA installation SOFTWARE\
    installation tools. tools to verify Microsoft\Updates\
    installation of a Windows
    module. XP\SP3\KB901214\
    Description\
    REL-015 Version ID Version of file or reg key May be changed as part of Used by current Security Update for Y Y N N
    value(text). a project globalization of VOA installation Windows XP
    installation tools. tools to verify (KB901214)
    installation of a
    module.
    REL-016 Version check Text field. Describes For Information [How to identify N Y N N
    before required installer version Only. Reporting. this version]
    installation. for the given release. Before Installation
    Check Version.txt
    in installer
    REL-017 Version check Text field. Describes For Information [How to identify N Y N N
    after installation. another method to Only. Reporting. this version]After
    validation installation. Installation
    Check: Version.txt
    under C:\Program
    Files\Sony\SonicStage
    Mastering Studio
    including
    2.0.00.18220
    REL-018 Change Log System generated history: System generated
    who changed release when. history: who
    changed release
    when.
    REL-019 Installed Folder Text field describing path Some build tools \\us-sd-itd-san- Y N N N
    Path to installed files. may use this field. 1\swlibrary\isvrelease\
    0518002.SNC\
    REL-021 Installer Type INF, EXE/BATCH, FILE Install Property: Defined lookup table: INF, Y N Y Y
    (select from list) COPY in MajorVersion as EXE/BATCH, FILE (req) (req)
    defaults, carried over to COPY
    Release, can be modified at
    check-in.
    REL-022 Setup File Path to setup file relative to Install Property: Defined Used by build Setup.exe Y Y N N
    top level folder of release. in MajorVersion as tools to find setup (if
    Text Field. defaults, carried over to executable. files
    Release, can be modified at not
    check-in. uploaded)
    REL-023 Command Line Arguments to be passed to Install Property: Defined Used by build /quiet/passive N Y N N
    Arguments “Setup File”. Text Field. in MajorVersion as tools when /norestart -s
    defaults, carried over to running setup
    Release, can be modified at executable.
    check-in.
    REL-024 OPK Yes/No: Set for each Install Property: Defined Used by build flag (0 or 1) N Y N Y
    Engineering Organization in MajorVersion as tools. (req)
    defaults, carried over to
    Release, can be modified at
    check-in.
    REL-025 Base Plus Yes/No: Set for each Install Property: Defined Used by build flag (0 or 1) N Y N Y
    Engineering Organization. in MajorVersion as tools. (req)
    defaults, carried over to
    Release, can be modified at
    check-in.
    REL-026 Recoverable Yes/No: Set for each Install Property: Defined Used by tools. flag (0 or 1) N Y Y Y
    Engineering Organization. in MajorVersion as (req) (req)
    defaults, carried over to
    Release, can be modified at
    check-in.
    REL-027 Interactive Yes/No: user interaction Install Property: Defined Used by build flag (0 or 1) N Y N Y
    required? in MajorVersion as tools. (req)
    defaults, carried over to
    Release, can be modified at
    check-in.
    REL-028 Repackaged Yes/No: Means release has Install Property For Information flag (0 or 1) N Y N Y
    been modified from ISV Only. Reporting. (req)
    original release.
    REL-029 Snapshot ID Identifier of the BOM Relation. For Information Relation to N N N N
    snapshot which was used Only. Reporting. Snapshot Index
    for this release
    (componsite parts only).
    Dropped. System will use N Y N Y
    active/inactive status (req)
    instead.
  • 10.4.5.1 Release Notice Categories
  • Category Description
    By Champion
    By Builder
    Other Notes
    Description
    Technical Description
    New Features
    Notification E.g. “Same as 2005.2Q”
    Installation Steps Step by step description of a manual install.
    Uninstall Steps Step by step description of a manual uninstall
    process.C26
  • 10.4.6 Groups
  • ID Attribute Name Description Comments Intended Usage Examples Required Modifiable Basic Search Ext. Search
    GRP-001 Group Name Windows XP HE Y Y Y
    OS Parts
    GRP-002 Group ID Index ID Generated Index Y N Y
    GRP-003 Comments Text field: This Y Y Y
    group is for all (keyword
    Windows XP HE search)
    images built
    between 2002 and
    2006.
    GRP-004 Parts List Group Members Can be group, part name, Relation to a list of N Y Y (req)
    major version, release. indexes.
    GRP-005 Active Yes/No flag (0 or 1) Y Y Y (req)
    Dropped. Too
    Complicated.
    Dropped. Too
    Complicated.
    Dropped. Too
    Complicated.
    GRP-009 Target Engineering Organization One or more eng org, all eng org. This will be part of a Lookup Table(s) N Y Y
    “Define Target Criteria”
    function used throughout
    the system.
    GRP-010 Target Series List of one or more IRX-3370, ATX- N Y Y
    series for which this 7100
    group can only be
    used.
    GRP-011 Target OS Select a single OS or This will be part of a For filtering, Lookup Table N Y Y
    “All”. Default to all. “Define Target Criteria” reporting. Possibly
    function used throughout used for sanity
    the system. checks.
    GRP-012 Target LangRegions One or more LangRegions. Used to select the Lookup Table N Y Y
    correct release for
    BOM snapshots.
    GRP-013 Usage Intended usage for the group. For filtering and Text field: This N Y Y
    organizing groups. group is for all
    Windows XP HE
    images built
    between 2002 and
    2006, but only on
    Tuesdays.
  • 10.4.7 Snapshots (BOMs)
  • Intended Basic Ext.
    ID Attribute Name Description Comments Usage Examples Required Modifiable Search Search
    SNP-001 BOM ID Index field auto- Index field auto- Y N N Y
    generated. generated.
    SNP-002 Description Name & Revision (Series/FI/RDVD/ Horizon 3-HE Y Y N Y
    (IE: Horizon 3-HE Monolithic/Module/ Build01
    Build01) Factory Media)
    SNP-003 Time and Date Auto-Generated Auto-Generated:
    Stamp Aug. 21, 2006
    PST
    SNP-004 Parent Part ID ID of Series, Image, Relation Relation to Index Y N Y Y
    module, etc. of Parent part or
    Group.
    SNP-005 Child Part All part releases on Relation Relation to a lisst Y N Y (return Y
    Release Ids the BOM. of Release list of
    Indexes. snaps
    with
    mathcing
    child)
    SNP-006 CTO Type Required/ Relation Lookup Table Y Y N Y
    Optional/HW Required/
    Dependent Optional/HW
    Dependent
  • 10.4.8 Defect Attributes
  • Intended Exam- Basic Ext.
    ID Attribute Name Description Comments Usage ples Required Modifiable Search Search
    DEF-001 Defect ID Auto generated Y N Y Y
    sequence.
    DEF-002 Defect Status Open/Closed Defects can only be closed Y Y Y Y
    if “Defect Resolution is
    Fix-verified, Will Not Fix,
    Deferred, Duplicate, or
    Withdrawn.”
    DEF-004 Defect Resolution Fixed, Fix-verified, Dropdown. Should be a Y Y Y Y
    Will Not Fix, configurable item.
    Deferred,
    Duplicate,
    Withdrawn.
    DEF-005 Responsible Can be one or more N Y Y Y
    persons. users or a team.
    DEF-006 Priority Must Fix, Should Dropdown. N Y Y Y
    Fix, Optional Fix,
    None
    DEF-007 Summary (Defect Text field. Y Y Y Y
    Title)
    DEF-008 Description Text area. Y Y Y Y
    DEF-009 Frequency Once, Always, Dropdown. N Y N Y
    Sometimes
    DEF-010 Frequency Statistics X out of Y This can be entered if For use in N Y N N
    “Frequency” is statistical
    “Sometimes.” User can analysis.
    enter multiple “X of Y”
    sets for each defect.
    DEF-011 Notes Text area N Y N Y
    DEF-012 Related Test Cases Association with This cannot be a required N Y N Y
    one or more test attribute because defects
    cases. can be logged without
    associated test cases.
    DEF-013 Steps to reproduce. Can be copied from Text area. Y Y N Y
    related test cases
    (attribute TST-010)
    and edited.
    DEF-014 Expected Results Can be copied from Text area. Y Y N Y
    related test cases
    (attribute TST-011)
    and edited.
    DEF-015 Workaround Text area. N Y N Y
    DEF-016 Severity Values: Dropdown. Should be a N Y Y Y
    0 - None configurable item - admin
    1 screen not required.
    2
    3
    DEF-017 Exposure Values: Dropdown. Should be a N Y Y Y
    1-LI (Legal configurable item - admin
    Implications) screen not required.
    2-HVCG
    (High Volume
    Call Generator)
    3-LNFU
    (Likely to
    Notice with
    Frequent Use)
    4-LIDB (Likely
    to Ignore
    Defective
    Behavior)
    5-VUS (Very
    Unlikely will
    See)
    DEF-018 Assigned to (parts) List of one or more Y Y Y Y
    engineering
    part/major versions,
    releases, HW parts,
    or user defined
    parts associated
    with the defect.
    Should be auto-
    populated if
    submitting from a
    failed test case.
    DEF-019 Defect Submitter Y N N Y
    DEF-020 Submit Date Y N N Y
    DEF-021 Close Date N Y N Y
    DEF-022 Attachments N Y N N
    DEF-023 Sustaining status N Y N Y
    DEF-024 Sustaining Priority N Y N Y
    DEF-025 Microsoft Defect ID N Y N Y
    DEF-026 Beta ID N Y N Y
    DEF-027 LangRegion One or more Y Y Y Y
    LangRegion's to
    which the defect
    applies. User can
    also select All
    “LangRegions.”
    DEF-028 Target Series The series for Y Y N Y
    which the defect
    was first
    discovered.
    DEF-029 Applicable Series List of all other This could be a system N Y N Y
    series for which a maintainable attribute
    defect was based on part information.
    discovered.
  • 10.4.9 Test Case/Strategy Attributes
  • Intended Exam- Modi- Basic Ext.
    ID Attribute Name Description Comments Usage ples Required fiable Search Search
    TST-001 Test Case ID Auto-generated sequence. Y N Y Y
    TST-002 Test Case Basic, Ad-hoc, Use Case, Drop-down. Y N Y Y
    Type/Category Compatibility, FIV, For Benchmarks and
    Benchmarks, MDA, MDA categories: key,
    Screen Shot Capture, value, and expected
    Business Unit, value can be entered.
    Accessory, and Other. For Screen Shot
    Capture category a .jpg
    or .bmp image file can
    be attached.
    TST-003 Test Results Pass/Fail/Not Defaults to “Not Y Y Y Y
    Tested/Impeded stored by Tested.”
    series, release combo.
    TST-004 Part/Major Version One or more part/major N Y N Y
    versions to which the test
    case is constrained.
    TST-005 Series One or more series to N Y N Y
    which the Test Case is
    constrained.
    TST-006 Test Area Audio, Video, Still Dropdown. Should be Y Y N Y
    Picture, Productivity, Etc. a configurable item via
    admin screen.
    TST-007 Purpose Text area. Y Y N Y
    TST-008 Requirements Text area. N Y N N
    TST-009 Initial Conditions Text field/Dropdown. N Y N N
    TST-010 Steps Text area. Y Y N N
    TST-011 Expected Results Text area. Y Y N N
    TST-012 Notes Text area. N Y N Y
    TST-013 Status Active, Obsolete, Etc. Dropdown. Should be Y Y Y Y
    a configurable item via
    admin screen.
    TST-014 Level 1 - Always Run, Dropdown Y Y Y Y
    2 - Sometimes Run,
    3 - Random
    Sampling/Sanity Check
    TST-015 Time to Execute User estimate of time Y Y N Y
    required to complete the
    test. Integer (in minutes).
    TST-016 Submitter Auto - user who creates Y N N Y
    test case.
    TST-017 Related Links One or more hyperlinks. N Y N N
    Can be a text field but
    system should interpret
    values as hyperlinks.
    TST-018 Last Updated Auto Y Y N Y
    TST-019 Excluded Series One or more series which N Y N Y
    are excluded from this
    test case.
    TST-020 Submit Date Date user created test Y N N Y
    case.
  • 11 Production Rollout Plan 11.4 Deployment Locations
  • Now referencing FIG. 23, a non-limiting production rollout plan is shown.
    As a global system, More than six places are involved in ePic network:
      • Tokyo
      • Vagana
      • Shanghai
      • Czech
      • Brussels
      • San Diego
      • Other three factories in China
        Engineers and factories are in these places:
      • Engineer: San Diego, Brussels, Shanghai, Tokyo
      • Factory: San Diego, Czech, Nagano, Other three factories in Chin
        • Network deployment diagram
    11.5 Phased Rollout
  • EPic will be rolled out in two phases.
  • 11.5.1 Phase 1 Release
  • Phase 1 Requirements will include the following ePic functionality:
      • Parts Registration
      • Image and Module BOM Creation
      • Build System Interface
      • Series Software BOM Creation
      • DB Hero interface
      • File Store
        This release includes full support for image and module building and series software BOM creation. This is essentially the ePic “kernel,”
    11.5.2 Phase 2 Release
  • Phase 2 Requirements will include the following ePic functionality:
      • Test Management
      • Defect Tracking
      • Release to Manufacturing
      • Installation and Recovery Tool Support
      • VALSUN Interface
      • Mini-ePic
        This release adds factory deployment, quality assurance, and customer recovery functionality to the ePic system.
    11.5.3 Sony Software Development Activities
  • VOA tools will be adapted to become the global recovery and installation tools. The release date for these new tools will be timed to coincide with the phase 2 release.
    Build system modifications must be completed by VOA, VOE, and SDNA in order to build images and modules with ePic.
    Plans for implementing and testing changes to build systems must be made the following milestones in mind:
      • All required ePic system functionality will be implemented in the phase 1 release.
      • A warranty period will be in effect for a TBD period from date of the phase 2 release. After this, changes will be more costly.
    12 Changes to Legacy Systems 12.1 Summary 12.1.1 VBD
  • Current Tools and Systems
      • BOM VAIO—SDNA build system,
      • VELSUN/VALSUN—Defect tracking systems.
  • Changes to Tools & Systems
      • BOM VAIO will be replaced with VOA's ABU/Magellan,
      • VELSUN/VALSUN—transfer of defects from ePic to VELSUN/VALSUN must be established.
    12.1.2 VOE
  • Current Tools and Systems
      • EIS—VOE Project and Software Management System.
      • Tracker—Image Building and Tracking System.
  • Changes to Tools & Systems
      • ePic will not support VOE build system since images will no longer be developed at VOE.
    12.1.3 VOA
      • SW Plan—excel file defining the software BOM.
      • VSMS—the “VA 10 Software Management System.”
      • ABU/Magellan—automated image building tools.
      • Oasis—MCode tool used to support testing.
      • MINDS—automated installation system used by testers.
      • Pacific—tools used to install software in the factory.
      • Recovery Tools—use a localized version of the SDNA GREEN engine.
        • Changes to Tools & Systems
          • The SW Plan excel file will no longer be used. The data contained therein will be maintained in DB Hero.
          • VSMS, Oasis, and MINDS will be replaced with ePic.
          • ABU/Magellan will be made to interface with the ePic.
          • VOA installation and recovery tools will be modified to become the global toolset.
          • OASIS must be modified to create a floppy based on a single direct HTTP request.
    12.2 Build System Changes
  • Three regional build tool implementations must be modified to work with ePic. Objects created by each regional build system may change to comply with the global modular and recovery specifications, which are to be defined as part of this project.
    This section lists current build system artifacts from each region's build system and mappings to ePic fields. The ePic fields listed below are detailed in Section 10.4 of this document. Note that in some cases the format and meaning of the attribute may have changed from the current state. For example, Software Release ID (formerly ESP #, SITID, etc.) will now be an integer with a prefix denoting part type (this will necessitate changes to all three build systems).
    Architectural note:
      • Build process should not be interrupted by WAN outages.
      • Caching build data can shield you from WAN outage:
        • Option 1: Build tools interface directly with ePic; caching mechanism can be built into build tools.
        • Option 2: Existing SW system; (MS BOM VAIO, VSMS) can be used to cache ePic data (possibly lessening impact to build tools).
          [VOA has chosen to build a caching mechanism into its build system.]
    12.2.1 VOA-E Build Tools 12.2.1.1 Build Tools Overview
  • Build Tools create the following objects:
      • Foundation Image
      • Base Plus Image
      • Monolithic Image
      • P1 Recovery Image
      • Module, X-Module, EPC
      • Factory Deployment Media (RDVD, PIDVD, BDVD)
      • PAC Files
      • P1 Recovery Image
      • PE Module
      • Data file
        Database information required includes: Project Info, BOM Info, Component Info (location on server etc).
        Files required by Build tools include: OS files, Component Installers (drivers, apps) Output files created by Magellan for use by Automated Build Utility (ABU), Chrysalis recovery tools and others are discussed in the next sections.
        12.2.1.2 Files required by Automated Build Utility (ABU) to Create Foundation and Base-Plus Images.
        Script.INI: Contains all items on Image BOM with BasePlus set to FALSE.
        BScript.INI: Contains all items on Image BOM with BasePlus set to TRUE and IntegrationMethod is not OPK.
        OPKScript.INI: Contains all items on Image BOM with BasePlus set to TRUE and IntegrationMethod is OPK.
  • VSMS Fields Corresponding ePic fields
    used to create above 3 files. (refer ePic-Attribs_20050808.xls).
    Project name: used for querying EP-001
    and to create folder
    on network to store these files.
    Build name: used for querying REL-003
    and to create folder
    on network to store these files.
    BasePlus: check OPK integration REL-025
    method only for Base Plus.
    IntegrationMethod: used by tools & EP-005, EP-006, REL-021
    check for OPK items.
    Silent: Don't use IntegrationMethod EP-038, REL-027
    if not Silent.
    BiosLockNo: uniquely identifies EP-012
    image.
    ReleaseName REL-003
    Sitid REL-001
    NetPath REL-020 or Mini ePic part
    Switches REL-023
    InstallInstructions REL-Installation steps
    BuildInfo REL-By Builder
    VersionPath REL-014
    VersionID REL-015
  • 12.2.1.3 Files Required to Automate Module Creation.
  • MScript.INI: Contains all items on Module BOM.
    VSMS Fields used: Same as above.
  • 12.2.14 Files Required by Chrysalis Recovery Tools. SonyPac.cmd
  • Is a batch file that creates the structure of one or more PAC files by copying the software releases (that make up the PAC file) from the network to a folder on the local machine. Each folder corresponds to a PAC file. The builder then runs the Pack tool to create a PAC file from the contents of each folder. It is required to create more than one PAC file as one PAC file may not fit on one disc. It contains all items on Image BOM with IsSingleApplicationRecovery is TRUE.
  • VSMS Fields used: Corresponding ePic fields.
    ProjectName: used for querying, not EP-001
    contained in the file.
    Build: used for querying, not contained REL-003
    in the file.
    SITID: to create folder on local machine. REL-001
    IsSingleApplicationRecovery: used for REL-026
    querying, not contained in the file.
    SITInstallProgram: Location on file server. REL-020/Mini ePic
    Pac_File: this value is set in VSMS prior to Obsolete in ePic. Move the
    creating this file by calculating (according Pac file assignment
    to size) which PAC file this software functionality to Magellan
    goes on. (dynamically assign instead
    of storing in database).

    Appinfo.ini: Contains all applications and drivers that go on the Foundation Image and are available for recovery through Chrysalis (Single Application Recovery).
  • VSMS Fields used: Corresponding ePic fields.
    Project name: used to create folder on EP-001
    network to store these files.
    Build name: used to create folder on network REL-003
    to store
    these files.
    ARCDFolder: used to distinguish Drivers EP-005, 006
    from Applications.
    ARCDTitle: used as display title for EP-010
    Applications.
    IntegrationMethod: should be OPK-Driver EP-006
    for drivers.
    Used for querying.
    ReleaseName: used as display title for REL-003
    Drivers.
    ARCDSpec: text description (hover text). EP-011
    SITInstallProgram: installer file. REL-020, 022/Mini ePic
    SITID: used for unpacking. REL-001
    IsSingleApplicationRecovery: determine REL-026
    if compressed.
    Pac_File: used to determine correct Obsolete; generated by
    PAC file. external tool dynamically.
    InstallOrder: used to install in a given EP-009
    sequence.
    Prompts:

    12.2.1.5 Files required for BDVD
    AllModules.TXT: Contains all modules and EPCs on a base unit.
  • Corresponding
    VSMS Fields used: ePic fields.
    ProjectName: used for querying, not EP-001
    contained in the file.
    ReleaseName REL-003
    Installer REL-020, 21, 22

    12.2.1.6 Files required for Media Creation
    perm modulues.cmd: Contains all permanent modules and EPCs for base unit (IsPermanent is TRUE).
    temp modules.cmd: Contains all temporary modules and EPCs for base unit (IsPermanent is FALSE).
  • Corresponding
    VSMS Fields used: ePic fields.
    ProjectName: used for querying, not EP-001
    contained in the file.
    isPermanent EP-025(reverse logic)
    ReleaseName REL-003
    Installer REL-020, 21, 22
    Sitid REL-001
  • 12.2.1.7 Files Required by Minds/Pacific MINDS.CSV
  • VSMS Fields used: Corresponding ePic fields.
    Pcode Series attributes TBD
    BLID EP-012
    Phase REL-003
    Setup REL-022
    VersionID REL-015
    Swmcode TBD
    Version REL-002
    SITID REL-001
    Release Name REL-003
    BaseUnit Series attributes TBD
    Type EP-005, 006
  • 12.2.1.8 Files Required by Japan
  • BaseUnitInfo.INI: Contains all base units for a project.
  • VSMS Fields used: Corresponding ePic fields.
    BaseUnit Series attributes TBD
    BaseUnitID
    SalesType
    ModelNo_JP
    OS
    Product Mcode
    C-Partition Size
    P1 Partition Size
  • 12.2.1.9 Other Functionality
  • Build tools also check in software releases and images and thus need to be able to have a method of writing release data to the database.
  • 13 APPENDIX 13.4 Terminology
  • Business CTO General Configure To Order Produce (configure) a product after taking the
    related order.
    BTO General Build To Order
    Retail sales, General Selling product through normal shop channel.
    Direct sales, Online sales General Selling product through internet (Web).
    B2B General Business To Business Selling product to corporate customer directly
    from Sony.
    B2C General Business To Consumer
    SMB General Small Business Small company like 50 employees.
    Enterprise General Enterprise Big company.
    SOHO General Small Office Home Very small company like 0 to 3 employees.
    Office Use home as office.
    Product Design BOM General Bill Of Material List of parts (materials) to produce a product.
    activity SW BOM General Software Bill Of
    Material
    ES Engineering Sample
    FF Feature Freeze
    Pilot Build Pilot Build Test Build
    RC General Release Candidate
    GM General Golden Master Final and approved master software file.
    RTM Release to Manufacturing
    DVT Sony Design Validation T Hardware prototype for design validation.
    PVT Sony Production Validation T Hardware prototype for production validation,
    almost final product.
    MP Mass Production Real product production, not sample, not
    prototype.
    Ex factory First shipping out of the mass production
    product.
    SKU General Stock Keeping Unit
    Build Combine many software pieces to make single
    big image file to be copied onto Hard Disk
    Drive of target PC.
    Image build, build image Combine many software pieces to make single
    big image file to be copied onto Hard Disk
    Drive of target PC.
    Integration Combine many software pieces to make single
    big image file to be copied onto Hard Disk
    Drive of target PC.
    Software Integration Combine many software pieces to make single
    big image file to be copied onto Hard Disk
    Drive of target PC.
    Preinstall Install application onto a product so that
    customer doesn't have to install the software
    himself.
    Recovery Microsoft When a customer wants to go back to factory
    state, “Recovery” to be done.
    Hard Disk Recovery Microsoft
    External Recovery Media Microsoft
    Recovery CD, Microsoft
    Recovery DVD
    BIOS Lock ID, BLID Sony
    M-Code Sony
    BIOS PC
    DMI PC
    Registry Microsoft
    OPK Microsoft OEM Pre-installation Kit
    OOBE Microsoft Out Of Box Experience Windows Setup screens at very first power-on.
    Serial number General
    Service Tag PC
    OSR ITC OS Recovery or System Recover the image file.
    Recovery
    APR ITC Application Recovery Recover (install) application(s).
    SAR (ITE) ITE Smart Application Same meaning as “APR” in SDNA.
    Recovery
    VSRU ITC VAIO System Recovery Utility name. Recover the image file, using
    Utility Green Engine.
    VARU ITC VAIO Application Utility name
    Recovery Utility
    Wise General www.wise.com Software name to make a package.
    Install Shield General www.installshield.com Software name to make an installer.
    F.I. VOA Foundation Image
    MINDS VOA Module Installation . . .
    VSMS VOA VAIO Software Management
    System
    ABU VOA Automatic Build Utility
    EIS ITE Engineering Information
    System
    Tracker ITE
    BomVAIO ITC
    BugVAIO ITC
    Valsan ITC
    IRT server ITC
    Librarian VOA Image planning.
    Build Architect ITE Image planning.
    Builder ITC Image planning.
    PM Project Manager
    Multi Language SKU ITE
    DB Hero Series VBD A product platform. For example, “Horizon.”
    terminology Class VBD A concept representing a set of customer
    choices. For example “Hard Drive” (choices
    might be “100 GB”, “200 GB”, or “250 GB”).
    Spec VBD Represents a single customer choice.
    Config Range VBD The set of classes that constitute the full
    (global) range of customer choices for a given
    series. Can be used by a sales system to
    provide CTO offerings to customers.
    Component VBD Phantom BOM item. Derived from Config
    range during DB Hero block definition process.
    Component Structure VBD List of components for a given structure with
    parts as children. This is considered the
    “manufacturing BOM.”
    Factory PCN Production Change Change form used to disclose any non-BOM
    terminology Notice related changes to the factory.
    ECN Engineering Change Change form used to disclose BOM changes to
    Notice the factory.
    EPC VOE/VOA Engineering Process Running change to software. Consists of
    Change change notification and a corresponding
    software module.
    Factory Process Generic term used to refer to all activities
    performed in the factory in order to produce
    units.
    ERP Enterprise resource Generic term for inventory, planning, and order
    planner management systems used in support of
    manufacturing or order fulfillment. Oracle,
    SAP, JD Edwards, etc.
    Configuration BOM VOA The bill of materials for a specific PC
    configuration.
    Platform BOM VOA A bill of materials which encapsulates CTO
    customer choices (like the DB Hero Config
    range).
    Phantom BOM VOA A bill of materials representing the
    manufacturing BOM for a series (like DB Hero
    component structure). Phantom BOM items
    can be included as customer choices on the
    platform BOM.
    SMAP Simple Manufacturing Unit testing framework used to drive the
    Advanced Process automated factory process in Sony VAIO
    factories. Imaging in the factory occurs as a
    SMAP process step.
    Sony Terminology: VBD or ITC VAIO Business Tokyo Group Formerly
    Department Division called ITC.
    name VOA or ITD VAIO of America America Group, San Formerly
    Diego called ITD or
    ITA.
    VOE or ITE VAIO of Europe Europe Group, Formerly
    Brussels called ITE.
    STC Sony Shanghai
    Tec Center
    SNT Sony Nagano Factory 200 km from Tokyo
    IT-M Sony San Diego
    Manufacturing
    division
    SVL Taiwan Exteranl Labo
    ODM China Manufacturing
    Sony Digital Network
    SDNA Applications Inc., Tokyo Group Formerly a
    part of ITC.
    Others SEN Sony Enterprise Sony Corporate Network
    Network (intranet). Firewalled.
  • 13.5 Current Process Flows 13.5.1 VOA & IT-M 13.5.1.1 Planning
  • Below is sequence of how VOA SW planning occurs currently:
      • Explore new ISV business opportunities [VOA-Product Planning & VOA-PM] [Ongoing, but not necessary need to be tracked in DB].
      • Create 1st draft of SW Planning Strategy in ppt by VOA-E PM (N-17).
        • a SW Strategy consists of
          • No platform or project information yet.
          • 80% of Sony software titles leveraged from previous cycle (including utilities & Sony software, but no drivers).
          • Sony Utilities are not updated at this point (No visibility until engineering meeting).
          • Some Sony Software is updated at this point (Info is through grapevine, and not firm until engineering meeting).
          • SW Planning strategy or planning BOMs do not reflect drivers.
          • 20% of ISV software (mostly leverage from previous cycle).
          • Any ISV addition here are 75% firm.
        • Software is also added or remove from SW CTO configuration strategies chart.
          • Grouping of multiple modules to define an offering strategy starts here. Also defines offering rules.
        • Project code names at this point only, no detailed base units names or configuration on PPT.
      • Review 1st draft of SW Planning Strategy in ppt with VOA PP & ITPD (N-16).
        • a Gather questions & consensus prior to Engineering meeting.
          • Make necessary SW plan or offering strategy adjustment up to engineering meeting.
        • Usually not much change here, mostly just to keep ITPD in sync with upcoming strategy.
        • 95% of ISV software are fixed.
      • Present 2nd draft of SW Planning Strategy in ppt @ Engineering meeting in Japan (N-15).
        • 2rd draft includes & updates from PP & ITPD meeting from above.
        • Below is what occurs during engineering meeting:
          • Gather updates & add new Sony Utilities (Utilities strategy are fixed & owned by ITC per platform).
          • Gather updates & add new Sony Software (Sony SW strategies are mostly fixed and owned by ETC per platform. Occasionally, each region are given a choice on certain software pending lead time or if conflicts with local ISV SW strategy.
          • Versions of the above are gathered and updated to SW Strategy ppt (Build revisions are not reflected in SW Strategies or SW planning BOM since they are fixed during integration stage, only reflected in VSMS),
          • ISV Software are presented to ITC (purely to inform them of local strategies).
      • Create 3rd draft of SW Planning Strategy (still in ppt format) (N-14).
        • 3rd draft of the ppt includes updates from engineering meeting.
          • Platform is reflected only if certain software are assigned to specific SKUs.
        • Review 3rd draft with ITPD and VOA-PP to share information from engineering meeting.
      • Review with internal groups (SIT & PQD) by N-13.
        • SW Planning strategy ppt should be fixed.
        • SIT starts to prepare BOM layout in VSMS with SKU & HW config charts.
      • From N-13 to RTM.
        • VOA-PM turns the ppt into SW Planning BOM (in xls format) & adds platform & base units.
          • SW Plan reflects how SW are associated in VSMS each base units,
          • Either as modules or in foundation image.
          • if in modules, it also reflects if it should be Require “R”, Default “D”, or Optional “O” per base unit.
          • Changes throughout the cycle occurs first in xls & announced to SIT & PQD (VOA-PP & ITPD as well) every Thursday.
          • SW Plan is also used during BOM Freeze (Milestone) to verify that modules assigned in VSMS are all accounted for in both plan & BOM (per base units with each particular projects's BOM Freeze).
          • SW Plan will also be used by ITM royalty reporting group after project RTMs.
          • SW Plan is not used by marketing spec sheet generation, instead a VSMS base unit BOM is used (base unit BOM includes every software, including drivers).
      • Future Objectives
        • Elimination of SW planning BOM.
          • Go straight from Strategy ppt to VSMS.
          • Updates should occur in VSMS and populated to projects.
        • Royalty information be assigned according to base units/platform or SW module (Not necessary at planning stage, but need it by RTM).
    13.5.1.2 Software Integration
  • FIG. 23A shows a non-limiting software integration process:
  • 13.5.1.3 Factory Deployment Process
  • In reference to FIG. 24, the process flow captures a process for deploying CTO software in the factory.
    Many of the activities depicted in FIG. 24 are manual, with some small helper applications in use to speed up the work. Some of these activities are executed in parallel with the software integration process.
  • 13.5.2 VOE 13.5.2.1 Software Integration
      • Engineers enter ESP numbers from software plan into EIS via UI.
      • EIS provides a build script via UI.
      • Builder supplies script to build system.
      • Build system builds item.
      • Tracker provides BIOS lock number, image number, and other data to build system.
    13.5.3 VBD 13.5.3.1 Software Integration (SDNA)
      • BOM VAIO is standalone database system.
      • Build tools retrieve build data via database link to BOM VAIO.
    13.6.5 RPT-5: BOM Report 13.6.6 RPT-6: Module Release Report MOD-Premiere_Pro Build07 BOM Info:
  • Software Title Index ID Version Defect Owner Recoverable
    Adobe, Multimedia, Premiere 0411303.ADB 1.0.00.0404220 Smith 1 No
    Delete DVDBurn
    Adobe, Multimedia, Premiere 0419801.ADB 1.5.0.0 Smith 2 Yes
    Pro
    Sony ITC, Multimedia, VAIO 0504604.SNC 5.0.01.14040 Smith 2 Yes
    Edit Components
    Adobe, Marketing Material, 0407101.ADB 1.1.00.0403110 Smith 1 Yes
    Premiere Pro SerNum and
    Readme
    Sony ITD, Build Image Tool, 0504903.SND 5.0.1 Smith 3 No
    MCODE Reader
    Sony ITD, Tools, MN.DLL 0306502.SND 1.2.1 Smith 3 No
    142
  • Release Information
  • BOM Version: 7.0.0.0 Date Submitted: 2/8/05
    4:23:54 PM
    Purpose: Integration Location: Source Size (Bytes): 307704991
    Server
    Version Verification ID: Type: Module
    0503904.SND
    Version Verification Path: HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\Software\Sony
    Corporation\Modules\MOD-Premiere_Pro\Version
  • Integration Information
  • Install Command Line: \\us-sd-itd-san-1\swlibrary\lsvrelease\0503904.SND\VIDP070503904.exe-*56GnArS40
  • Application Recovery Text:
  • Single Application Requires User Interaction? WHQL Certified?
    Recovery?

    Figure US20120036049A1-20120209-P00001
  • Notes Build Info: [Smith 4-2/20/05 10:23:00 AM] Summer05-New Version of VEC and New Mread.exe. Install Instructions: [Smith 4-2/20/05 10:23:00 AM] Uninstall Instructions: [Smith4-2/20/05 10:23:00 AM]
  • Use Add/Remove programs.
  • Release Notes: [Smith 4-2/20/05 10:23:00 AM]
  • New Version of VEC and fixed mread issue.
  • By Champion: By Builder: Other Notes: Series BOM Associations
  • Registered Registry
    Series Name Status By Date
    Hogwarts4-MC Shipping Smith 4 2005/02/20
    Hogwarts4_Chrysalis3_Test In progress Smith 5 2005/06/07
    Horizon2-HE Shipping Smith 4 2005/02/20
    Horizon2-MC Shipping Smith 5 2005/04/19
    Horizon2-PR Shipping Smith 4 2005/02/20
    Horizon3_GD-HE Shipping Smith 5 2005/06/09
    Horizon3_GD-MC Shipping Smith 5 2005/06/09
    Horizon3_GD-PR Shipping Smith 5 2005/06/09
    Jennys_module_test_project In progress Smith 4 2005/02/20
    LeonS2-HE Shipping Smith 4 2005/02/20
    LeonS2-PR Shipping Smith 4 2005/02/20
    LeonS2_Multi-recovery_test Shipping Smith 5 2005/02/24
    LeonV-HE Shipping Smith 5 2005/06/29
    LeonV-PR Shipping Smith 5 2005/06/29
    Messenger-HE In progress Smith 5 2005/10/14
    Messenger-PR In progress Smith 5 2005/10/14
    Sherry_WWAN-PR In progress Smith 4 2005/10/05
    Spirit2-HE Shipping Smith 4 2005/02/20
    Spirit2-PR Shipping Smith 4 2005/02/20
    Spirit3-HE Shipping Smith 5 2005/06/15
    Spirit3-PR Shipping Smith 5 2005/06/15
  • Attachments 13.6.7 RPT-7: Group Report 13.6.8 RPT-8: Image BOM Report 13.6.9 RPT-9: BOM Freeze Report FI-Inazma-PR (Build03) Image BOM Report
  • VCC Descriptions
    Vendor Component Release Name Hover Text
    Adobe Productivity Adobe Reader <ENG>Document viewer: View, navigate, and print PDF and E-
    Book format documents. </ENG> <FRA>Visionneuse de
    document: La vue, dirigent, et impriment des documents de
    format de PDF et E-Book</FRA> <ESN>Espectador del
    documento: La visión, navega, e imprime documentos del formato
    del PDF y del E-Book.</ESN>
    Alps Driver-Mouse Touchpad Touchpad Driver
    Google Communication Google Toolbar <ENG>Maximizes your web searching
    experience.</ENG><FRA>Facilite vos recherches sur
    internet.</FRA><ESN>Maximiza su tela que busca
    experiencia.</ESN>
    Intel Driver-System Intel Intel 915GM/PM/GMS 910GML Alviso Driver
    915GM_PM_GMS_910GML
    Alviso
    Macromedia Multimedia Flash Player <ENG>Play back videos and audio generated in
    Flash.</ENG><FRA>Lecture de vidéos et de fichiers audio créés
    avec Flash</FRA><ESN>Juegue los videos traseros, audio
    generado en flash.</ESN>
    Sony ITC System Tool Battery Check Utility <ENG>Manage your notebook power
    settings.</ENG><FRA>Gérez les paramètres d'alimentation de
    votre ordinateur portable.</FRA><ESN>Maneje sus ajustes de
    energia del cuaderno.</ESN>
    Sony ITC Shared Library ImageStation Library <ENG>A program utility facilitating ImageStation
    access.</ENG><FRA>Un utilitaire facilitant l'accès á
    ImageStation.</FRA><ESN>Una utilidad del programa que
  • FI-Inazma-PR (Build03) Image BOM Report
  • VCC Descriptions
    Vendor Component Release Name Hover Text
    facilita el acceso de ImageStation.</ESN>
    Sony ITC System Tool Memory Stick Pro Formatter <ENG>A program utility for formatting a Memory
    Stick.</ENG><FRA>Un utilitaire permettant de formater un
    Memory Stick.</FRA><ESN>Una utilidad del programa para
    ajustar a formato un Memory Stick.</ESN>
    Sony ITC Multimedia OpenMG Setup <ENG>A program utility required by
    OpenMG.</ENG><FRA>Un utilitaire indispensable à
    OpenMG.</FRA><ESN>Una utilidad del programa requerida por
    OpenMG.</ESN>
    Sony ITC System Tool Setting Utility Series <ENG>A program for customizing your utility series
    settings.</ENG><FRA>Un programme pour personnaliser les
    paramètres de vos utlitaires.</FRA><ESN>Un programa para
    modificar sus ajustes para uso general de la serie para requisitos
    particulares.</ESN>
    Sony ITC Shared Library Sony Shared Library <ENG>A program utility required for Sony
    applications.</ENG><FRA>Un utilitaire pour les applications
    Sony.</FRA><ESN>Una utilidad del programa para los usos de
    Sony.</ESN>
    Sony ITC Shared Library Sony Video Shared Library <ENG>A program utility required for video editing
    applications.</ENG><FRA>Un utilitaire indispensable pour les
    applications d'édition vidéo.</FRA><ESN>Una utilidad del
    programa requerida para el video que corrige usos.</ESN>
    Sony ITC Shared Library SonyUtils <ENG>A program utility required for VAIO
    applications.</ENG><FRA>Un utilitaire indispensable pour les
    applications VAIO.</FRA><ESN>Una utilidad del programa
    requerida para los usos de VAIO.</ESN>
    Sony ITC Multimedia VAIO Entertainment Platform <ENG>A utility program that installs the VAIO Entertainment
    Platform.</ENG><FRA>Un utilitaire permettant d'installer la
    Plateforme VAIO Entertainment.</FRA><ESN>Un programa
    utilitario que instala la VAIO Entertainment Platform.</ESN>
    Sony ITC System Tool VAIO Event Service <ENG>A program utility to control specific applications in your
    VAIO computer.</ENG><FRA>Un utilitaire pour contróler les
    applications spécifiques de votre ordinateur de
    VAIO.</FRA><ESN>Usos especificos de un tocontrol para uso
    general del programa en su computadora de VAIO.</ESN>
    Sony ITC System Tool VAIO Power Management <ENG>Manage your notebook power
    settings.</ENG><FRA>Gérez les paramétres d'alimentation de
    votre ordinateur portable.</FRA><ESN>Maneje sus ajustes de
    energia del cuaderno.</ESN>
    Sony ITC System Tool VAIO Update <ENG>Get notifications of the latest driver and news related to
    your VAIO computer.</ENG><FRA>Recevez les notifications
    vous informant des pilotes les plus récents ainsi que les derniéres
    nouvelles concernant votre ordinateur de
    VAIO.</FRA><ESN>Consiga las notificaciones del conductor y
    de las noticias más últimos relacionados con su computadora de
    VAIO.</ESN>
    Sony ITD Documentation Latest Information <ENG>Latest Information.</ENG> <FRA>La Plus défunte
    Information</FRA> <ESN>La Información Más última</ESN>
    Sony ITD Documentation Recovery Guide <ENG>VAIO Recovery Guide.</ENG> <FRA>Guide De
    Réinstallation</FRA> <ESN>Guia De la Recuperación</ESN>
    Sony ITD Tools VAIO Drivers <ENG>VAIO Drivers installs the VAIO drivers to their original
    shipping condition.</ENG><FRA>VAIO Drivers installe les
    conducteurs de VAIO sur leur condition d'expédition
    originale.</FRA><ESN>VAIO Drivers instala los conductores de
    VAIO a su condición de envio original.</ESN>
    Sony ITD Documentation VAIO User Manual <ENG>VAIO User Guide is a program that opens user manuals
    on your VAIO computer.</ENG><FRA>VAIO Manuel
  • FI-Inazma-PR (Build03) Image BOM Report
  • VCC Descriptions
    Vendor Component Release Name Hover Text
    D'Utilisateur</FRA> <ESN>Guia de Usuario de VAIO </ESN>
    Sun Windows Java 2 Runtime Environment <ENG>Instails the Sun MicroSystems Java 2 Runtime
    Microsystems Environment.</ENG> <FRA>Installe l'environnement
    d'exécution de Java 2 de Sun MicroSystems.</FRA>
    <ESN>Instala el ambiente del tiempo de pasada de Java 2 de los
    Sun MicroSystems.</ESN>
    Veritas Productivity PxEngine <ENG>PxEngine is a shared dynamic link library for optical
    device burning.</ENG> <FRA>PxEngine est une bibliothèque de
    lien dynamique partagee pour la brulure de circuit
    optique.</FRA> <ESN>PxEngine es una biblioteca de
    acoplamiento dinámica compartida para quemarse del dispositivo
    óptico.</ESN>
  • FI-Inazma-PR (Build03) BOM Details
    Re-
    cov-
    Vendor Component Release Name Champion SITID Version IRT ID ery
    Reference
    Sony ITC Reference Boot Option Setting Smith 7 0429908.snc 041017 SP-008333-01 False
    Request
    Sony ITC Reference HQ Filter setting Smith 6 0504901.SNC 1.5.02180 SP-009406-00 False
    request Spirit 2
    Sony ITC Reference Power Options Setting Smith 6 0517803.SNC 050627 SP-010128-00 False
    Requests
    Sony ITC Reference Volume Control Smith 6 0503821.SNC 050201 SP-009178-00 False
    Settings
    Sony ITD Reference FI Spec Smith 8 0509604.SND 3.0.4 False
    Sony ITD Reference HW Build Document Smith 9 0521508.SND Inazma-PR False
    Build v1.5
    Sony ITD Reference SCR Specification Smith 10 0507409.SND 1.1.00.0503150 False
    Document English
    Operating System
    Microsoft Windows CDCR patch for Media Smith 5 0320501.mst 1.0.0.0 False
    Player
    Microsoft Windows KB307154 Smith 5 0428804.MST English SP-008374-00 False
    LowBatteryAlarm QFE
    Microsoft Windows KB835221 HD Audio Smith 5 0503804.MST 1.0-200408180 SP-008559-00 False
    QFE English
    Microsoft Windows KB870669 Critical Smith 5 0420516.mst multilingual False
    Desktop Update for
    MDAC
    Microsoft Windows KB873333 Security Smith 5 0504104.mst English 1.0- SP-009238-00 False
    Update MS05-012 200502090
    Microsoft Windows KB873339-Security Smith 5 0515914.MST English 1.0- SP-009052-00 False
    Update MS04-043 200412150
    Microsoft Windows KB883939- Smith 5 0517207.MST English 1.0- SP-010023.00 False
    Cumulative Security 200506200
    Update for IE
    Microsoft Windows KB884018-Add and Smith 5 0422501.MST English False
    Remove programs
    copy error
    Microsoft Windows KB884575 Smith 5 0428801.MST English SP-008390.00 False
    BatteryPowerDrain
    QFE
    Microsoft Windows KB885250 Security Smith 5 0504101.MST English 1.0- SP-009229-00 False
    Update MS05-011 200502090
    Microsoft Windows KB885835 Security Smith 5 0503813.MST KB885835 False
    Update MS04-044 English
    Microsoft Windows KB885836 Security Smith 5 0503807.mst KB8885836 SP-009043-00 False
    Update MS04-041 English
    Microsoft Windows KB886185 Security Smith 5 0503801.MST KB886185 SP-009089-00 False
    Update English
    Microsoft Windows KB886612 Memory Smith 5 0427201.mst english False
    Stick Icon Fix
    Microsoft Windows KB886903 Security Smith 5 0513204.mst KB886903 False
    Update MS05-004 Generic
    Microsoft Windows KB887472 Security Smith 5 0504516.mst English 1.0- SP-009312-00 False
    Update MS05-009 200502090
    Microsoft Windows KB887742 Smith 5 0503810.MST KB887742 False
    WLanBlueScreenQFE English
    Microsoft Windows KB888113 Security Smith 5 0504507.mst English 1.0- SP-009318-00 False
    Update MS05-015 200502090
    Microsoft Windows KB888239 MP10_MS Smith 5 0434401.MST English False
    OOBE splash screen KB888239
    fix
    Microsoft Windows KB888302 Security Smith 5 0504510.MST English 1.0- SP-009330-00 False
    Update MS05-007 200502090
    Microsoft Windows KB890046-Security Smith 5 0517201.MST English 1.0- SP-010076-00 False
    Update MS05-032 200506200
    Microsoft Windows KB890859-Security Smith 5 0515908.MST English 1.0- SP-009693-00 False
    Update MS05.018 200506030
    Microsoft Windows KB891781 Security Smith 5 0504504.MST English 1.0- SP-009288-00 False
    Update MS05-013 200502090
    Microsoft Windows KB893056 Hibernate Smith 5 0507506.mst English False
    Button Turn Off fix KB893056
    Microsoft Windows KB893066-Security Smith 5 0517301.MST English 2.0- SP-009713-01 False
    Update MS05-019 200506200
    Microsoft Windows KB893086-Security Smith 5 0515901.MST KB893086 SP-009684-00 False
    Update MS05-016 English 1.0-
    200506030
    Microsoft Windows KB893803-Windows Smith 5 0515904.MST 3.1- SP-009766-00 False
    Installer 3.1 KB893803-
    1.0-200506060
    Microsoft Windows KB894391-SVC Host Smith 5 0515905.MST English 1.0- SP-009724-00 False
    error fix 200505190
    Microsoft Windows KB896358-Security Smith 5 0517304.MST English 1.0- SP-010013-00 False
    Update-MS05-026 200506200
    Microsoft Windows KB896422-Security Smith 5 0517204.MST English 1.0- SP-010055.00 False
    Update-MS05-027 200506200
    Microsoft Windows KB896428-Security Smith 5 0522305.MST English 1.0- SP.010081-00 False
    Update MS05-033 200506200.
    Microsoft Windows KB901214-Security Smith 5 0521301.mst English OEM False
    Update MS05-036 distribution
    Microsoft Windows KB903235-Security Smith 5 0521304.mst English OEM False
    Update MS05-037 Distribution
    Microsoft Windows Media Player 10 Smith 10 0429401.MST English OPK False
    Microsoft Windows Windows.NET Smith 5 0513101.mst SPI False
    Framework Service KB867460
    Pack
    Microsoft Windows Windows Media Smith 5 0516001.MST ver.X10-86962 SP-009834-00 False
    Connection
    Microsoft Windows Windows XP OPK Smith 10 0132507.mst GM False
    MUI
    Microsoft Windows Windows XP Smith 10 0421902.mst English SP2 False
    Professional Edition Gold
    Microsoft Windows Windows.NET Smith 10 0314926.mst Framework 1.1 False
    OPK Support
    Sony ITC Windows SLP Files Smith 10 0516012.SNC 1.1.1.0- False
    200506040
    Sun Windows Java 2 Runtime Smith 10 0515401.sun 1.5.0.03 True
    Microsystems Environment
    Driver
    Alps Driver-Mouse Pointing Driver Smith 6 0519301.ALP 050629 SP-010147-00 False
    Registry Patch
    Alps Driver-Mouse Touchpad Smith 6 0421501.alp 5.3.511.2c SP-001993-36 True
    WHQL
    Connexant Driver-Modem Smart MC3Z Smith 6 0518101.CXT 7.28.00.50- SP-008161-08 False
    050628logo
    Intel Driver-Network Ethernet driver Smith 6 0430001.itl 8.0.13.0 SP-002515-11 False
    WHQL
    Intel Driver-Display Intel 915G graphics Smith 6 0518801.itl 6.14.10.4333h SP-007709-14 False
    WHQL
    Intel Driver-System Intel Smith 6 0520902.itl 6.1.0.1008 SP-008174-00 True
    915GM_PM_GMS_910GML WHQL
    Alviso
    Intel Driver-Display Intel Graphics Driver Smith 6 0515102.itl v01 SP-009674.00 False
    Registry Patch
    Intel Driver-Wireless Intel Pro Smith 6 0516401.ITL 9.0.2.25a-logo SP-007020-07 False
    LAN 2915ABG_2200BG
    RealTek Driver-Sound Audio Driver Smith 6 0519601.RTK 5.10.0.5129- SP-008252-28 False
    050715_WHQL
    Sony Ericsson Driver-Modem VDC EGPRS Modem Smith 11 0506001.ser 3.0.0.1510 SP-009393-00 False
    Driver WHQL
    Sony ITC Driver-System Notebook Control Smith 12 0429202.SNC 6.0.1.08290- SP-004458-00 False
    020604
    WHQL
    Sony ITC Driver-System SonyPi Smith 12 0418902.SNC 7.0.3.820 SP-004457-00 False
    WHQL
    Sony ITC Driver-Mouse USB Mouse Smith 6 0508001.SNC 1.56-whql SP-002012-05 False
    (resubmitted)
    Sony ITC Driver-Imaging VAIO USB Camera Smith 6 0306208.snc 1.2.00.01172 SP-004578-01 False
    WHQL
    Sony ITC Driver-Hard Disk VGP-MCA10 registry Smith 6 0428705.snc 1.0.0.10130 SP-007787-02 False
    patch
    Texas Driver-Hard Disk Memory Stick Driver Smith 6 0520601.tex 2.0.0.5_Logo SP-009671-04 False
    Instruments
    Texas Driver-Hard Disk Memory Stick driver Smith 6 0517802.tex 1.0.0.0- SP-010131-00 False
    Instruments Registry patch 20050610
    Toshiba Driver-System Bluetooth driver Smith 13 0519901.TOB 3.03.13SO- SP-009675-03 False
    04_RC3.20050708
    Toshiba Driver-System Bluetooth Registry Smith 13 0517801.TOB 1.0.0.0 SP-010130-00 False
    Patch
    Utility
    Sony ITC System Tool AV Mode Button Smith 6 0519303.SNC 1.0.00.06291 SP-010142-00 False
    Utility
    Sony ITC System Tool Battery Check Utility Smith 12 0506701.SNC 1.0.02.01240 SP-007112-03 True
    Sony ITC System Tool Memory Stick Pro Smith 12 0503605.snc 2.4.0.13260.0502040 SP-005054-04 True
    Formatter
    Sony ITC System Tool OCA Marker Smith 6 0404201.snc 1.03.1.0401130 False
    Sony ITC System Tool SetReso Smith 12 0429607.snc 2.3.1.2702 SP-002911-18 False
    Sony ITC System Tool Setting Utility Series Smith 12 0516014.SNC 1.2.00.05270 SP-008403-11 True
    Sony ITC System Tool VAIO Central Smith 14 0516704.SNC 1.1.02.061005 False
    Sony ITC System Tool VAIO Event Service Smith 12 0516805.SNC 2.2.00.06130 SP-008245-21 True
    Sony ITC System Tool VAIO Power Smith 12 0521405.SNC 1.7.00.08011 SP-008404-19 True
    Management
    Sony ITC System Tool VAIO Update Smith 11 0516103.SNC 2.1.02.01250 True
    (Not for LA)
    Sony ITD System Tool Sony Digital Signature Smith 15 0121802.snd 1.0 False
    Sony ITD System Tool VAIO Support Central Smith 14 0519320.SND 1.0.0.63005 False
    Library
    Sony ITC Shared Library ImageStation Library Smith 16 0318106.snc 3.0.01.05290 SP-005050-01 True
    Sony ITC Shared Library Sony MP4 Shared Smith 17 0503512.snc 1.1.00.12200 SP-009172-00 False
    Library
    Sony ITC Shared Library Sony Shared Library Smith 18 0503811.snc 2.10.00.01250 SP-005988-01 True
    XP
    Sony ITC Shared Library Sony Video Shared Smith 17 0503505.snc 2.0.01.12200 SP-009171-00 True
    Library
    Sony ITC Shared Library SonyUtils Smith 12 0515908.snc 6.2.00.17310 SP-008151-18 True
    Application-Audio Video
    Macromedia Multimedia Flash Player Smith 19 0420101.MAC 7.0.19.0 True
    Sony ITC Multimedia OpenMG Setup Smith 17 0516005.snc 4.2.00.06070 SP-009199-02 True
    (Not for LA)
    Sony ITC Multimedia Sonic Stage Mastering Smith 17 0430713.snc 1.4.00.10260_Aroma- SP-007851-03 False
    Studio Audio Filter IRX3190
    Presets
    Sony ITC Multimedia VAIO Entertainment Smith 17 0517204.snc 1.2.11.06150 SP-009842-01 True
    Platform
    Application-Productivity
    Adobe Productivity Adobe Reader Smith 1 0504801.ADB 7.0.0.0-English True
    Updated
    Adobe Productivity Adobe Reader Patch Smith 1 0515201.adb 7.0.1 False
    Veritas Productivity PxEngine Smith 20 0518101.VER 2.4.35.500a SP-007059-10 True
    Application-Communications
    Google Communica- Google Toolbar Smith 1 0503801.goo 2.0.114.10_US True
    tion
    Applications-Marketing
    Sony ITC Marketing Memory Stick Icon Smith 12 0209504.snc 1.2.0.0- SP-002377-02 False
    Material 20010912
    Sony ITC Marketing VAIO LiteFlow Smith 18 0515905.snc 1.0.01.05100 SP-008504-01 False
    Material Wallpaper
    Sony ITC Marketing VAIO Long Battery Smith 18 0516607.SNC 1.0.00.05200 SP-009801-00 False
    Material Life Wallpaper (RC)
    Sony ITC Marketing VAIO Original Screen Smith 18 0516001.snc 1.1.01.06070 SP-008470-05 False
    Material Saver
    Sony ITC Marketing VAIO Scene Smith 18 0503503.snc 1.0.01.- SP-008486-01 False
    Material Screensaver 12280_Scene_SD_Wide
    Sony ITD Marketing Bookmarks-IE Smith 1 0503801.SND 1.0.00.0502070 False
    Material (US)
    Sony ITD Marketing Image Station Photo Smith 5 0508804.snd 1.0.0.0503280 False
    Material Printing RegKeys
    Sony ITD Marketing VAIO Registration Smith 15 0519419.SND Fall05-14.0.2 False
    Material
    Documentation
    Sony ITD Documentation Latest Information Smith 21 0522304.SND Fall05 English n/a True
    V2
    Sony ITD Documentation Recovery Guide Smith 21 0520301.SND Fall05 English n/a True
    Sony ITD Documentation VAIO User Manual Smith 21 0520701.SND 1.00.16EN07251 SP-010132.02 True
    (IRX-3250
    ENU)
    SIT Build Tools
    Sony ITD Tools E-Flyer pop up utility Smith 4 0507506.SND 1.2.1901.20464 False
    Sony ITD Tools HDD Kick Tool Smith 3 0520614.SND 3.1.5.0 False
    Sony ITD Tools VAIO Drivers Smith 10 0521610.SND G336B02 True
  • Items Associated to Series:
  • Type Release Name Index
    MODULE MOD-Click_To_DVD (0518903.snd)
    MODULE MOD-DVGate_Plus (0516403.snd)
    MODULE MOD-IceMaker (0519313.snd)
    MODULE MOD-Image_Converter (0517211.snd)
    MODULE MOD-Moodlogic (0516810.snd)
    MODULE MOD-MS_Works_Bundle (0506705.snd)
    MODULE MOD-NIS_2005_Trial (0521324.snd)
    MODULE MOD-Office_2003_Basic (0505102.snd)
    MODULE MOD-Office_2003_Professional (0520615.snd)
    MODULE MOD-Office_2003_Small_Business (0520613.snd)
    MODULE MOD-Office_2003_Small_Business_Trial (0519613.snd)
    MODULE MOD-Office_2003_Student_Teacher_Trial (0519616.snd)
    MODULE MOD-PhotoShop_Album_Starter_Edition (0517909.snd)
    MODULE MOD-Photoshop_Elements (0505510.snd)
    MODULE MOD-Premiere_Pro (0503904.snd)
    MODULE MOD-Premiere_Standard (0520304.snd)
    MODULE MOD-Quicken_New_User_Edition (0504901.snd)
    MODULE MOD-Roxio_DigitalMedia_SE (0518107.snd)
    MODULE MOD-S_S_M_S (0518801.snd)
    MODULE MOD-Spy_Subtract (0517402.snd)
    MODULE MOD-Toshiba_Bluetooth (0518111.snd)
    MODULE MOD-VAIO_Media (0519301.snd)
    MODULE MOD-VAIO_Survey_Standalone (0518615.snd)
    MODULE MOD-WinDVD (0518607.snd)
    MODULE MOD-Wireless_Help_Utility (0504904.snd)
    MODULE MOD-Wireless_Switch_Setting_Utility (0518108.snd)
    MODULE XMOD-AOL_Software (0519417.snd)
    MODULE XMOD-SonicStage (0517302.snd)
    Recovery Image P1 Recovery Image (0520914.snd)

    Changes from Previous:
  • Missing From Module Build 7
    Vendor Release Name Defect Owner Index Version
    New Components to Premiere Pro Module Build 7
    Defect
    Vendor Release Name Owner Index Version IRT ID Recovery
    New Releases to Premiere Pro Module Build 7
    Old
    Vendor Release Name Index New Version Old SITID Version
    Removed from Premiere Pro Module Build 7
    Vendor Release Name Defect Owner Index Version
    Sony Driver Settings Smith 6 0503807.SNC 050131 NB
    ITC Request Page
  • 13.6.10 RPT-10: Media Set Report
  • Type Release Name Index
    MODULE MOD-Click_To_DVD (0518903.snd)
    MODULE MOD-DVGate_Plus (0516403.snd)
    MODULE MOD-IceMaker (0519313.snd)
    MODULE MOD-Image_Converter (0517211.snd)
    MODULE MOD-Moodlogic (0516810.snd)
    MODULE MOD-MS_Works_Bundle (0506705.snd)
    MODULE MOD-NIS_2005_Trial (0521324.snd)
    MODULE MOD-Office_2003_Small_Business_Trial (0519613.snd)
    MODULE MOD-Office_2003_Student_Teacher_Trial (0519616.snd)
    MODULE MOD-PhotoShop_Album_Starter_Edition (0517909.snd)
    MODULE MOD-Photoshop_Elements (0505510.snd)
    MODULE MOD-Premiere_Pro (0503904.snd)
    MODULE MOD-Premiere_Standard (0520304.snd)
    MODULE MOD-Quicken_New_User_Edition (0504901.snd)
    MODULE MOD-Roxio_DigitalMedia_SE (0518107.snd)
    MODULE MOD-S_S_M_S (0518801.snd)
    MODULE MOD-Spy_Subtract (0517402.snd)
    MODULE MOD-Toshiba_Bluetooth (0518111.snd)
    MODULE MOD-VAIO_Media (0519301.snd)
    MODULE MOD-VAIO_Survey_Standalone (0518615.snd)
    MODULE MOD-WinDVD (0518607.snd)
    MODULE MOD-Wireless_Help_Utility (0504904.snd)
    MODULE MOD-Wireless_Switch_Setting_Utility (0518108.snd)
    MODULE XMOD-AOL_Software (0519417.snd)
    MODULE XMOD-SonicStage (0517302.snd)
    Recovery P1 Recovery Image (0520914.snd)
    Image
    Data File bitindex.ini (0519625.snd)
    Data File LeonV-HE Data File (0521334.snd)
    Data File module.ini R (0520102.snd)
    EPC EPC_A-0198-LeonV_Latest_Information (0521323.snd)
    EPC EPC_A-0199-Security_Updates_MS05-036_037 (0521602.snd)
    EPC EPC_A-0202-Security_Updates_MS05-038_039 (0523011.snd)
    Foundation FI-LeonV-HE (0520208.snd)
    Image
    PAC File FI-LeonV-HE PAC File (0520209.snd)
  • 13.6.11 RPT-11: Part Report
  • Attribute Name Description
    Part Name Adobe Premiere Pro
    Parent Planning Part Adobe Premiere Pro
    Active Yes
    Major Version
    7
    Part Type Installable Application
    Part Sub Type Application
    Dependency Append None
    Dependency Need: VAIO Edit Components 5.0
    Install Order After: VAIO Edit Components 5.0
    Customer Label Adobe Premiere Pro
    Customer Desc ENU-US: Adobe's semi professional
    video editing application.
    BLID N/A
    isDefault Yes
    Champion Smith
    1
    Owner Smith 1
    Localised By VOA
    Target Series Hogwarts4-MC
    Horizon2-HE
    Horizon2-MC
    Horizon2-PR
    Horizon3_GD-HE
    Horizon3_GD-MC
    Horizon3_GD-PR
    LeonS2-HE
    LeonS2-PR
    LeonV-HE
    LeonV-PR
    Messenger-HE
    Messenger-PR
    Sherry_WWAN-PR
    Spirit2-HE
    Spirit2-PR
    Spirit3-HE
    Spirit3-PR
    Series Dependency N/A
    Supported LangRegions ENU-US
    Change Log
    isTemporary No
    Default Installer Type (select EXE
    from list)
    Default Setup File Premiere.EXE
    Default Command Line -s -n
    Arguments
    Default OPK No
    Default Base Plus No
    Default Recoverable yes
    Default Interactive No
    Vendor Adobe
  • 13.6.12 RPT-12: Part Release Report
  • Attribute Name Description
    Release ID 120123
    Detailed Version 7.5.0.0
    Release Name Adobe Premiere 7.0
    Target LangRegions en_US
    Release Notes ***Install Instructions***
    [WeberN - 7/16/04 12:10:00 PM]
    Run Setup.exe
    ***Uninstall Instructions***
    [WeberN - 7/16/04 12:10:00 PM]
    Uninstall via Add/Remove Programs
    ***Release Notes***
    [WeberN—7/16/04 12:10:00 PM]
    Adobe Premiere Pro 7.5, OEM 282
    Status GM
    Submitted By Smith 22
    Next Release none
    Virus Check dropdown: statuses TBD
    WHQL status not applicable
    PlmStatus dropdown: statuses TBD
    Is Default Release yes
    Is Latest Release yes
    Version Path C:\PROGRAM FILES\ADOBE\
    PREMIERE PRO 7.5\ADOBE PREMIERE
    PRO.EXE
    Version ID 7.5.0.000.1010
    Version check before Premiere.EXE version 7.5
    installation
    Change Log No record
    Installed Folder Path C:\PROGRAM FILES\ADOBE\
    PREMIERE PRO 7.5\
    Installer Place TBD
    Installer Type (select from EXE
    list)
    Setup File Premiere.EXE
    Command Line -s -n
    Arguments
    OPK no
    Base Plus no
    Recoverable yes
    Interactive no
    Repackaged yes
    Snapshot ID n/a
  • 13.6.13 RPT-13: Part Release Version Report 13.6.14 RPT44: RTM Report
      • 1. User picks one Series/LangRegion.
      • 2. User picks one or more OSs.
      • 3. User selects which sub-reports to include.
      • 4. System presents format that can be loaded into MS Word for further editing.
    13.6.15 RPT-15: Test Status for Series 13.6.16 RPT46: Test Status for All Active Series 13.6.17 RPT47: Defect Report for Individual Defect
  • Now referencing FIG. 25, the screen shot of a “Defect View” is shown, which includes the defect report.
  • 13.6.18 RPT-18: Defects By User, Team, Series, Cycle, Etc. 13.6.19 RPT-19: Test Case Report
  • Now referencing FIG. 26, the screen shot of “Test Results: Update from test strategy” is shown.
  • 13.6.20 RPT-20: Test Strategy Report
  • With reference to FIG. 27, the report currently being implemented is shown. This report must be adapted to the Epic Data Model.
  • 13.6.21 RPT-20: Test Strategy Status Report 13.6.22 RPT-22: End-of-cycle Defect Report
      • 1. User picks one or more Series/LangRegion combinations.
      • 2. User picks one or more cycles or date ranges.
      • 3. User selects which sub-reports to include.
      • 4. System loads each report into separate worksheet (preferred) or separate excel document.
  • Defect Priority
  • Fall 05 Sum 05
    Priority Priority 0 58 82
    Priority 1 213 99
    Priority 2 263 139
    Priority 3 193 102
    Priority 4 22 4
    Priority N/A 146 114
    Total 895 540
  • Defect Severity
  • Fall 05 Sum 05
    Severity 0 20 22
    1 192 120
    2 357 176
    3 203 127
    N/A 123 95
    895 540
  • Defect Exposure
  • Fall 05 Sum 05
    Exposure LI 25 17
    HVCG 160 76
    LNFU 348 194
    LIDB 154 96
    VUS 101 59
    Blank 107 98
    895 540
  • Defect Resolution by Application Champion
  • Fall 05 Summer 05
    Champion Fixed Def/WNF Other Total Champion Fixed Def/WNF Other Total
    Smith 23 3 0 3 6 jones1 0 2 2 4
    Smith 24 12 1 5 18 jones2 1 0 0 1
    Smith 18 0 1 2 3 jones3 6 6 16 28
    Smith 25 1 1 2 4 jones4 15 3 8 26
    Smith 26 21 4 18 43 jones5 7 6 4 17
    Smith 27 24 12 6 42 jones 14 3 11 28
    Smith 28 9 1 12 22 jones 8 10 45 63
    Smith 29 1 4 12 17 Jone 0 5 3 8
    Smith 21 8 11 4 23 jones 13 1 3 17
    Smith 30 11 7 7 25 jonesa 1 6 0 7
    Smith 31 16 9 19 44 jones 1 5 5 11
    Smith 32 3 2 19 24 jones 8 2 1 11
    Smith 33 2 1 7 10 Smith 19 1 0 1 2
    Smith 5 19 2 13 34 jones 4 1 1 6
    Smith 19 20 2 1 23 jones 13 3 17 33
    Smith 20 3 2 3 8 jones 26 7 16 49
    Smith 34 6 8 20 34 jones 9 2 2 13
    Smith 35 5 0 3 8 jones 0 2 1 3
    Smith 12 11 4 13 27 jones 71 10 25 106
    Smith 14 4 18 14 36 jones 3 3 6 10
    Smith 10 49 32 58 139 Winter 4 5 2 11
    Smith 36 2 1 2 5 jones 1 40 22 63
    Smith 3 42 23 38 103 jones 7 7 6 20
    Smith 37 27 11 17 53
    Smith 9 4 4 9 17
    Smith 13 13 20 35 68
    Smith 15 9 35 4 48
  • Defect Resolution by Module (First Level Applications on FI BOM Should be Included)
  • Application Sev 0 Sev 1 Sev 2 Sev 3 N/A Total P = 0 P = 1 P = 2 P = 3 P = 4 P = N/A Total
    All resolutions - Fall 2005 - Top Ten
    HDD Kick Tool 0 29 34 12 14 89 0 34 21 18 2 14 89
    NB Hardware 0 18 26 2 10 56 0 14 19 10 3 10 56
    Other
    VAIO 0 2 7 29 4 42 0 2 6 30 0 4 42
    Registration
    VAIO Support
    8 0 11 18 2 39 12 0 6 18 0 3 39
    Central
    Desktop 0 16 10 2 2 30 1 15 10 2 0 2 30
    Hardware Other
    Sony Changer 3 6 14 7 0 30 3 7 14 6 0 0 30
    S/W
    Finger Print PS 0 2 19 5 1 27 0 0 15 9 1 2 27
    IE Remote 0 11 8 6 0 25 0 11 12 2 0 0 25
    Control
    Extension
    Kansas 0 5 10 10 0 25 25 0 0 0 0 0 25
    Emerald/Kansas
    SmartWi 1 2 6 7 8 24 1 2 9 4 0 8 24
    Connection
    Utility
    All resolutions - Summer 2005 - Top Ten
    HDD Kick Tool 0 46 45 14 6 111 23 32 39 9 0 8 111
    VAIO Control 0 2 18 13 10 43 1 7 11 11 1 12 43
    Central
    VAIO Central 12 0 9 5 6 32 24 0 0 1 0 7 32
    Beta
    Connection
    1 0 2 21 4 28 0 0 12 9 1 6 28
    Manager
    SmartWi 0 0 1 16 9 26 0 1 3 12 0 10 26
    Connection
    Utility
    Emerald Beta 1 7 5 3 3 19 14 0 0 2 0 3 19
    VAIO 0 0 5 5 4 14 0 1 1 8 0 4 14
    Registration
    Intel Graphics 0 2 3 3 5 13 0 2 4 2 0 5 13
    Windows Media 0 2 4 2 3 11 0 2 2 4 0 3 11
    Center
    AOL 0 5 1 1 2 9 0 3 2 2 0 2 9
  • Ton Ten Deferred/Will Not Fix Defects
  • Application Sev 0 Sev 1 Sev 2 Sev 3 N/A Total
    Top Ten Deferred/Will Not Fix Fall 2005
    VAIO Registration 0 0 4 27 0 31
    HDD Kick Tool 0 1 10 9 0 20
    VAIO Support Central 0 0 5 13 0 18
    Windows MCE 0 0 4 8 0 12
     Notebook Hardware Other 0 1 8 2 0 11
    Sony Changer S/W 0 1 4 4 0 9
    Fingerprint Protection Suite 0 0 3 3 0 6
    Intel 915G Graphics 0 0 4 2 0 6
    MOD-Wireless Connection 0 0 1 5 0 6
    Utility
    Libertas 802.11bg Wireless 0 1 0 4 0 5
    Top Ten Deferred/Will Not Fix Summer 2005
    Connection Manager 0 0 2 18 0 20
    SmartWi Connection Utility 0 0 0 15 0 15
    HDD Kick Tool 0 3 6 1 0 10
    Emerald Beta 1 0 1 2 2 6
    VAIO Registration 0 0 2 4 0 6
    Intel Graphics 0 0 2 3 0 5
    VAIO Control Center 0 0 2 3 0 5
    Windows MCE 0 0 3 2 0 5
    AOL 0 2 1 1 0 4
    VAIO Central Beta 1 0 2 0 0 3
  • 13.6.23 RPT-23: Build Count
  • FI Recovery
    Project OS Builds Media Builds
    Horizon2 MCE 4 1
    Horizon2 HE 2 2
    Mare4/Viento4 HE 4 4
    Spirit2 HE 3 3
    Spirit2 PR 3 3
    JediH2 HE 2 3
    LeonS2 HE 2 2
    LeonS2 PR 2 2
    Horizon2 LA 2 2
    HE
    Viento LA 2 2
    HE
    Horizon2 PR 2 2
    Spirit2 LA 4 2
    HE
    Spirit2 LA 4 2
    PR
    LeonS2 LA 2 2
    HE
    LeonS2 LA 2 3
    PR
    Spirit2 FC 2 2
    HE
    Aroma3 HE 4 5
    Aroma3 PR 3 5
    Aroma3 LA 2 2
    PR
    Hogwarts4 MCE 4 4
    Hogwarts4 LA 2 1
    HE
  • While the particular SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR SOFTWARE INTEGRATION AND FACTORY DEPLOYMENT is herein shown and described in detail, it is to be understood that the subject matter which is encompassed by the present invention is limited only by the claims.

Claims (29)

1. A method for managing computer production in an enterprise, comprising:
receiving a block of software offerings, each block being associated with at least one product series;
receiving a product series component structure defining parts for a respective product series;
adding parts required for a product series to the block associated with the series, parts being assigned to each software class and related software specification pair in a block based on the part or parts required for the pair to thereby define a design structure;
storing the data structure on a tangible computer readable medium; and
establishing a software bill of materials (BOM) on the computer readable medium based on the design structure using at least one of: a template and/or a snapshot; and
accessing the computer readable medium to provide software on a computer.
2. The method of claim 1, further comprising:
defining software offerings, a software offering including at least one software class and at least one associated software specification;
associating at least one software offering with at least one product series in a plurality of series to establish a configuration, configurations cumulatively defining a configuration range that contains product offerings of the enterprise for all regions in which the enterprise does business; and
grouping classes into blocks, a block being associated with at least one product series.
3. The method of claim 2, comprising defining which classes are dependent on each other.
4. The method of claim 3, comprising defining which blocks are base blocks.
5-8. (canceled)
9. A software management database on a computer readable medium, the database containing:
data structures supporting computer software provisioning for a range of CTO/BTO variations, language variations, region variations, and operating system variations.
10. The database of claim 9, comprising:
bill of materials (BUM) entities, each BOM entity containing information related to parent BOMs and child BOMs, if any, each BOM entity also including at least one engineering part ID, at least one software release ID, at least one major version ID, at least one group ID, at least one component ID, at least one planning parts ID, and at least one software series ID; and
at least one plan parts entity including launch dates for software base releases, import dates for software bases indicating when the bases were imported into computers, identifications for software bases.
11. The database of claim 10, comprising at least one components entity including launch dates for software base releases, import dates for software bases, identifications for software bases.
12. The database of claim 11, comprising at least one software release entity containing a base ID, a name, a file path, a launch date.
13. The database of claim 12, comprising at least one software release status entity including data representing status and name of a software release.
14. The database of claim 13, comprising at least one group entity containing data representing a name and launch of a type.
15. The database of claim 14, comprising at least one series entity containing a software series ID, base ID, name, an indication of being active, a launch date, an import date.
16. The database of claim 15, comprising at least one engineering parts entity containing an engineering part ID, a base ID, a type ID, a name, a launch date, and indication of dependent parts.
17. The database of claim 16, comprising at least one engineering parts major revision entity containing information related to default use.
18. The database of claim 17, comprising at least one engineering part software release entity containing information on a related engineering part entity, a related engineering parts major revision entity, a related language code entity.
19. The database of claim 18, comprising at least one language entity containing information related to a language name and a language code.
20. A computer-implemented system for creating bills of materials (BOMs), comprising logic executable by a computer and stored on a computer readable medium, the logic:
facilitating creation of BOMs using templates and/or snapshots.
21. The system of claim 20, wherein BOMs are automatically generated based on part attributes and groups of parts, major versions, and releases.
22. The system of claim, wherein the logic automatically checks BOMs to reduce errors.
23. A computer system executing logic stored on a computer readable medium, the computer system:
entering, into a first database, first software data, the first software data including operating systems and configure to order/build to order (CTO/BTO) options;
transferring at least some of the first software data in the first database to a comprehensive global database; and
automatically adding to a bill of materials (BOM) through the comprehensive global database second software data, the second software data including one or more of operating system updates, device drivers, utilities.
24. The system of claim 23, wherein software along with metadata that describes the software is checked into the comprehensive global database by users.
25. The system of claim 24, wherein the BOM for a specific series/language/region is frozen/locked and the process to create factory deliverables including software image, software modules, and data) is then begun.
26. The system of claim 25, wherein factory deliverables derived from the comprehensive global database are tested and validated to meet quality standards, the factory deliverables, and metadata that describes them, then being delivered to a factory to be used in mass production.
27. The system of claim 26, wherein the comprehensive global database supports software variations in CTO/BTO, language, region, and OS, the comprehensive global database facilitating the creation of CTO systems, based on individual customer orders, in a mass production process with every piece of software preinstalled and ready to use.
28. The system of claim 28, wherein the comprehensive global database facilitates automatically mapping hardware components to software releases.
29. The system of claim 28, wherein the comprehensive global database facilitates specifying language and geographic region for each software release at the time of software check-in, with a correct release being assigned to each BOM automatically.
30. The system of claim 29, wherein the comprehensive global database facilitates creation of BOMs using templates and snapshots for efficiency, the BOMs being automatically generated based on part attributes, groups of parts, major versions, and releases.
31. The system of claim 29, wherein the comprehensive global database facilitates automatic checking of BOMs to reduce errors.
32. The system of claim 29, wherein the comprehensive global database facilitates use of a list of software releases directly instead of microcode, with microcode bit mappings being constrained to each recovery media set that is defined.
US13/160,715 2005-09-29 2011-06-15 System and method for software integration and factory deployment Abandoned US20120036049A1 (en)

Priority Applications (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US13/160,715 US20120036049A1 (en) 2005-09-29 2011-06-15 System and method for software integration and factory deployment

Applications Claiming Priority (3)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US72213005P 2005-09-29 2005-09-29
US11/541,433 US8065204B2 (en) 2005-09-29 2006-09-29 System and method for software integration and factory deployment
US13/160,715 US20120036049A1 (en) 2005-09-29 2011-06-15 System and method for software integration and factory deployment

Related Parent Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US11/541,433 Division US8065204B2 (en) 2005-09-29 2006-09-29 System and method for software integration and factory deployment

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
US20120036049A1 true US20120036049A1 (en) 2012-02-09

Family

ID=38611040

Family Applications (2)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US11/541,433 Expired - Fee Related US8065204B2 (en) 2005-09-29 2006-09-29 System and method for software integration and factory deployment
US13/160,715 Abandoned US20120036049A1 (en) 2005-09-29 2011-06-15 System and method for software integration and factory deployment

Family Applications Before (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US11/541,433 Expired - Fee Related US8065204B2 (en) 2005-09-29 2006-09-29 System and method for software integration and factory deployment

Country Status (1)

Country Link
US (2) US8065204B2 (en)

Cited By (9)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20120324440A1 (en) * 2011-06-16 2012-12-20 Microsoft Corporation Cloud based management of an in-store device experience
US20130219156A1 (en) * 2012-02-22 2013-08-22 Sungard Availability Services Lp Compliance aware change control
US20160072673A1 (en) * 2014-04-21 2016-03-10 Iboss, Inc. Generating proxy automatic configuration scripts
US20170300852A1 (en) * 2016-04-14 2017-10-19 The Boeing Company Manufacturing materiel supply chain disruption management system
CN109413674A (en) * 2018-11-21 2019-03-01 深圳市吉祥腾达科技有限公司 A kind of more wireless clients band machine ageing testing method based on packet capturing playback technology
CN109542460A (en) * 2018-10-15 2019-03-29 深圳点猫科技有限公司 A kind of method and electronic equipment based on access typescript in the vue for educating operating system
US11082315B1 (en) * 2020-12-14 2021-08-03 Qualcomm Incorporated Method of sub flow or activity classification
WO2021184728A1 (en) * 2020-03-17 2021-09-23 平安科技(深圳)有限公司 Automatic packaging construction method and device, and computer readable storage medium
CN114860582A (en) * 2022-04-14 2022-08-05 中国电子科技集团公司第十五研究所 Web page test auxiliary method and system

Families Citing this family (104)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US11467856B2 (en) 2002-12-12 2022-10-11 Flexiworld Technologies, Inc. Portable USB device for internet access service
US7779407B2 (en) * 2002-05-29 2010-08-17 Adams Phillip M Computer-hardware, life-extension apparatus and method
WO2004055638A2 (en) 2002-12-12 2004-07-01 Flexiworld Technologies, Inc. Wireless communication between computing devices
WO2004093149A2 (en) 2003-04-11 2004-10-28 Flexiworld Technologies, Inc. Autorun for integrated circuit memory component
KR100746026B1 (en) * 2006-01-04 2007-08-06 삼성전자주식회사 Apparatus and method for installing software
US7885858B2 (en) * 2006-01-24 2011-02-08 Dell Products L.P. System and method for managing information handling system wireless network provisioning
US7721284B2 (en) * 2006-04-27 2010-05-18 Microsoft Corporation Deployment of multiple embedded operating system components
JP4201025B2 (en) 2006-06-30 2008-12-24 ソニー株式会社 Monitoring device, monitoring system, filter setting method, and monitoring program
US7886292B2 (en) * 2006-10-05 2011-02-08 International Business Machines Corporation Methodology of individualized software deployment for hardware-independent personal computer mass development
US8151060B2 (en) 2006-11-28 2012-04-03 Hitachi, Ltd. Semiconductor memory system having a snapshot function
GB0623933D0 (en) * 2006-11-29 2007-01-10 Ibm Apparatus and method for synchronizing controller firmware download
US7668299B2 (en) * 2006-12-15 2010-02-23 Verizon Patent And Licensing Inc. System using script command to generate audio quality test case to test a network
US8359566B2 (en) * 2007-04-13 2013-01-22 International Business Machines Corporation Software factory
KR20080093332A (en) * 2007-04-16 2008-10-21 삼성전자주식회사 Method for generating firmware update file and for updating firmware by using the firmware update file and apparatus thereof
WO2009007967A2 (en) * 2007-07-09 2009-01-15 Nolio Ltd. System and method for application process automation over a computer network
US8146076B1 (en) * 2007-09-17 2012-03-27 Symantec Corporation Systems and methods for customizing boot disk images using prioritization
JP5125595B2 (en) * 2008-02-22 2013-01-23 横河電機株式会社 Recording medium, installation method, and computer program
US8677144B2 (en) * 2008-02-25 2014-03-18 Cavium, Inc. Secure software and hardware association technique
US8515727B2 (en) * 2008-03-19 2013-08-20 International Business Machines Corporation Automatic logic model build process with autonomous quality checking
US8751929B2 (en) * 2008-03-19 2014-06-10 Universal Scientific Industrial (Shanghai) Co., Ltd. Machine-implemented data conversion method for a bill of materials
US8166457B2 (en) * 2008-03-31 2012-04-24 International Business Machines Corporation Method and system for implementing a complete SAP system landscape on IBM System i
US8667469B2 (en) 2008-05-29 2014-03-04 International Business Machines Corporation Staged automated validation of work packets inputs and deliverables in a software factory
US8595044B2 (en) 2008-05-29 2013-11-26 International Business Machines Corporation Determining competence levels of teams working within a software
US8312448B2 (en) * 2008-06-24 2012-11-13 Sony Corporation Configuration to order software deployment and management
US20090328023A1 (en) * 2008-06-27 2009-12-31 Gregory Roger Bestland Implementing optimized installs around pre-install and post-install actions
US8452629B2 (en) 2008-07-15 2013-05-28 International Business Machines Corporation Work packet enabled active project schedule maintenance
US8527329B2 (en) 2008-07-15 2013-09-03 International Business Machines Corporation Configuring design centers, assembly lines and job shops of a global delivery network into “on demand” factories
US8140367B2 (en) 2008-07-22 2012-03-20 International Business Machines Corporation Open marketplace for distributed service arbitrage with integrated risk management
US8418126B2 (en) 2008-07-23 2013-04-09 International Business Machines Corporation Software factory semantic reconciliation of data models for work packets
US8375370B2 (en) 2008-07-23 2013-02-12 International Business Machines Corporation Application/service event root cause traceability causal and impact analyzer
US8336026B2 (en) 2008-07-31 2012-12-18 International Business Machines Corporation Supporting a work packet request with a specifically tailored IDE
US8448129B2 (en) 2008-07-31 2013-05-21 International Business Machines Corporation Work packet delegation in a software factory
US8271949B2 (en) 2008-07-31 2012-09-18 International Business Machines Corporation Self-healing factory processes in a software factory
US20100269087A1 (en) * 2009-04-20 2010-10-21 Vidya Abhijit Kabra Software tools usage framework based on tools effective usage index
US9009667B2 (en) * 2009-09-30 2015-04-14 Red Hat, Inc. Application server that supports multiple component models
US8738589B2 (en) * 2009-09-30 2014-05-27 Red Hat, Inc. Classloading technique for an application server that provides dependency enforcement
KR101636457B1 (en) * 2009-12-28 2016-07-05 삼성전자주식회사 The image forming apparatus which operates based on framework can owns function among a plurality of bundle and method for installing of bundle in the image forming apparatus
US8327330B1 (en) * 2010-01-11 2012-12-04 Google Inc. System and method of generating build instructions
US8935666B2 (en) * 2010-06-30 2015-01-13 Gordon G. MILLER, III Systems and methods for dynamic mobile applications
US9230273B2 (en) * 2010-07-28 2016-01-05 International Business Machines Corporation Creation and use of constraint templates
US9122998B2 (en) 2010-07-28 2015-09-01 International Business Machines Corporation Catalog-based software license reconciliation
US8407073B2 (en) 2010-08-25 2013-03-26 International Business Machines Corporation Scheduling resources from a multi-skill multi-level human resource pool
US8762433B1 (en) * 2010-10-18 2014-06-24 Lockheed Martin Corporation Integration architecture for software and hardware development
US8782635B2 (en) * 2011-01-19 2014-07-15 International Business Machines Corporation Reconfiguration of computer system to allow application installation
US9584949B2 (en) 2011-01-27 2017-02-28 Microsoft Technology Licensing, Llc Cloud based master data management architecture
US20120198018A1 (en) * 2011-01-27 2012-08-02 Microsoft Corporation Securely publishing data to network service
US20120203806A1 (en) * 2011-02-07 2012-08-09 Ivan Panushev Building information management system
US8914784B2 (en) 2011-06-10 2014-12-16 International Business Machines Corporation Method and system for checking the consistency of application jar files
US8660878B2 (en) 2011-06-15 2014-02-25 International Business Machines Corporation Model-driven assignment of work to a software factory
US8843764B2 (en) 2011-07-15 2014-09-23 Cavium, Inc. Secure software and hardware association technique
US10147123B2 (en) 2011-09-29 2018-12-04 Amazon Technologies, Inc. Electronic marketplace for hosted service images
US9530156B2 (en) 2011-09-29 2016-12-27 Amazon Technologies, Inc. Customizable uniform control user interface for hosted service images
US9626700B1 (en) 2011-09-29 2017-04-18 Amazon Technologies, Inc. Aggregation of operational data for merchandizing of network accessible services
US8776043B1 (en) * 2011-09-29 2014-07-08 Amazon Technologies, Inc. Service image notifications
US8214692B1 (en) * 2011-09-30 2012-07-03 Google Inc. System and method for enforcing a third-party factory test
CN103176805B (en) * 2011-12-21 2017-09-19 富泰华工业(深圳)有限公司 The method and system that executable program is installed
US10140106B2 (en) * 2012-01-13 2018-11-27 Siemens Aktiengesellschaft Method, computer readable medium and system for deploying and merging release independent applications
US9081747B1 (en) 2012-03-06 2015-07-14 Big Bang Llc Computer program deployment to one or more target devices
EP2880552A4 (en) * 2012-07-31 2016-04-27 Hewlett Packard Development Co System architecture generation
US20140157238A1 (en) * 2012-11-30 2014-06-05 Microsoft Corporation Systems and methods of assessing software quality for hardware devices
US10235278B2 (en) * 2013-03-07 2019-03-19 International Business Machines Corporation Software testing using statistical error injection
US9299049B2 (en) * 2013-03-15 2016-03-29 Sap Se Contract-based process integration
JP6010796B2 (en) * 2013-03-19 2016-10-19 株式会社Pfu Information processing apparatus, information processing system, and program
US20150026153A1 (en) * 2013-07-17 2015-01-22 Thoughtspot, Inc. Search engine for information retrieval system
JP2015046075A (en) * 2013-08-29 2015-03-12 キヤノン株式会社 Information processor, control method therefor, and computer program
US9317254B1 (en) * 2013-12-04 2016-04-19 Google Inc. Fault tolerance model, methods, and apparatuses and their validation techniques
DE102013225058A1 (en) * 2013-12-05 2015-06-11 Fraunhofer-Gesellschaft zur Förderung der angewandten Forschung e.V. DEVICE, SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR THE EFFICIENT AND DELIVERABLE SYNCHRONIZATION OF GRAPHIC DATA STRUCTURES
US9374275B2 (en) * 2013-12-11 2016-06-21 Dropbox, Inc. Rapid application development using a content management system
US11087340B1 (en) * 2013-12-17 2021-08-10 EMC IP Holding Company LLC Systems and methods for configuring converged infrastructure components
JP6375679B2 (en) * 2014-04-24 2018-08-22 富士通株式会社 Server information management apparatus, server information management program, and server information management method
US20160026941A1 (en) * 2014-07-26 2016-01-28 International Business Machines Corporation Updating and synchronizing existing case instances in response to solution design changes
US9792094B2 (en) * 2014-09-04 2017-10-17 Home Box Office, Inc. Factory identification system
US9553843B1 (en) 2014-10-08 2017-01-24 Google Inc. Service directory profile for a fabric network
US20160139909A1 (en) * 2014-11-13 2016-05-19 Martin Pospischil Delta patch process
IN2015CH03905A (en) * 2015-07-30 2015-08-14 Wipro Ltd
US10001975B2 (en) * 2015-09-21 2018-06-19 Shridhar V. Bharthulwar Integrated system for software application development
WO2017087822A1 (en) * 2015-11-18 2017-05-26 Level 3 Communications, Llc Service activation system
JP6441786B2 (en) * 2015-12-04 2018-12-19 株式会社日立製作所 Test support apparatus, test support method, and program
US20170352073A1 (en) * 2016-06-02 2017-12-07 Accenture Global Solutions Limited Platform configuration tool
EP3264208B1 (en) * 2016-06-30 2021-01-06 Siemens Aktiengesellschaft Method for updating process objects in an engineering system
US10248387B2 (en) * 2016-09-21 2019-04-02 Shridhar V. Bharthulwar Integrated system for software application development
US20180157485A1 (en) * 2016-12-02 2018-06-07 Sap Se Software management integration in a product management system
US10678629B2 (en) * 2017-11-28 2020-06-09 Bank Of America Corporation Dynamic failure-resolution computing engine
US10824543B2 (en) * 2018-03-08 2020-11-03 Mayank Mohan Sharma System and method for automated software test case designing based on machine learning (ML)
US10901874B2 (en) 2018-05-18 2021-01-26 Sony Interactive Entertainment LLC Shadow testing
US10691582B2 (en) * 2018-05-29 2020-06-23 Sony Interactive Entertainment LLC Code coverage
US11010351B1 (en) * 2018-10-31 2021-05-18 EMC IP Holding Company LLC File system replication between software defined network attached storage processes using file system snapshots
CN109522174B (en) * 2018-11-14 2022-05-03 西安闻泰电子科技有限公司 Method, device, terminal and storage medium for controlling adb enabling
US10642716B1 (en) * 2019-02-07 2020-05-05 Fujitsu Limited Automated software program repair
US11113432B2 (en) 2019-05-09 2021-09-07 Micron Technology, Inc. Encoding images on physical objects to trace specifications for a manufacturing process
US10877467B2 (en) 2019-05-09 2020-12-29 Micron Technology, Inc. Structured server access for manufactured product based on scanning of encoded images
US11366976B2 (en) 2019-05-09 2022-06-21 Micron Technology, Inc. Updating manufactured product life cycle data in a database based on scanning of encoded images
US10809696B1 (en) * 2019-05-09 2020-10-20 Micron Technology, Inc. Scanning encoded images on physical objects to determine parameters for a manufacturing process
US11625565B2 (en) 2019-05-09 2023-04-11 Micron Technology, Inc. Marking integrated circuit package with encoded image for scanning to obtain manufacturing parameters
US11243513B2 (en) 2019-05-09 2022-02-08 Micron Technology, Inc. Controlling transport of physical objects based on scanning of encoded images
US11087104B2 (en) 2019-05-09 2021-08-10 Micron Technology, Inc. Automatically updating database records regarding materials used in manufacturing based on scanning of encoded images
CN110633091A (en) * 2019-08-28 2019-12-31 西安超霸电气科技有限公司 Electronic module and software wireless upgrading method thereof
CN110968317B (en) * 2019-12-02 2023-04-18 广州鲁邦通物联网科技股份有限公司 Method and system for automatically generating vue page assembly through UCI/USI configuration file
CN111290997B (en) * 2020-01-17 2023-06-06 北京轩宇信息技术有限公司 BRD file data automatic analysis method and device
US11544272B2 (en) 2020-04-09 2023-01-03 Thoughtspot, Inc. Phrase translation for a low-latency database analysis system
US20220138082A1 (en) * 2020-07-15 2022-05-05 Copado, Inc. Applied Computer Technology for High Efficiency and Scalable Value Stream Mapping
CN112817623B (en) * 2021-01-26 2021-10-08 北京自如信息科技有限公司 Method and device for publishing application program, mobile terminal and readable storage medium
CN113159674B (en) * 2021-04-01 2024-03-05 杭州涂鸦信息技术有限公司 Material information creation method, material management device and storage medium
CN115237386B (en) * 2022-09-19 2022-12-27 杭州实在智能科技有限公司 Method and system for developing large-scale complex Windows native desktop

Citations (16)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US5894571A (en) * 1995-08-14 1999-04-13 Dell U.S.A., L.P. Process for configuring software in a build-to-order computer system
US6167383A (en) * 1998-09-22 2000-12-26 Dell Usa, Lp Method and apparatus for providing customer configured machines at an internet site
US6182275B1 (en) * 1998-01-26 2001-01-30 Dell Usa, L.P. Generation of a compatible order for a computer system
US20020123918A1 (en) * 2001-03-05 2002-09-05 Dell Products L.P. System and method for manufacturing and shipping products according to customer orders
US20020188499A1 (en) * 2000-10-27 2002-12-12 Manugistics, Inc. System and method for ensuring order fulfillment
US20030163753A1 (en) * 2002-02-28 2003-08-28 Dell Products L.P. Automatic BIOS recovery in a multi-node computer system
US20030208392A1 (en) * 2000-10-27 2003-11-06 Manugistics, Inc. Optimizing resource plans
US6775829B1 (en) * 1998-06-04 2004-08-10 Gateway, Inc. Method for configuring software for a build to order system
US6792556B1 (en) * 2000-05-31 2004-09-14 Dell Products L.P. Boot record recovery
US20050188280A1 (en) * 2004-01-30 2005-08-25 Dell Products L.P. Automatic media repair after read failure due to media error
US20050203756A1 (en) * 2004-03-09 2005-09-15 Dell Products L.P. Computer network and method for manufacturing a computer network
US20050283410A1 (en) * 2000-06-13 2005-12-22 Dell Products L.P. Automated configuration catalog
US20060167577A1 (en) * 2005-01-14 2006-07-27 Clark William A System and method of manufacturing a customized product
US7403975B2 (en) * 2002-11-08 2008-07-22 Jda Software Group, Inc. Design for highly-scalable, distributed replenishment planning algorithm
US20090177999A1 (en) * 2008-01-09 2009-07-09 Dell Products L.P. Replacement motherboard configuration
US20110165896A1 (en) * 2010-01-05 2011-07-07 Stromberg Russel M Mobile communications resource management system

Family Cites Families (17)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US5376930A (en) * 1992-04-22 1994-12-27 Maytag Corporation Data acquisition system having selective communication capability
US5668992A (en) * 1994-08-01 1997-09-16 International Business Machines Corporation Self-configuring computer system
US5991543A (en) * 1997-08-29 1999-11-23 Dell Usa, L.P. Software installation and testing for a build-to-order computer system
US5963743A (en) * 1997-08-29 1999-10-05 Dell Usa, L.P. Database for facilitating software installation and testing for a build-to-order computer system
US5995757A (en) * 1997-08-29 1999-11-30 Dell Usa, L.P. Software installation and testing for a build-to order computer system
US6092189A (en) * 1998-04-30 2000-07-18 Compaq Computer Corporation Channel configuration program server architecture
US6178546B1 (en) * 1998-08-31 2001-01-23 Alcatel Usa Sourcing, L.P. System and method of making software product deliverables
US6754883B2 (en) * 1999-08-24 2004-06-22 Ge Medical Systems Information Technologies, Inc. Modular analysis and standardization system
US6493871B1 (en) * 1999-09-16 2002-12-10 Microsoft Corporation Method and system for downloading updates for software installation
US7020697B1 (en) * 1999-10-01 2006-03-28 Accenture Llp Architectures for netcentric computing systems
US20020087440A1 (en) * 2000-12-29 2002-07-04 Blair William R. Method for reconstructing and validating a bill of materials and creating a comprehensive bill of materials
US20020107749A1 (en) * 2001-02-05 2002-08-08 David Leslie Networked based paralleling switchgear equipment configuration process
GB2383854B (en) * 2001-09-06 2005-06-22 Sun Microsystems Inc Method for checking a computer system configuration
US6954930B2 (en) * 2002-02-19 2005-10-11 International Business Machines Corporation Remote validation of installation input data
US6850904B2 (en) * 2002-07-25 2005-02-01 International Business Machines Corporation Relational database for producing bill-of-materials from planning information
US7441219B2 (en) * 2003-06-24 2008-10-21 National Semiconductor Corporation Method for creating, modifying, and simulating electrical circuits over the internet
US7225208B2 (en) * 2003-09-30 2007-05-29 Iron Mountain Incorporated Systems and methods for backing up data files

Patent Citations (17)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US5894571A (en) * 1995-08-14 1999-04-13 Dell U.S.A., L.P. Process for configuring software in a build-to-order computer system
US6182275B1 (en) * 1998-01-26 2001-01-30 Dell Usa, L.P. Generation of a compatible order for a computer system
US6775829B1 (en) * 1998-06-04 2004-08-10 Gateway, Inc. Method for configuring software for a build to order system
US6167383A (en) * 1998-09-22 2000-12-26 Dell Usa, Lp Method and apparatus for providing customer configured machines at an internet site
US6792556B1 (en) * 2000-05-31 2004-09-14 Dell Products L.P. Boot record recovery
US20050283410A1 (en) * 2000-06-13 2005-12-22 Dell Products L.P. Automated configuration catalog
US20020188499A1 (en) * 2000-10-27 2002-12-12 Manugistics, Inc. System and method for ensuring order fulfillment
US20030208392A1 (en) * 2000-10-27 2003-11-06 Manugistics, Inc. Optimizing resource plans
US7668761B2 (en) * 2000-10-27 2010-02-23 Jda Software Group System and method for ensuring order fulfillment
US20020123918A1 (en) * 2001-03-05 2002-09-05 Dell Products L.P. System and method for manufacturing and shipping products according to customer orders
US20030163753A1 (en) * 2002-02-28 2003-08-28 Dell Products L.P. Automatic BIOS recovery in a multi-node computer system
US7403975B2 (en) * 2002-11-08 2008-07-22 Jda Software Group, Inc. Design for highly-scalable, distributed replenishment planning algorithm
US20050188280A1 (en) * 2004-01-30 2005-08-25 Dell Products L.P. Automatic media repair after read failure due to media error
US20050203756A1 (en) * 2004-03-09 2005-09-15 Dell Products L.P. Computer network and method for manufacturing a computer network
US20060167577A1 (en) * 2005-01-14 2006-07-27 Clark William A System and method of manufacturing a customized product
US20090177999A1 (en) * 2008-01-09 2009-07-09 Dell Products L.P. Replacement motherboard configuration
US20110165896A1 (en) * 2010-01-05 2011-07-07 Stromberg Russel M Mobile communications resource management system

Cited By (13)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US9171314B2 (en) * 2011-06-16 2015-10-27 Microsoft Technology Licensing, Llc Cloud based management of an in-store device experience
US20120324440A1 (en) * 2011-06-16 2012-12-20 Microsoft Corporation Cloud based management of an in-store device experience
US20130219156A1 (en) * 2012-02-22 2013-08-22 Sungard Availability Services Lp Compliance aware change control
US20160072673A1 (en) * 2014-04-21 2016-03-10 Iboss, Inc. Generating proxy automatic configuration scripts
US9544189B2 (en) * 2014-04-21 2017-01-10 Iboss, Inc. Generating proxy automatic configuration scripts
US11315077B2 (en) * 2016-04-14 2022-04-26 The Boeing Company Manufacturing materiel supply chain disruption management system
US20170300852A1 (en) * 2016-04-14 2017-10-19 The Boeing Company Manufacturing materiel supply chain disruption management system
US10592853B2 (en) * 2016-04-14 2020-03-17 The Boeing Company Manufacturing materiel supply chain disruption management system
CN109542460A (en) * 2018-10-15 2019-03-29 深圳点猫科技有限公司 A kind of method and electronic equipment based on access typescript in the vue for educating operating system
CN109413674A (en) * 2018-11-21 2019-03-01 深圳市吉祥腾达科技有限公司 A kind of more wireless clients band machine ageing testing method based on packet capturing playback technology
WO2021184728A1 (en) * 2020-03-17 2021-09-23 平安科技(深圳)有限公司 Automatic packaging construction method and device, and computer readable storage medium
US11082315B1 (en) * 2020-12-14 2021-08-03 Qualcomm Incorporated Method of sub flow or activity classification
CN114860582A (en) * 2022-04-14 2022-08-05 中国电子科技集团公司第十五研究所 Web page test auxiliary method and system

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
US20070240154A1 (en) 2007-10-11
US8065204B2 (en) 2011-11-22

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
US20120036049A1 (en) System and method for software integration and factory deployment
Bouman et al. Pentaho solutions
US8584119B2 (en) Multi-scenerio software deployment
US8312414B2 (en) Method and system for executing a data integration application using executable units that operate independently of each other
US9098364B2 (en) Migration services for systems
CN102648465B (en) Remote data collection systems and methods
US20090138293A1 (en) Solution that automatically recommends design assets when making architectural design decisions for information services
US20060229994A1 (en) Automatic generation of license package for solution components
US20100250730A1 (en) Automated license reconciliation for deployed applications
EP1677243A1 (en) Method and apparatus for metadata driven business logic processing
CN103593174A (en) Adaptable business object
WO2012051389A1 (en) Method and system for developing data integration applications with reusable semantic types to represent and process application data
JP2008536210A (en) Module application for mobile data systems
WO2010118416A2 (en) Software database system and process of building and operating the same
US20050216486A1 (en) Methods and systems for software release management
CN102736915A (en) Automatic program generation device, method, and computer program
US10572247B2 (en) Prototype management system
Oltmans et al. Preservation functionality in a digital archive
JP6813782B2 (en) Information processing equipment, information processing system, its control method and program
Li JIRA 5.2 Essentials
Chapple Microsoft SQL Server 2008 for dummies
Martinez Sanchez MRO 4.0: Redesign and enhancement of an aircraft maintenance management application
Schneider et al. Microsoft SQL Server 2008 All-in-One Desk Reference For Dummies
CN116185793A (en) Point embedding method, point embedding device, computer readable storage medium and electronic equipment
Mosby et al. Mastering system center configuration manager 2007 R2

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
STCB Information on status: application discontinuation

Free format text: ABANDONED -- FAILURE TO RESPOND TO AN OFFICE ACTION